Выключатели концевые

Выключатели концевые
Contents
Limit Switches
F-2
D4C
Enclosed Switch
F-9
[email protected]
Small Sealed Switch
F-31
SHL
Enclosed Switch
F-45
WL
Two-circuit Limit Switch
F-57
[email protected]
Long-life Two-circuit Limit Switch
F-99
[email protected]
Enclosed Switch
F-109
ZE/ZV/XE/XV
Enclosed Switches
F-119
A
General-purpose Basic Switch
F-131
DZ
Special-purpose Basic Switch
F-139
TZ
High-temperature Basic Switch
F-145
X
General-purpose Basic Switch
F-149
Z
General-purpose Basic Switch
F-157
Z/A/X/DZ
Z/A/X/DZ Common Accessories
F-189
Technical Information
Limit Switches
F-195
Basic Switches
F-205
F-1
Limit
Switches
Selection Guide
Selection Guide
Limit Switches
Classification
General-purpose limit switch
Model
[email protected]
Enclosed switch
D4C
Miniature limit switch
D4CC
Appearance
40
101.6
40
49
57
44
16
16
42
Features
Degree of protection
Rated current (A)
A new version with
better seal, shock
resistance, and strength
Small, slim-bodied high-precision
enclosed switch
Many models including roller lever
switches only 16-mm thick with
connector
IEC
IP67
IP67
IP67
JIS
Immersion-proof
Immersion-proof
Immersion-proof
20
15
480 VAC
10
Microload type
Mechanical life*
expectancy
(x 1,000
operations min.)
Electrical life*
expectancy
(x 1,000
operations min.)
125 VAC
30 VDC
250 VAC
5
Yes
Yes
---
50,000
40,000
Two circuits
Four circuits
30,000
20,000
10,000
1,000
Two circuits
800
Four circuits
(750)
600
400
200
Operation indicator
Yes
Yes
Yes
Mounting pitch
59.5 x 29.4 mm
25 mm
25 mm
Actuators
Roller lever, adjustable roller lever, top
plunger, side roller lever, coil spring
Roller lever, top plunger, bevel plunger,
top roller plunger
Center roller lever, roller lever, top
plunger, bevel plunger, top roller
plunger
–
UL, CSA
Approved standards
Page No.
F-2
This product is not shown in the cata- F-9
logue.
For more information please contact
your local Omron sales office or download the data from www.eu.omron.com
This product is not shown in the catalogue.
For more information please contact
your local Omron sales office or download the data from www.eu.omron.com
Small sealed switches
[email protected]
Enclosed switch
SHL
General-purpose limit switch
WL
[email protected]
17.5
18
94.1
33
32.9
45
45.6
94.1
42
40
42
40
Subminiature limit switch with high seal- Wide selection of
ing property
two-circuit double break
Double seal fitted to rotating parts.
Improved resistance to abrasion
and smoother movement.
Improved visibility when setting stroke
zones.
IP67
IP67
IP67
IP67
Immersion-proof
Immersion-proof
Immersion-proof
Immersion-proof
500 VAC
250 VAC
250 VAC
Yes
Limit
Switches
Slim and compact switch with better
seal and ensuring longer service life
than D4E
115 VAC
Yes
Yes
Yes
(30,000)
at 24 VDC
and 10 mA
(750)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
33 mm
16.5 mm
58.7 x 30.2 mm
58.7 x 30.2 mm
Panel mount roller plunger, top roller
plunger, hinge roller lever, top plunger
Panel mount roller plunger, hinge lever,
hinge roller lever, top plunger
Roller lever, adjustable roller lever,
adjustable rod lever, fork lever lock, top
plunger, top roller plunger, side roller
plunger, top ball plunger, side ball
plunger, coil spring
Roller lever
F-45
F-57
F-99
--F-31
F-3
Selection Guide
Limit Switches
Classification
General-purpose limit switch
Model
[email protected]
Enclosed switch
ZE/ZV/XE/XV
Miniature explosion-proof limit
switch
WLF6E
Appearance
21.7
25.4
94.1
37.3
44.5
55
86
42
40
Features
Degree of protection
Rated current (A)
Small, high-precision enclosed switch
Long-service life and large breaking
capacity
Miniature explosion-proof (hydrogen
atmospheres) limit switch with terminal
block.
Same mounting method, pitch, and size
as WL Switch.
IEC
IP67
IP65 (-N type)/IP60 (-Q type)
IP67
JIS
Immersion-proof
Jet-proof (-N type)
Dust-proof (-Q type)
Immersion-proof
ZE/ZV/ZV2:
250 VAC
XE/XV/XV2:
30 VDC
20
15
250 VAC
10
2A
5
Microload type
Mechanical life*
expectancy
(x 1,000
operations min.)
Electrical life*
expectancy
(x 1,000
operations min.)
Yes
---
250 VAC
---
50,000
40,000
30,000
ZE/ZV/ZV2
20,000
10,000
XE/XV/XV2
(1,000)
2,000
1,000
800
ZE/ZV/ZV2
600
XE/XV/XV2
400
200
50
Operation indicator
Yes
---
---
Mounting pitch
25.4 mm
ZE: 25.4 mm, ZV: 41.3 mm
ZV2: 31 x 75 mm
58.7 x 30.2 mm
Actuators
Top roller plunger, hinge lever,
hinge roller lever, top plunger
Top plunger, top roller plunger,
roller arm lever
Stainless steel roller lever
Resin roller lever
Adjustable stainless steel roller lever
Adjustable resin roller lever
Adjustable rod lever
Top plunger
Top roller plunger
F-109
F-119
Approved standards
Page No.
F-4
--This product is not shown in the catalogue.
For more information please contact
your local Omron sales office or download the data from www.eu.omron.com
Multiple limit switches
VB
General purpose limit switch
HL-5000
114
82.4
68
34
58
12-mm pitch between poles
Economical miniature limit switch boasting rigid
construction
IP67
IP65
Immersion-proof
Jet-proof
Limit
Switches
33
250 VAC
250 VAC
Yes
---
5,000
(300)
---
---
98 x 28 mm, 50 mm
50 x 24 mm
Bevel plunger, roller plunger, hemispherical plunger
Roller lever, adjustable roller lever, top plunger, top
roller plunger, coil spring
---
---
This product is not shown in the catalogue.
For more information please contact your local Omron sales office or download the data from www.eu.omron.com
F-5
Selection Guide
Limit Switches
Classification
General-purpose Basic Switches, Z-size
Model
A
DZ
TZ
X
High-capacity load switching
Ideal for controlling two
independent circuits with two
built-in switches.
Stable operation at 400°C.
Suitable for electric furnaces
or boilers.
Direct current switching.
Built-in permanent magnet
for extinguishing arc.
Appearance
Features
Contact Contact specification
Rivet
Rivet
Rivet
Cylinder+flat surface
Contact material
Silver alloy
Silver alloy
Platinum
Silver alloy
Rating
(resistive load)
20 A at 250 VAC
10 A at 250 VAC
1 A at 250 VAC
10 A at 125 VDC
3.92..6.13 N
{400..625 gf}
5.59 N {570 gf}
4.90 N {500 gf}
5.00 N {510 gf}
1 x 106 min.
1 x 106 min.
1 x 105 min.
1 x 106 min.
Max. operating
current (A)
Min.
permissible
load (mA)
(N-level
reference value)
Operating force (OF) (see note)
Life expectancy
(see note)
20
15
10
8
5
3
2
1
0.5
0.3
0.1
100
10
1
0.1
0.01
Mechanical
Electrical
103
103
103
Ambient operating temperature
500 x
min.
-25°C..80°C
500 x
min.
-25°C..80°C
50 x
min.
-65°C..400°C
100 x 103 min.
-25°C..80°C
Mounting pitch
25.4 mm
25.4 mm
25.4 mm
25.4 mm
Actuators
Pin plunger, panel mount
plunger, panel mount roller
plunger, hinge lever, hinge
roller lever, roller leaf spring
Pin plunger, hinge lever,
hinge roller lever
Pin plunger, hinge lever,
hinge roller lever
Pin plunger, panel mount
plunger, panel mount roller
plunger, leaf Spring, hinge
lever, hinge roller lever
F-131
F-139
F-145
F-149
Approved standards
Page No.
Note:
F-6
1. These values are for pin plunger models.
2. The above table provides only an overview of specifications. Before actual use, be sure to check the specification details and
precautions given on the relevant reference pages.
General-purpose Basic Switches, Z-size
Z
Z-10FY
Split-contact model
Rivet
Single crossbar
Rivet
Silver
Gold alloy
Silver
15 A at 250 VAC
0.1 A at 125 VAC
10 A at 250 VAC
0.4 A at 125 VDC
1.96..2.75 N
{200..280 gf}
0.5 A at 125 VDC
(160 mA at 5 VDC)
2.45..3.43 N
{250..350 gf}
Drip-proof:
4.22 N
{250..430 gf}
20 x 106 min.
103
500 x
min.
25°C..80°C (Drip-proof: -15°C..80°C)
Z-15ER
Maintained contact model
15 A at 250 VAC
(series connection)
0.75 A at 125 VDC
(1 mA at 5 VDC)
(160 mA at 5 VDC)
(160 mA at 5 VDC)
6.12..7.85 N
{625..800 gf}
2.45 N {250 gf}
Drip-proof:
3.43 N {350 gf}
4.46..7.26 N
{455..740 gf}
1.96..2.50 N
{200..255 gf}
300 x 103 min.
10 x 106 min.
500 x 103 min.
300 x 103 min.
103
100 x 103 min.
100 x
103
min.
Limit
Switches
Z-15H
Z-15G
Z-15E
Z-01H
Basic Models (most popular)
High sensitivity models, drip-proof models, micro load models, and models with protective covers.
500 x
103
min.
100 x
min.
25.4 mm
Pin plunger, panel mount plunger, panel mount roller
plunger, leaf spring, hinge lever, roller leaf spring,
hinge roller lever, flexible rod
Solder Screw
Pin plunger, panel mount
plunger, panel mount
roller plunger, roller leaf
spring
Pin plunger, panel mount
plunger, roller leaf spring
Pin plunger, panel mount
plunger, panel mount
roller plunger, hinge
lever, hinge roller lever
Pin plunger, hinge lever
Screw
Solder
F-157
F-7
Selection Guide
Limit Switches
F-8
Enclosed Switch
D4C
Sealed, Compact, and Slim-bodied Switch
Offers Choice of Many Actuators
• Liquid- and dust-resistance conforms to IEC IP67 standard.
• Triple-sealed construction:
Plunger section sealed via nitrile rubber packing seal and diaphragm; switch section sealed via nitrile rubber cap; cable entrance sealed via encapsulating material.
• Standard cable (S-FLEX VCTF) in 2-, 3-, or 5-meter lengths offers high flexibility with outstanding oil and extreme temperature
resistance.
• Low temperature models are available.
Limit
Switches
Model Number Structure
■ Model Number Legend
Standard Models
[email protected]@@
1 2 3
1. Rated Current
1:
5 A at 250 VAC, 4 A at 30 VDC
2:
5 A at 125 VAC (with LED indicator)
3:
4 A 30 VDC (with LED indicator)
4:
0.1 A at 125 VAC, 0.1 A at 30 VDC
5:
0.1 A at 125 VAC (with LED indicator)
6:
0.1 A at 30 VDC (with LED indicator)
2. Cable Specifications
2:
VCTF oil-resistant cable (3 m)
3:
VCTF oil-resistant cable (5 m)
4:
VCTF (3 m)
5:
VCTF (5 m)
6:
SJT(O) (3 m)
7:
SJT(O) (5 m)
8:
VCTF oil-resistant cable (2 m)
9:
VCTF (2 m)
3. Actuator
01: Pin plunger
02: Roller plunger
03: Crossroller plunger
10: Bevel plunger
20: Roller lever
24: Roller lever (high-sensitivity model)
31: Sealed pin plunger
32: Sealed roller plunger
33: Sealed crossroller
41: Panel mount pin plunger
42: Panel mount roller plunger
43: Panel mount crossroller plunger
50: Plastic rod
60: Center roller lever plunger
Note 1: Some combinations of the above may not be supported.
2: With standard models, the operation indicator turns OFF
when the switch operates. If models with operation indicators
that turn ON when the switch operates are required, add "-B”
to the end of the model number.
Enclosed Switch
D4C
F-9
Pre-wired Models (Use VCTF Oil-resistant Cable)
[email protected]@@[email protected]@@@@@
1
2
3
4
1. Operation Indicator Lamp
1:
Without operation indicator
2:
1 A at 125 VAC (with operation indicator)
3:
1 A at 30 VDC (with operation indicator)
2. Actuator
01: Pin plunger
02: Roller plunger
31: Sealed plunger
32: Sealed roller plunger
24: Roller lever (high-sensitivity model)
3. Wiring Specifications
DK1EJ: Pre-wired models
(3 conductors: DC specification, NC wiring)
AK1EJ: Pre-wired models
(3 conductors: AC specification, NC wiring)
M1J: Connector models for ASI devices
(2 conductors: NO wiring)
4. Cable length
03: 0.3 m
05: 0.5 m
10: 1 m
Wiring Specifications
Internal switch
Connector
COM
3
NC
2
NO
4
Note: Since the above wiring specifications are different from those
for the D4CC, be careful not to mistake them.
Weather-resistant Models
[email protected]@@-P
1 2 3
1. Rated Current
1:
5 A at 250 VAC, 4 A at 30 VDC
2:
5 A at 125 VAC (with LED indicator)
3:
4 A at 30 VDC (with LED indicator)
4:
0.1 A at 125 VAC, 0.1 A at 30 VDC
5:
0.1 A at 125 VAC (with LED indicator)
6:
0.1 A at 30 VDC (with LED indicator)
F-10
Enclosed Switch D4C
2. Cable Specifications
2:
VCTF oil-resistant cable (3 m)
3:
VCTF oil-resistant cable (5 m)
3. Actuator
20: Roller lever
24: Roller lever (high-sensitivity model)
27: Variable roller lever
29: Variable rod lever
Ordering Information
■ List of Models
Standard Models
Actuator
Standard cable models
S-FLEX VCTF Cable*
UL/CSA-approved cable models
VCTF Cable**
5 A at 250 VAC without 5 A at 125 VAC with LED
LED indicator
indicator (100 VAC)
SJT(O) Cable***
2m
3m
5m
UL/CSA approved
2m
3m
5m
3m
5m
3m
5m
Pin
plunger
[email protected] [email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected] [email protected] [email protected] D4C-1601
D4C-1701
D4C-2601
D4C-2701
Sealed
plunger
[email protected] [email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected] [email protected] [email protected] D4C-1631
D4C-1731
D4C-2631
D4C-2731
Roller
plunger
[email protected] [email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected] [email protected] [email protected] D4C-1602
D4C-1702
D4C-2602
D4C-2702
Sealed roller
plunger
[email protected] [email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected] [email protected] [email protected] D4C-1632
D4C-1732
D4C-2632
D4C-2732
Crossroller
plunger
[email protected] [email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected] [email protected] [email protected] D4C-1603
D4C-1703
D4C-2603
D4C-2703
Sealed
crossroller
plunger
[email protected] [email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected] [email protected] [email protected] D4C-1633
D4C-1733
D4C-2633
D4C-2733
Bevel
plunger
[email protected] [email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected] [email protected] [email protected] D4C-1610
D4C-1710
D4C-2610
D4C-2710
[email protected] [email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected] [email protected] [email protected] D4C-1650
D4C-1750
D4C-2650
D4C-2750
Roller
lever
[email protected] [email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected] [email protected] [email protected] D4C-1620
D4C-1720
D4C-2620
D4C-2720
Roller lever
(high-sensitivity
model)
[email protected] [email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected] [email protected] [email protected] D4C-1624
D4C-1724
D4C-2624
D4C-2724
Panel mount
pin plunger
[email protected] [email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected] [email protected] [email protected] D4C-1641
D4C-1741
D4C-2641
D4C-2741
Panel mount
roller plunger
[email protected] [email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected] [email protected] [email protected] D4C-1642
D4C-1742
D4C-2642
D4C-2742
Panel mount
crossroller
plunger
[email protected] [email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected] [email protected] [email protected] D4C-1643
D4C-1743
D4C-2643
D4C-2743
Center roller
lever plunger
[email protected] [email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected] [email protected] [email protected] D4C-1660
D4C-1760
D4C-2660
D4C-2760
Coil
spring
Note 1. Cold-resistant models are also available. Order these models with reference to the following example.
D4C-1201 → D4C-1201-C
2. Models with viscosity-resistant oil specification (with an oil drain hole) are also available. Order these models with reference to the following
example. Applicable only to the plunger models.
D4C-1202 → D4C-1202-M
3. Variable roller lever models are also available.
* Oil-resistant vinyl cabtire cables.
** Ordinary vinyl cabtire cables.
*** Models with SJT(O) Cables (approved by UL and CSA standards) conform to UL and CSA standards.
Enclosed Switch
D4C
F-11
Limit
Switches
EN60947-5-1 approved
Standard Models (Continued)
Actuator
CENELEC cable models
EN60947-5-1 approved
1m
2m
3m
5m
Pin
plunger
D4C-1G01
1M
D4C-1G01
2M
D4C-1G01
3M
D4C-1G01
5M
Sealed
plunger
D4C-1G31
1M
D4C-1G31
2M
D4C-1G31
3M
D4C-1G31
5M
Roller
plunger
D4C-1G02
1M
D4C-1G02
2M
D4C-1G02
3M
D4C-1G02
5M
Sealed roller
plunger
D4C-1G32
1M
D4C-1G32
2M
D4C-1G32
3M
D4C-1G32
5M
Crossroller
plunger
D4C-1G03
1M
D4C-1G03
2M
D4C-1G03
3M
D4C-1G03
5M
Sealed
crossroller
plunger
D4C-1G33
1M
D4C-1G33
2M
D4C-1G33
3M
D4C-1G33
5M
Bevel
plunger
D4C-1G10
1M
D4C-1G10
2M
D4C-1G10
3M
D4C-1G10
5M
D4C-1G50
1M
D4C-1G50
2M
D4C-1G50
3M
D4C-1G50
5M
Roller
lever
D4C-1G20
1M
D4C-1G20
2M
D4C-1G20
3M
D4C-1G20
5M
Roller lever
(high-sensitivity
model)
D4C-1G24
1M
D4C-1G24
2M
D4C-1G24
3M
D4C-1G24
5M
Panel mount
pin plunger
D4C-1G41
1M
D4C-1G41
2M
D4C-1G41
3M
D4C-1G41
5M
Panel mount
roller plunger
D4C-1G42
1M
D4C-1G42
2M
D4C-1G42
3M
D4C-1G42
5M
Panel mount
crossroller
plunger
D4C-1G43
1M
D4C-1G43
2M
D4C-1G43
3M
D4C-1G43
5M
Coil
spring
Pre-wired Models (Use VCTF Oil-resistant Cable)
Actuator
1 A at 125 VAC without
operation indicator
1 A at 125 VAC with
operation indicator
1 A at 30 VDC without
operation indicator
1 A at 30 VDC with
operation indicator
Pin
plunger
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
Roller
plunger
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
Sealed
plunger
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
Sealed roller
plunger
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
Roller lever
(high-sensitivity
model)
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
Note 1. The @ contains the length of the cable.
For example: 30 cm → D4C-1001-AK1EJ03
2. M1 models are also available. Contact your OMRON sales representative for further information.
F-12
Enclosed Switch D4C
Weather-resistant Models
5 A at 250 VAC 0.1 A at 125 VAC
4 A at 30 VDC
0.1 A at 30 VDC
without
without operation
operation
indicator
indicator
5 A at 125 VAC
with operation
indicator
4 A at 30 VDC 0.1 A at 125 VAC 0.1 A at 30 VDC
with operation with operation
with operation
indicator
indicator
indicator
3m
D4C-1220-P
D4C-4220-P
D4C-2220-P
D4C-3220-P
D4C-5220-P
D4C-6220-P
Roller lever
5m
D4C-1320-P
D4C-4320-P
D4C-2320-P
D4C-3320-P
D4C-5320-P
D4C-6320-P
Roller lever
(high-sensitivity
model)
3m
D4C-1224-P
D4C-4224-P
D4C-2224-P
D4C-3224-P
D4C-5224-P
D4C-6224-P
5m
D4C-1324-P
D4C-4324-P
D4C-2324-P
D4C-3324-P
D4C-5324-P
D4C-6324-P
Variable
roller lever
3m
D4C-1227-P
D4C-4227-P
D4C-2227-P
D4C-3227-P
D4C-5227-P
D4C-6227-P
5m
D4C-1327-P
D4C-4327-P
D4C-2327-P
D4C-3327-P
D4C-5327-P
D4C-6327-P
Variable rod
lever
3m
D4C-1229-P
D4C-4229-P
D4C-2229-P
D4C-3229-P
D4C-5229-P
D4C-6229-P
5m
D4C-1329-P
D4C-4329-P
D4C-2329-P
D4C-3329-P
D4C-5329-P
D4C-6329-P
Individual Parts (Head/Actuator)
Actuator type
Head (with
actuator)
Mounting Plates
Actuator
Pin plunger
D4C-0001
-
Roller plunger
D4C-0002
-
Crossroller plunger
D4C-0003
-
Bevel plunger
D4C-0010
-
Roller lever
D4C-0020
WL-1A100
Roller lever
D4C-0024
WL-1A100
Variable roller lever
D4C-0027
HL-1HPA320
Variable rod lever
D4C-0029
HL-1HPA500
Sealed pin plunger
D4C-0031
-
The WL model incorporated by equipment can be replaced with the
D4C together with the Mounting Plate without changing the position
of the dog or cam.
List of Replaceable Models
Contact your OMRON representative for the period required for delivery.
WL model (Actuator)
D4C model (Actuator)
→[email protected]@01 (Plunger) D4C-P001
WLD2/WL01D2 (Toproller plunger)
→[email protected]@02 (Roller
plunger)
WLCA2/WL01CA2
(Roller lever)
→[email protected]@20 (Roller le- D4C-P020
ver)
Sealed roller plunger
D4C-0032
-
Sealed crossroller plunger
D4C-0033
-
Panel mount pin plunger
D4C-0041
-
Panel mount roller plunger
D4C-0042
-
Panel mount crossroller plunger
D4C-0043
-
Application Example
Plastic rod
D4C-0050
-
Note: The position of the dog remains unchanged.
Center roller lever
D4C-0060
-
Note 1: The model numbers for heads are of the form [email protected]@,
with the numbers in the squares indicating the type of actuator.
2: Actuators for plunger models, plastic rod models, and center
roller lever models cannot be ordered individually. They must
be ordered together with the head.
3: Consult your OMRON representative for details on cold-resistant specifications.
Plate
WLD/WL01D (Top
plunger)
D4C-P002
Note: The [email protected] is for micro loads.
Dog
Dog
Mounting Plate
Enclosed Switch
D4C
F-13
Limit
Switches
Actuator
Remarks
There is no difference in mounting pitch between the Mounting Plate
and the WL. The mounting depth of the D4C with the Mounting Plate
attached is, however, shorter than that of the panel-mounted WL.
WL
D4C
Plate
Specifications
■ Approved Standards
Agency
Standard
TÜV Rheinland
File No.
EN60947-5-1
R9451333 (see note 1)
J9950970 (see note 2)
UL
UL508
E76675 (see note 3)
CSA
CSA C22.2 No. 14
LR45746 (see note 3)
Note 1: Models with VCTF oil-resistant cables only.
2: Pre-wired models only.
3: SJT(0)-cable models only.
■ Approved Standard Ratings
General Ratings
Model
Rated voltage
Non-inductive load
Resistive load
NC
[email protected]@@
125 VAC
5A
NO
5A
Inductive load
Lamp load
NC
1.5 A
Inductive load
NO
0.7 A
NC
3A
NO
3A
Inrush current
Motor load
NC
2.5 A
NO
1.3 A
250 VAC
5A
5A
1A
0.5 A
2A
2A
1.5 A
0.8 A
8 VDC
5A
5A
2A
2A
5A
4A
3A
3A
14 VDC
5A
5A
2A
2A
4A
4A
3A
3A
30 VDC
4A
4A
2A
2A
3A
3A
3A
3A
125 VDC
0.4 A
0.4 A
0.05 A
0.05 A
0.4 A
0.4 A
0.05 A
0.05 A
0.03 A
250 VDC
0.2 A
0.2 A
0.03 A
0.03 A
0.2 A
0.2 A
0.03 A
125 VAC
5A
5A
1.5 A
0.7 A
3A
3A
2.5 A
1.3 A
125 VDC
0.4 A
0.4 A
0.05 A
0.05 A
0.4 A
0.4 A
0.05 A
0.05 A
[email protected]@@
30 VDC
4A
4A
2A
2A
3A
3A
3A
3A
[email protected]@@
125 VAC
0.1 A
0.1 A
---
[email protected]@@
8 VDC
0.1 A
0.1 A
14 VDC
0.1 A
0.1 A
---
30 VDC
0.1 A
0.1 A
[email protected]@@
125 VAC
0.1 A
0.1 A
---
---
[email protected]@@
30 VDC
0.1 A
0.1 A
---
---
F-14
Enclosed Switch D4C
NC
20 A
max.
NO
10 A
max.
Ratings for Pre-wired Models
Rated
voltage
Non-inductive load
Resistive load
NC
Inductive load
Lamp load
NO
NC
Inductive load
NO
NC
Inrush current
Motor load
NO
NC
NO
125 VAC
1
1
1
0.7
1
1
1
1
30 VDC
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
NC
20 A max.
NO
10 A max.
Note 1. Inductive loads have a power factor of 0.4 min. (AC) and a time constant of 7 ms max. (DC).
2. Lamp loads have an inrush current of 10 times the steady-state current.
3. Motor loads have an inrush current of 6 times the steady-state current.
UL/CSA Approved Ratings
B300 ([email protected]@, [email protected]@), B150 ([email protected]@, [email protected]@)
NEMA B300 ([email protected]@, [email protected]@)
Rated
voltage
120 VAC
Carry
current
5A
240 VAC
Current
Make
Break
30 A
3A
15 A
1.5 A
NEMA B150 ([email protected]@, [email protected]@)
Volt-amperes
Make
3,600 VA
Break
360 VA
Rated
voltage
120 VAC
Carry
current
5A
Current
Make
30 A
Volt-amperes
Break
3A
Make
3,600 VA
Break
360 VA
TÜV Rheinland Approved Ratings (EN60947-5-1)
Category and rating
I the
AC-15 2 A/250 VAC
DC-12 2 A/30 VDC
5A
4A
Limit
Switches
Model
[email protected]@@
[email protected]@@
AC-15 2 A/125 VAC
5A
[email protected]@@
DC-12 2 A/30 VDC
4A
[email protected]@@
AC-14 0.1 A/125 VAC
DC-12 0.1 A/30 VDC
0.5 A
0.5 A
[email protected]@@
AC-14 0.1 A/125 VAC
0.5 A
[email protected]@@
DC-12 0.1 A/30 VDC
0.5 A
Applicable Load Range
[email protected]@@
[email protected]@@
[email protected]@@
Voltage (VDC)
[email protected]@@
[email protected]@@
[email protected]@@
5 mW
0.8 W
Current I (mA)
Enclosed Switch
D4C
F-15
■ Characteristics
Degree of protection
IP67
Durability (see note 2)
Mechanical: 10,000,000 operations min.
Electrical:
200,000 operations min. (5A at 250 VAC, resistive load)
Operating speed
0.1 mm to 0.5 m/s (in case of plunger)
1 mm to 1 m/s (in case of roller lever)
Operating frequency
Mechanical: 120 operations/min
Electrical:
30 operations/min
Rated frequency
50/60 Hz
Insulation resistance
100 MΩ min. (at 500 VDC)
Contact resistance (initial)
250 mΩ max. (initial value with 2-m VCTF cable)
300 mΩ max. (initial value with 3-m VCTF cable)
400 mΩ max. (initial value with 5-m VCTF cable)
Dielectric strength
1,000 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 min between terminals of the same polarity
1,500 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 min between current-carrying metal part and ground, and between each
terminal and non-current-carrying metal part, Uimp: 2.5 kV (EN60947-5-1)
Rated insulation voltage (Ui)
300 V (EN60947-5-1)
Switching overvoltage
1,000 VAC, 300 VDC max. (EN60947-5-1)
Pollution degree
(operating environment)
3 (IEC60947-5-1)
Short-circuit protective device (SCPD) 10 A fuse type gG (IEC269)
Conditional short-circuit current
100 A (EN60947-5-1)
Conventional enclosed thermal current 5 A, 4 A, 0.5 A (EN60947-5-1)
(Ithe)
Protection against electric shock
Class I (with grounding wire)
Vibration resistance
Malfunction: 10 to 55 Hz, 1.5-mm double amplitude
Shock resistance
Destruction: Approx. 1,000 m/s2 min.
Malfunction: Approx. 500 m/s2 min.
Ambient temperature (see note)
Operating: –10°C to 70°C (with no icing)
Ambient humidity
Operating: 95% max.
Weight
With 3-m VCTF cable: 360 g; With 5-m VCTF cable: 540 g
Note 1. The above figures are initial values.
2. The values are calculated at an operating temperature of 5°C to 35°C, and an operating humidity of 40% to 70%. Contact your OMRON
sales representative for more detailed information on other operating environments.
■ Operating Characteristics
Model
[email protected]@01
[email protected][email protected]@
[email protected]@31
[email protected]@[email protected]
[email protected]@02
[email protected]@[email protected]
[email protected]@32
[email protected]@[email protected]
[email protected]@03
OF max.
11.77 N
17.65 N
11.77 N
17.65 N
11.77 N
RF min.
4.41 N
4.41 N
4.41 N
4.41 N
4.41 N
PT max.
1.8 mm
1.8 mm
1.8 mm
1.8 mm
1.8 mm
OT min.
3 mm
3 mm
3 mm
3 mm
3 mm
MD max.
0.2 mm
0.2 mm
0.2 mm
0.2 mm
0.2 mm
OP
15.7±1 mm
24.9±1 mm
28.5±1 mm
34.3±1 mm
28.5±1 mm
TT
(5) mm
(5) mm
(5) mm
(5) mm
(5) mm
Model
[email protected]@33
[email protected]@10
[email protected]@50
[email protected]@20
[email protected]@27-P
(see note 1)
[email protected]@29-P
(see note 1)
[email protected]@24
[email protected]@24-P
[email protected]@[email protected]
OF max.
17.65 N
11.77 N
1.47 N
5.69 N
5.69 N
RF min.
4.41 N
4.41 N
---
1.47 N
1.47 N
PT max.
1.8 mm
1.8 mm
15°
25°
10±3°
OT min.
3 mm
3 mm
---
40°
50°
MD max.
0.2 mm
0.2 mm
---
3°
3°
OP
34.3±1 mm
28.5±1 mm
---
---
---
TT
(5) mm
(5) mm
---
(70°)
(70°)
F-16
Enclosed Switch D4C
Model
[email protected]@41
OF max.
11.77 N
RF min.
PT max.
[email protected]@42
[email protected]@43
[email protected]@60
11.77 N
11.77 N
6.67 N
4.41 N
4.41 N
4.41 N
1.47 N
1.8 mm
1.8 mm
1.8 mm
10±3°
OT min.
3 mm
3 mm
3 mm
50°
MD max.
0.2 mm
0.2 mm
0.2 mm
3°
OP
31.2±1 mm
36.8±1 mm
36.8 mm
---
TT
(5) mm
(5) mm
(5) mm
---
Note 1. The values given for [email protected]@27-P and [email protected]@29-P are for when the length of the lever is 38 mm.
2. The operating characteristics for [email protected] models are the same as those for @[email protected] models.
■ Contact Form
Standard Models / Weather-resistant Models
Without LED Indicator
(S-FLEX VCTF Cable)
With LED Indicator
(S-FLEX VCTF Cable)
With LED Indicator
(lights when operated)
LED Indicator Circuits
100 VAC
COM NO
NC E
(Black) (White) (Red) (Yellow and
green striped)
COM NO
NC E
(Black) (White) (Red) (Yellow and
green striped)
COM
NO
Limit
Switches
COM
24 VDC
NO
COM NO
NC
E
(Black) (White) (Red) (Yellow and
green striped)
Yellow/green: VCTF resin cable
Green: VCTF
UL/CSA-approved cable SJT(0)
Note 1. "Lights when operated" means that when the actuator is turned or pushed and the Limit Switch contact leaves the NC side, the indicator
lights.
2. "Lights when not in operation" means that when the actuator is in the free position, the indicator is lit, and when the actuator is turned or
pushed and the contact comes into contact with the NO side, the indicator turns OFF.
Wire Color
Cable
Without LED
COM
NO
NC
With LED
E
COM
NO
NC
E
VCTF
Black
White
Red
Green
Black
White
Red
Green
S-FLEX VCTF
Black
White
Red
Yellow/
Green
Black
White
Red
Yellow/
Green
SJT (O)
Black
Blue
Red
Green
Black
Blue
Red
Green
CENELEC CABLE
Blue
Black
Brown
Yellow/
Green
Blue
Black
Brown
Yellow/
Green
Enclosed Switch
D4C
F-17
Pre-wired Models
Without LED Indicator
With LED Indicator
With LED Indicator
(lights when not in operation) (lights when operated)
AC
DC
COM
Pin No.
NO NC
3
4
E (See note.)
COM
Pin No.
2
NO NC
4
3
E (See note.)
2
Note: Not connected to the ground.
COM NO
NC E
(Black) (White) (Red) (Yellow and
green striped)
Yellow/green: VCTF resin cable
Green: VCTF
UL/CSA-approved cable SJT(0)
Note 1. "Lights when operated" means that when the actuator is turned or pushed and the Limit Switch contact leaves the NC side, the indicator
lights.
2. "Lights when not in operation" means that when the actuator is in the free position, the indicator is lit, and when the actuator is turned or
pushed and the contact comes into contact with the NO side, the indicator turns OFF.
Connector Models for ASI Devices
With LED Indicator
(lights when not in operation)
Without LED Indicator
With LED Indicator
(lights when operated)
DC
A
A
COM
Pin No.
3
NO NC E (See note.)
4
COM NO NC
Pin No.
3
E (See note.)
COM NO
NC E
(Black) (White) (Red) (Yellow and
green striped)
4
Note: Not connected to the ground.
Yellow/green: VCTF resin cable
Green: VCTF
UL/CSA-approved cable SJT(0)
Note 1. "Lights when operated" means that when the actuator is turned or pushed and the Limit Switch contact leaves the NC side, the indicator
lights.
2. "Lights when not in operation" means that when the actuator is in the free position, the indicator is lit, and when the actuator is turned or
pushed and the contact comes into contact with the NO side, the indicator turns OFF.
F-18
Enclosed Switch D4C
Engineering Data
■ Electrical Durability
[email protected]@@, [email protected]@@, [email protected]@@
[email protected]@@, [email protected]@@, [email protected]@@
5,000
Durability (x 103 operations)
Durability (x 103 operations)
Operating frequency: 30 operations/min
(cosφ = 1, L/R = 0)
3,000
1,000
125 VAC
500
300
100
250 VAC
50
30
10
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
10,000
7,000
5,000
3,000
125 VAC
1,000
500
300
100
30 VDC
50
30
0
7
Operating temperature: 5°C to 35°C
Operating humidity: 40% to 70%
Operating frequency: 30 operations/min
(cosφ =1, L/R = 0)
Switching current (mA)
20
40
60
80
100
120
Switching current (mA)
Model
[email protected]@@
Voltage
Leakage current
Limit
Switches
■ Leakage Current for LED-indicator Models
Resistance
125 VAC
1.7 mA
68 kΩ
15 kΩ
[email protected]@@
30 VDC
1.7 mA
[email protected]@@
125 VAC
1.7 mA
68 kΩ
[email protected]@@
30 VDC
1.7 mA
15 kΩ
Enclosed Switch
D4C
F-19
Nomenclature
Standard Models
Roller Lever Models Without Indicator
Roller
O ring
(NBR)
Lever
O ring
(NBR)
Diaphragm (NBR)
Built-in switch
Protective cap (NBR)
Ground terminal
Molded resin
Cable
Weather-resistant Models
Roller Lever Models Without Indicator
Roller
The roller is made of self-lubricating sintered
stainless steel and boasts high resistance to
wear.
Lever
The lever forged of anti-corrosive aluminium
alloy features high corrosion resistances
and outstanding ruggedness.
Shaft Section Seal
By fitting an O-ring to the rotary shaft and with
an appropriate interference of the screws,
high-sealing properties are maintained. The
O-ring is made of silicone rubber and is resistant to temperature changes and adverse
weather conditions.
Head-mounting
Screw
Roller Lever Setscrew
This screw is made of stainless steel and has high
corrosion resistance.
Diaphragm
The diaphragm is made of silicone rubber
and is resistant to temperature changes
and adverse weather conditions.
Built-in Switch
Both standard load and microload models available.
Cable
Vinyl cabtire cable and is resistant
to adverse weather conditions.
F-20
Enclosed Switch D4C
Rotary Shaft
The shaft is made of stainless steel
decreasing the likelihood of rusting.
Dimensions
Note 1. All units are in millimeters unless otherwise indicated.
2. Unless otherwise specified, a tolerance of ±0.4 mm applies to all dimensions.
Standard Models
10 dia. stainless
steel plunger
PT
Two, 5.1+0.2
dia. holes
0
Spot facing 10.2 dia.
Depth: 6
40 max.
25±0.1
16
2.8
4.5
7.5
8
OP
54.2 max.
Correct setting
position
49 max.
23
2
VCTF cable, 0.75 mm2, 4 conductor
Finishing O.D.: 7.6
Sealed Plunger
[email protected]@31
2
1.4
34
1.5
Limit
Switches
Pin Plunger
[email protected]@01
10 dia. stainless
steel plunger Rubber cap
PT
Two, 5.1+0.2
dia. holes
0
Spot facing 10.2 dia. Depth: 6
40 max.
25±0.1
16
OP
4.5
7.5
8
49 max.
2
23
2
1.4
34
1.5
2
VCTF cable, 0.75 mm , 4 conductor
Finishing O.D.: 7.6
Roller Plunger
[email protected]@02
12 dia. x 5 stainless steel roller
40 max.
PT
25±0.1
Two, 5.10+0.2 dia. holes
Spot facing 10.2 dia.
Depth: 6
Correct setting
16
position
2.8
OP
7
7.5
8
67 max.
51.5 max.
2
VCTF cable, 0.75 mm2, 4 conductor
Finishing O.D.: 7.6
23
2
34
1.4
1.5
Enclosed Switch
D4C
F-21
Sealed Roller Plunger
[email protected]@32
PT
12 dia. x 5 stainless
Two, 5.10+0.2 dia. holes
steel roller
Spot facing 10.2 dia.
Depth: 6
Rubber cap
40 max.
16
25±0.1
OP
4.5
7.5
8
49 max.
2
2
23
1.4
1.5
34
VCTF cable, 0.75 mm2, 4 conductor
Finishing O.D.: 7.6
Crossroller Plunger
12 dia. x 5 stainless
steel roller
[email protected]@03
Two, 5.1+0.2
dia. holes
0
Spot facing 10.2 dia.
Depth: 6
Correct setting
16
position
40 max.
PT
25±0.1
2.8
OP
7
7.5
8
67 max.
51.5 max.
2
VCTF cable, 0.75 mm2, 4 conductor
Finishing O.D.: 7.6
23
2
1.4
34
Sealed Crossroller Plunger
1.5
12 dia. x 5 stainless
steel roller
[email protected]@33
Rubber cap
PT
40 max.
25±0.1
Two, 5.1+0.2
dia. holes
0
Spot facing 10.2 dia.
Depth: 6
16
OP
4.5
7.5
8
49 max.
2
VCTF cable, 0.75 mm2,
4 conductor
Finishing O.D.: 7.6
F-22
Enclosed Switch D4C
2
34
23
1.4
1.5
10 dia. stainless
steel plunger
Two, 5.1+0.2 dia. holes
Bevel Plunger
[email protected]@10
0
Spot facing 10.2 dia.
Depth: 6
40 max.
PT
Correct setting
position
16
25±0.1
2.8
OP
7
7.5
8
67 max.
51.5 max.
2 23
VCTF cable, 0.75 mm2, 4 conductor
Finishing O.D.: 7.6
2
34
Coil Spring
[email protected]@50
(see note 1)
40 max.
25±0.1
1.4
1.5
Nylon rod
16
(see note 2)
104±2.5
Limit
Switches
3.2 dia.
6.6 dia.
38
Rubber cap
42
4.5
7.5
8
Note:
51.5 max.
2
VCTF cable, 0.75 mm2,
4 conductor
Finishing O.D.: 7.6
23
2
34
[email protected]@20
[email protected]@20-P
2. The ideal range for operation is between the tip of
the rod and 1/3 of the
length of the actuator.
1.4
1.5
Two, 5.1+0.2
dia. holes
0
Spot facing 10.2 dia. Depth: 6
17.5 dia. x 7 stainless
sintered roller
Roller Lever
1. Operation is possible in
any direction except in parallel to the axis ↓.
40 max.
25±0.1
50 max.
44±0.8
30.2±0.8
38R
31.5±0.8
16
102.7 max.
11.4
7
7.5
8
65 max.
23
2
M5 (length: 12)
Allen-head bolt
VCTF cable, 0.75 mm2, 4 conductor
Finishing O.D.: 7.6 (see note)
Note:
S-FLEX VCTF Cables are used for weatherresistant models (D4C-P).
2
34
1.4
1.5
Two, 5.10+0.2 dia. holes
Spot facing 10.2 dia.
Depth: 6
Enclosed Switch
D4C
F-23
17.5 dia. x 7 stainless
sintered roller
Roller Lever (High-Sensitivity Model)
50 max.
40 max.
[email protected]@24
[email protected]@24-P
38R
102.7 max.
M5 (length: 12)
Allen-head bolt
Two, 5.1+0.2
dia. holes
0
Spot facing 10.2 dia.
Depth: 6
VCTF cable, 0.75 mm2, 4 conductor
Finishing O.D.: 7.6 (see note)
Note:
S-FLEX VCTF Cables are used for weatherresistant models (D4C-P).
Center Roller Lever Plunger
[email protected]@60
40 max.
17.5 dia. x 7 stainless
sintered roller
38R
102.7 max.
VCTF cable, 0.75 mm2, 4 conductor
Finishing O.D.: 7.6
F-24
Enclosed Switch D4C
Two, 5.1+0.2
dia. holes
0
Spot facing 10.2 dia.
Depth: 6
65 max.
Panel Mount Pin Plunger
[email protected]@41
PT
10 dia. stainless
Two, 5.1+0.2
dia. holes
0
steel plunger
Spot facing 10.2 dia.
Depth: 6
Correct setting
40 max.
25±0.1
16 position
2.8
OP
4.5
7.5
M14 x 1
8
49 max.
VCTF cable, 0.75 mm2, 4 conductor
Finishing O.D.: 7.6
2
23
2
1.4
1.5
34
12 dia. x 5 stainless
steel roller
Two, 5.10+0.2 dia. holes
Spot
facing 10.2 dia.
40 max.
Depth: 6
Correct setting
25±0.1
16 position
Panel Mount Roller Plunger
[email protected]@42
PT
Limit
Switches
2.8
OP
4.5
7.5
8
M14 x 1
49 max.
2
VCTF cable, 0.75 mm2,
4 conductor
Finishing O.D.: 7.6
Panel Mount Crossroller Plunger
[email protected]@43
PT
2
23
1.4
1.5
34
12 dia. x 5 stainless Two, 5.10+0.2 dia. holes
steel roller
Spot facing 10.2 dia.
Depth: 6
40 max.
16 Correct setting
25±0.1
position
2.8
OP
4.5
7.5
8
M14 x 1
49 max.
2
VCTF cable, 0.75 mm2,
4 conductor
Finishing O.D.: 7.6
2
23
1.4
1.5
34
Note: Two nuts (thickness: 2.5; distance across: 17) are included with the [email protected]@41, [email protected]@42 and [email protected]@43.
Enclosed Switch
D4C
F-25
Pre-wired Models
Pin Plunger
Roller Plunger
[email protected]@[email protected]
[email protected]@
10 dia. stainless steel plunger
Two, 5.1+0.2
dia. holes
0
40 max.
Spot facing 10.2 dia.
Depth: 6
54.2 max.
49 max.
[email protected]@[email protected]
[email protected]@
12 dia. x 5 stainless steel roller
40 max.
Correct setting
position
Two, 5.1+0.2
dia. holes
0
Spot facing 10.2 dia.
Depth: 6
67 max.
51.5 max.
XS2H-D421
XS2H-D421
Sealed Pin Plunger
Sealed Roller Plunger
[email protected]@[email protected]
[email protected]@
[email protected]@[email protected]
[email protected]@
10 dia. stainless
steel plunger
40 max.
Rubber cap
12 dia. x 5 stainless
steel roller
40 max.
Rubber cap
Two, 5.1+0.2
dia. holes
0
Spot facing 10.2 dia.
Depth: 6
Two, 5.1+0.2
dia. holes
0
Spot facing 10.2 dia.
Depth: 6
49 max.
49 max.
XS2H-D421
XS2H-D421
F-26
Enclosed Switch D4C
Correct setting
position
Roller Lever
[email protected]@[email protected]
17.5 dia. x 7 stainless
sintered roller
50 max.
40 max.
38R
102.7 max.
M5 (length: 12)
Allen-head bolt
65 max.
Two, 5.1+0.2
dia. holes
0
Spot facing 10.2 dia.
Depth: 6
Limit
Switches
XS2H-D421
Weather-resistant Models
Adjustable Roller Lever
Adjustable Rod Lever
[email protected]@27-P
40 max.
[email protected]@29-P
17.5 dia. x 7 stainless
steel roller
40 max.
57.7 max.
55 max.
3 dia. x 160 stainless
steel lever
Two, 5.1+0.2
dia. holes
0
Spot facing 10.2 dia.
Depth: 6
30R to 75R (variable)
M5 (length: 16)
Allen-head bolt
65 max.
M5 (length: 16)
Allen-head bolt
M5 (length: 12)
Allen-head bolt
Two, 5.1+0.2
dia. holes
0
Spot facing 10.2 dia. Depth: 6
VCTF cable, 0.75 mm2, 4 conductor
Finishing O.D.: 7.6
65 max.
M5 (length: 12)
Allen-head bolt
VCTF cable, 0.75 mm2, 4 conductor
Finishing O.D.: 7.6
Models with LED Indicator
The dimensions of the LED indicator for models equipped with one are shown below.
(4)
LED
Enclosed Switch
D4C
F-27
Special Mounting Plates (Plates are not provided with Limit Switches.)
D4C-P001
Two, M5 x 0.8 tapped hole
(see note 2)
OP of WLD
Note: Four, M5 x 0.8 hexagon pan-head bolts and
two M5 x 0.8 Allen-head bolts are provided.
11 dia.
Note: 1. Tighten the 5.2+0.2
−0 dia. holes with the M5
x 10 hexagon pan-head screws.
2. Insert the M5 Allen-head bolts into the
M5 tapping holes to tighten the Mounting Plate securely.
Four, 5.2+0.2
−0 dia. holes (see note 1)
D4C-P002
Two, M5 x 0.8 tapped hole
(see note 2)
Note: Four, M5 x 0.8 hexagon pan-head bolts and
two M5 x 0.8 Allen-head bolts are provided.
OP of WLD2
Note: 1. Tighten the 5.2+0.2
−0 dia. holes with the M5
x 10 hexagon pan-head screws.
2. Insert the M5 Allen-head bolts into the
M5 tapping holes to tighten the Mounting Plate securely.
11 dia.
Four, 5.2+0.2
−0 dia. holes (see note 1)
D4C-P020
Note: Four, M5 x 0.8 hexagon pan-head bolts and
two M5 x 0.8 Allen-head bolts are provided.
4.2+0.12
dia.
−0
Two,
positioning holes
(Press-fit the spring pins.)
Note: 1. Tighten the 5.2+0.2
−0 dia. holes with the M5
x 10 hexagon pan-head screws.
Four, M5 x 0.8 hexagon pan-head bolts,
two M5 x 0.8 Allen-head bolts are provided, and two 4 x 14 spring pins are
provided.
Spring pins
2. Insert the M5 Allen-head bolts into the
M5 tapping holes to tighten the Mounting Plate securely.
Two, M5 x 0.8 tapped hole
(see note 2)
11 dia.
Two, 5.2+0.2
−0 dia. holes (see note 1)
Note: Each dimension has a tolerance of ±0.4 mm unless otherwise specified.
F-28
Enclosed Switch D4C
Precautions
■ Correct Use
Handling
Operation
The bottom of the Switch at the cable outlet is resin-molded. Secure
the cable at a point 5 cm from the Switch bottom to prevent exertion
of excess force on the cable.
Operation method, shapes of cam and dog, operating frequency, and
overtravel have a significant effect on the service life and precision of
a Limit Switch. For this reason, the dog angle must be 30° max., the
surface roughness of the dog must be 6.3S min. and hardness must
be Hv400 to 500.
When bending the cable, provide a bending radius of 45 mm min. so
as not to damage the cable insulation or sheath. Excessive bending
may cause fire or leakage current.
To allow the plunger-type actuator to travel properly, adjust the dog
and cam to the proper setting positions. The proper position is where
the plunger groove fits the bushing top.
Dog
Bushing top
Bending radius:
(R45 mm min.)
5 cm
2.8 mm
To allow the roller lever-type actuator to travel properly, adjust the
dog and cam so that the arrow head is positioned between the two
convex markers as shown below.
Secure
here
Connections
Be sure to connect a fuse with a breaking current 1.5 to 2 times
larger than the rated current to the Limit Switch in series in order to
protect the Limit Switch from damage due to short-circuiting.
When using the Limit Switch for the EN ratings, use the gI or gG 10A fuse.
Correct
Arrowhead
Not correct
Convex
markers
Not correct
Correct
Enclosed Switch
D4C
F-29
Limit
Switches
Groove
Mounting
Do not expose the Switch to water exceeding 70°C or use it in steam.
A maximum of 6 Switches may be group-mounted. In this case, pay
attention to the mounting direction so that the convex part of the
group-mounting guide on one Switch fits into the concave part of the
guide on the other Switch as shown in the figure below. For group
mounting, the mounting panel must have a thickness (t) of 6 mm min.
Group Mounting
Group-mounting guide
(Front: convex
Rear: concave)
When the D4C is used in a circuit of a device to be exported to
Europe, classified as Overvoltage Class III as specified in IEC664,
provide a contact protection circuit.
Tighten each screw to a torque according to the following table.
No.
Type
Torque
1
M5 Allen-head bolt
4.90 to 5.88 N·m
2
M3.5 head mounting screw
0.78 to 0.88 N·m
3
M5 Allen-head bolt
4.90 to 5.88 N·m
Note: By removing the two screws from the head, the head direction
can be rotated 180°. After changing the head direction, re-tighten to the torque specified above. Be careful not to allow any foreign substance to enter the Switch.
Mounting panel
16 mm
t
Group-mounting guide
(Front: convex
Rear: concave)
Micro-load Models (D4C-4, -5, -6)
If the mounting panel is warped or has protruding parts, a malfunction may result. Make sure that the mounting panel is not warped and
has even surfaces.
Mounting Holes
Switching Range
Micro-load models can be used for switching in the range shown
below.
Two, 5.2-dia. or M5 screw holes
Voltage (V)
5mW
800mW
0.16mA
30
26mA
24
Use a Switch with a rubber cap when using the plunger type in an
environment where malfunction is possible due to environmental
conditions such as dust or cutting chips which may not allow resetting.
Switching
range for
micro-load
models
Switching
range for
standardload
models
12
Switching
not possible
in this range
5
1mA
100mA 160mA
0
0.1
1
10
100
1,000
Current (mA)
ALL DIMENSIONS SHOWN ARE IN MILLIMETERS.
To convert millimeters into inches, multiply by 0.03937. To convert grams into ounces, multiply by 0.03527.
Cat. No. C032-E1-08
F-30
In the interest of product improvement, specifications are subject to change without notice.
Enclosed Switch D4C
Small Sealed Switch
[email protected]
Slim and Compact Switch with Better Seal
and Ensuring Longer Service Life than D4E
Limit
Switches
• Flat springs with an improved lever ratio of the built-in switch ensure smooth snap action and long life expectancy.
• Protection cover protects the built-in switch from dust and oil.
Plunger incorporates a tough seal cap that lasts for a long time.
• One touch connector eliminates need for tedious wiring operations and reduces downtime for wiring and maintenance (models with standard, easy-to-use screw terminals are also
available).
• Minute load model with gold cladding is optimal for electronic
control.
• Molded terminal types as well as molded terminal types with operating indicator lamps are available for screw terminal systems.
• No difference in mounting pitch and characteristics between
[email protected] and D4E models.
Model Number Structure
■ Model Number Legend
[email protected]@@@@N
1 2
3
4
1. Rated Current
1:
5 A at 125 VAC
(1 A at 125 VAC/30 VDC for model with a connector)
2:
0.1 A at 125 VAC
(0.1 A at 125 VAC/30 VDC for model with a connector)
2. Actuator
A:
Roller plunger
B:
Crossroller plunger
C:
Plunger
D:
Sealed roller plunger
E:
Sealed crossroller plunger
F:
Sealed plunger
G:
Roller lever
H:
One-way action roller lever
3. Terminals
00: AC connector
10: DC connector
20: Screw terminals without a cable
21: Screw terminals with a cable (right-hand)
22: Screw terminals with a cable (left-hand)
23: Molded terminals with a cable (right-hand)
24: Molded terminals with a cable (left-hand)
(Cable is S-FLEX VCTF 3 m)
4. Operation Indicator
L:
Neon lamp (250 VAC)
L1: LED (12 VDC)
L2: LED (24 VDC)
L3: LED (48 VDC)
Note: 1. Only the molded terminal models can be equipped with an
operation indicator.
2. Desired Switches may not be manufactured depending on
the combination between molds and indicators. Contact our
sales representative for further information.
Small Sealed Switch
[email protected]
F-31
Ordering Information
■ List of Models
One-touch connector type
Generalpurpose
Micro load
Screw terminal type
Generalpurpose without
cable
Micro load
without cable
Generalpurpose with
cable
Micro load with
cable
Actuator
Roller plunger
[email protected]
[email protected]
D4E-1A20N (see D4E-2A20N
note 2)
D4E-1A21N
D4E-2A21N
Crossroller
plunger
[email protected]
[email protected]
D4E-1B20N (see D4E-2B20N
note 2)
D4E-1B21N
D4E-2B21N
Plunger
[email protected]
[email protected]
D4E-1C20N (see D4E-2C20N
note 2)
D4E-1C21N
D4E-2C21N
Sealed roller plunger
[email protected]
[email protected]
D4E-1D20N (see D4E-2D20N
note 2)
D4E-1D21N
D4E-2D21N
Sealed crossroller
plunger
[email protected]
[email protected]
D4E-1E20N (see D4E-2E20N
note 2)
D4E-1E21N
D4E-2E21N
Sealed plunger
[email protected]
[email protected]
D4E-1F20N (see D4E-2F20N
note 2)
D4E-1F21N
D4E-2F21N
Roller lever
[email protected]
[email protected]
D4E-1G20N (see D4E-2G20N
note 2)
D4E-1G21N
D4E-2G21N
One-way action
roller lever
[email protected]
[email protected]
D4E-1H20N (see D4E-2H20N
note 2)
D4E-1H21N
D4E-2H21N
Note: 1.
2.
3.
4.
When ordering, specify the current type by replacing the blank box of the model number with 0 for AC connector or 1 for DC connector.
Approved by UL and CSA.
For the plunger and lever actuator models, the NC and NO terminal indicators are reversed.
Cold tolerance specifications are available for actuator models with an A, B, C, G, or H in the model number. When ordering, add C to
the model number.
For example: D4E-1A20N → D4E-1A20N-C
Accessories (Order Separately)
Plug
Model
XS2F-A421-D90-A
Current
AC
Type
Straight
XS2F-A421-G90-A
XS2F-D421-D80A
Cable length
2m
Applicable models
[email protected]@00N
5m
DC
XS2F-D421-G80-A
F-32
No. of conductors
4
Small Sealed Switch [email protected]
2m
5m
[email protected]@10N
Specifications
■ Approved Standards
Agency
Standard
UL
UL508
File No.
E76675
CSA
CSA C22.2 No. 14
LR45746
TÜV Rheinland
EN60947-5-1
R9551015
■ Approved Standard Ratings
UL, CSA
A300
Voltage
Carry current
Current
Make
120 V
10 A
240 V
Volt-amperes
Break
60 A
6A
30 A
3A
Make
Break
7,200 VA
720 VA
TÜV (EN60947-5-1)
Model
I
II
Applicable category and ratings
III
IV
Thermal
current (Ithe)
Indicator
1
@
00
AC-14 0.5 A/125 VAC
5A
---
1
@
10
DC-12 0.5 A/30 VDC
5A
---
1
@
20, 21, 22
AC-15 2A/250 VAC
DC-12 2A/48 VDC
5A
---
1
@
23, 24
L
AC-15 2A/250 VAC
5A
Neon lamp
1
@
23, 24
L1
DC-12 2A/12 VDC
5A
LED
1
@
23, 24
L2
DC-12 2A/24 VDC
5A
LED
1
@
23, 24
L3
DC-12 2A/48 VDC
5A
LED
2
@
00
AC-14 0.1A/125 VAC
0.5 A
---
2
@
10
DC-12 0.1A/30 VDC
0.5 A
---
2
@
20, 21, 22
AC-14 0.1A/125 VAC
DC-12 0.1A/48 VDC
0.5 A
---
2
@
23, 24
L
AC-14 0.1A/125 VAC
0.5 A
Neon lamp
2
@
23, 24
L1
DC-12 0.1A/12 VDC
0.5 A
LED
2
@
23, 24
L2
DC-12 0.1A/24 VDC
0.5 A
LED
2
@
23, 24
L3
DC-12 0.1A/48 VDC
0.5 A
LED
Note: 1. @: Actuator variation of item II
2. AC-14 0.5 A/125 VAC means as follows:
Applicable category: AC-14
Rated operating current (Ie): 0.5 A
Rated operating voltage (Ue): 125 VAC
Small Sealed Switch
[email protected]
F-33
Limit
Switches
1 G 23 L N
D4E- I II III IV
■ Ratings
Rated voltage
General-purpose
Non-inductive load
Resistive load
NC
125 VAC
5 (1) A
Lamp load
NO
NC
Micro load
Inductive load
Inductive load
NO
1.5 (1) A
NC
Motor load
NO
3 (1) A
Non-inductive load
Resistive load
NC
NO
NC
2 (1) A
1 (1) A
0.1 A
0.5 A
---
250 VAC
5 (1) A
1.5 (1) A
3 (1) A
1A
8 VDC
5 (1) A
---
1.5 (1) A
---
0.1 A
14 VDC
5 (1) A
---
1.5 (1) A
---
0.1 A
30 VDC
5 (1) A
---
1.5 (1) A
---
0.1 A
125 VDC
0.5 A
---
0.05 A
---
---
250 VDC
0.25 A
---
0.03 A
---
---
Inrush current
Note: 1.
2.
3.
4.
NC
10 A max.
NO
10 A max.
NO
The above current ratings are for a standard current and the values in parentheses are for models with a connector.
Inductive loads have a power factor of 0.4 min. (AC) and a time constant of 7 ms max. (DC).
Lamp load has an inrush current of 10 times the steady-state current.
Motor load has an inrush current of 6 times the steady-state current.
■ Characteristics
Degree of protection
IP67
Durability (see note 3)
Mechanical: 10,000,000 operations min.
Electrical: 500,000 operations min. (5 A at 250 VAC, resistive load)
5,000,000 operations min. (10 mA at 24 VDC, resistive load)
Operating speed
0.1 mm to 0.5 m/sec
Operating frequency
Mechanical: 120 operations/min
Electrical: 30 operations/min
Rated frequency
50/60 Hz
Insulation resistance
100 MΩ min. (at 500 VDC)
Contact resistance
15 mΩ max. (initial value)
Dielectric strength
1,000 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 min between terminals of same polarity
1,500 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 min/Uimp at 2.5 kV (EN60947-5-1) between current-carrying metal parts
and ground, and between each terminal and non-current-carrying metal part
Rated insulation voltage (Ui)
250 VAC
Switching overvoltage
1,000 VAC max. (EN60947-5-1)
Pollution degree
(operating environment)
3 (EN60947-5-1)
Short-circuit protective device (SCPD) 10 A fuse (type gG or gI, IEC269 approved)
Conditional short-circuit current
100 A (EN60947-5-1)
Conventional enclosed thermal current 5 A (EN60947-5-1)
(Ithe)
Protection against electric shock
Class II (grounding not required with double insulation)
Vibration resistance
Malfunction: 10 to 55 Hz, 1.5-mm double amplitude
Shock resistance
Destruction: 1,000 m/s2 min.
Malfunction: 300 m/s2 min.
Ambient temperature
Operating: –10°C to 80°C (with no icing)
Ambient humidity
Operating: 95% max.
Weight
Approx. 86 g (in case of roller plunger)
Note: 1. The above values are initial values.
2. The above ratings may vary depending on the model. Contact your OMRON representative for further details.
3. Durability values are calculated at an operating temperature of 5°C to 35°C, and an operating humidity of 40% to 70%. Contact your
OMRON sales representative for more detailed information on other operating environments.
F-34
Small Sealed Switch [email protected]
■ Operating Characteristics
Model
[email protected]@N
[email protected]@N
[email protected]@N
[email protected]@N
[email protected]@N
[email protected]@N
[email protected]@N
[email protected]@N
[email protected]@N
[email protected]@N
OF max.
11.77 N
11.77 N
11.77 N
11.77 N
11.77 N
RF min.
4.90 N
4.90 N
4.90 N
4.90 N
4.90 N
PT max.
1.5 mm
1.5 mm
1.5 mm
1.5 mm
1.5 mm
OT min.
3 mm
3 mm
3 mm
3 mm
3 mm
MD (reference (0.1 mm)
value)
(0.1 mm)
(0.1 mm)
(0.1 mm)
(0.1 mm)
OP
31.4±0.8 mm
25.4±0.8 mm
41.3±0.8 mm
41.3±0.8 mm
31.4±0.8 mm
Model
[email protected]@N
[email protected]@N
[email protected]@N
[email protected]@N
[email protected]@N
[email protected]@N
OF max.
11.77 N
3.92 N
3.92 N
RF min.
4.90 N
0.78 N
0.78 N
PT max.
1.5 mm
2 mm
2 mm
OT min.
3 mm
4 mm
4 mm
MD (reference (0.1 mm)
value)
(0.3 mm)
(0.3 mm)
OP
23.1±0.8 mm
34.3±0.8 mm
30±0.8 mm
Note: The values given in parentheses are reference values.
Connector Type
Screw Terminal Type
Plunger
AC
Lever
DC
NC
2
COM
3
NO
NC
COM
NC
1
4
NO
NC
2
COM
COM
Limit
Switches
■ Contact Form
3
1
4
4 (NO)
(COM) 1
2 (NC)
NO
(COM) 1
NO
2 (NC)
4 (NO)
EN60947-5-1
EN60947-5-1
Engineering Data
Electrical Durability (cosφ=1)
Durability (x104 operations)
Operating temperature: 5°C to 30°C
Operating humidity: 40% to 70%.
Operating frequency: 30 operations/min
(cosφ= 1)
250 VAC
Switching current (A)
Small Sealed Switch
[email protected]
F-35
Nomenclature
Bearing
The actuator strength has been increased to 4,903 N
(D4E: 294 N) in order to prevent faulty resetting of
the bearing, which may occur when the roller is
pressed with excessive force.
Movable Plunger
Rubber Cap (NBR)
Rubber cap provides a tight seal and
ensures a long service life and
smooth reset at low temperatures.
Built-in Switch
Switch cover ensures high insulation between the
terminals and die-cast. Double insulation means that
grounding is unnecessary. Meets UL, CSA, and EN
standards.
Prevents the movable piece from being pushed in
too far, and thereby contributes to a longer service
life.
Seal Packing (NBR)
Seal packing withstands a pressure of
186 kPa (D4E's seal packing withstands a pressure of 98 kPa).
Terminal Protection Cover
[email protected] has a wide wiring space of
10 mm horizontally (D4E has a space
of 7.5 mm horizontally).
F-36
Die-cast Case
Zinc die-cast case is anti-corrosive and tough.
Screw Terminal
Screw terminal incorporates a M3
screw with a toothed washer.
Small Sealed Switch [email protected]
Wiring Ease
Wired made easier using (D4CC-type)
plug-in connector.
Dimensions
Note: 1.
2.
3.
4.
All units are in millimeters unless otherwise indicated.
Unless otherwise specified, a tolerance of ±0.4 mm applies to all dimensions.
A 3-m lead wire cable equivalent to the 3-conductor VCTF S-FLEX cable (0.75 mm2, 7 mm in dia.) is provided.
A 5.8- to 7.6-dia. cable can be applied to the seal rubber for the lead wire outlet.
Roller Plunger
D4E-1A00N
D4E-1A10N
D4E-2A00N
D4E-2A10N
3.5
PT
(46)
33±0.15
10
4.2+0.2
0 dia.
holes
OP
11 dia. x 4.7 stainless
sintered alloy roller
6.5
Two, panel mounting nut
2.5 mm thickness, 17 mm
M14 x 1
width across flats
0.5
10
4.7 holes
8
28.4
21.5
4.5
4.2+0.2
0
(60)
M12 x 1
18
Roller Plunger
3.5
PT
10
(46)
33±0.15
4.2+0.2
0 dia.
holes
OP
11 dia. x 4.7 stainless
sintered alloy roller
6.5
Two, panel mounting nut
2.5 mm thickness, 17 mm
width across flats
M14 x 1
0.5
4.7 holes
10
8
28.4
Limit
Switches
D4E-1A20N (See note 4.)
D4E-2A20N (See note 4.)
D4E-1A21N (See note 3.)
D4E-2A21N (See note 3.)
4.2+0.2
0
4.5
21.5
16 dia.
D4E-1B00N
D4E-1B10N
D4E-2B00N
D4E-2B10N
18
(57)
Cross Roller Plunger
3.5
PT
10
(46)
33±0.15
4.2+0.2
0 dia.
holes
OP
11 dia. x 4.7 stainless
sintered alloy roller
6.5
Two, panel mounting nut
2.5 mm thickness, 17 mm
M14 x 1
width across flats
0.5
4.7 holes
10
8
28.4
4.2+0.2
0
4.5
21.5
(60)
M12 x 1
18
Cross Roller Plunger
D4E-1B20N
D4E-2B20N
D4E-1B21N
D4E-2B21N
3.5
PT
10
(46)
33±0.15
Two, panel mounting nut
2.5 mm thickness, 17 mm
width across flats
4.2+0.2
0 dia.
holes
OP
11 dia. x 4.7 stainless
sintered alloy roller
6.5
M14 x 1
0.5
10
4.7 hole
8
4.2+0.2
0
4.5
28.4 21.5
16 dia.
(57)
18
Small Sealed Switch
[email protected]
F-37
Plunger
D4E-1C00N
D4E-1C10N
D4E-2C00N
D4E-2C10N
PT
3.5
4.2+0.2
0 dia.
holes
(46)
33±0.15
7.8 dia. stainless
steel plunger
Two, panel mounting nut
M14 x 1
2.5 mm thickness, 17 mm
width across flats
0.5
4.7 hole
6.5
10
10
OP
8
4.2+0.2
0
4.5
28.4
21.5
(60)
M12 x 1
18
Plunger
D4E-1C20N (See note 4.)
D4E-2C20N (See note 4.)
D4E-1C21N (See note 3.)
D4E-2C21N (See note 3.)
PT
4.2+0.2
0
3.5
dia.
7.8 dia. stainless
steel plunger
6.5
Two, panel mounting nut
M14 x 1
2.5 mm thickness, 17 mm
width across flats
0.5 long hole center
4.7 holes
(46)
33±0.15
10
holes
10
OP
8
4.2+0.2
0
4.5
28.4 21.5
16 dia.
(57)
18
Sealed Roller Plunger
(46)
D4E-1D00N
D4E-1D10N
D4E-2D00N
D4E-2D10N
3.5
PT
33±0.15
11 dia. x 4.7 stainless
sintered alloy roller
6.5
10
Sealed rubber
0.5
OP
4.7 holes
4.2+0.2
0
28.4
21.5 4.5
4.2+0.2
0 dia.
(60)
M12 x 1
18
Sealed Roller Plunger
D4E-1D20N (See note 4.)
D4E-2D20N (See note 4.)
D4E-1D21N (See note 3.)
D4E-2D21N (See note 3.)
(46)
33±0.15
10
3.5
PT
4.5
21.5
(57)
4.2+0.2
0 dia.
holes
F-38
11 dia. x 4.7 stainless
sintered alloy roller
Sealed rubber
0.5
4.7 holes
4.2+0.2
0
OP
28.4
6.5
Small Sealed Switch [email protected]
18
Sealed Cross Roller Plunger
D4E-1E00N
D4E-1E10N
D4E-2E00N
D4E-2E10N
(46)
3.5
PT
33±0.15
10
11 dia. x 4.7 stainless
sintered alloy roller
6.5
Sealed rubber
0.5
OP
4.7 holes
4.2+0.2
0
21.5 4.5
28.4
4.2+0.2
0 dia.
holes
M12 x 1
(60)
18
Sealed Cross Roller Plunger
D4E-1E20N (See note 4.)
D4E-2E20N (See note 4.)
D4E-1E21N (See note 3.)
D4E-2E21N (See note 3.)
(46)
PT
3.5
33±0.15
10
6.5
11 dia. x 4.7 stainless
sintered alloy roller
Sealed rubber
0.5
4.7 holes
4.2+0.2
0
OP
28.4
Limit
Switches
4.5
21.5
18
(57)
4.2+0.2
0 dia.
holes
Sealed Plunger
D4E-1F00N
D4E-1F10N
D4E-2F00N
D4E-2F10N
(46)
3.5
PT
33±0.15
6.5
7.8 dia. stainless
steel plunger
10
Sealed rubber
0.5
OP
4.7 holes
4.2+0.2
0
28.4
21.5 4.5
M12 x 1
(60)
4.2+0.2
0 dia.
holes
18
Sealed Plunger
D4E-1F20N (See note 4.)
D4E-2F20N (See note 4.)
D4E-1F21N (See note 3.)
D4E-2F21N (See note 3.)
(46)
33±0.15
10
3.5
PT
6.5
Sealed rubber
7.8 dia. stainless
steel plunger
0.5
4.7 holes
OP
4.5
4.2+0.2
0
21.5
28.4
4.2+0.2
0 dia.
holes
(57)
18
Small Sealed Switch
[email protected]
F-39
Roller Lever
D4E-1G00N
D4E-1G10N
D4E-2G00N
D4E-2G10N
3.5
4.2+0.2
0 dia.
holes
(46)
33±0.15
0.5
4.7 holes
19.4
23R
6.5
PT
9.5 dia. x 4.8 stainless
sintered alloy roller
OP
15
28.4
4.2+0.2
0
21.5
(60)
18
M12 x 1
Roller Lever
D4E-1G20N (See note 4.)
D4E-2G20N (See note 4.)
D4E-1G21N (See note 3.)
D4E-2G21N (See note 3.)
3.5
4.2+0.2
0 dia.
holes
(46)
33±0.15
0.5
4.7 holes
19.4
23R
6.5
PT
9.5 dia. x 4.8 stainless
sintered alloy roller
18
OP
15
28.4
12
4.2+0.2
0
21.5
16 dia.
(57)
One-way Action Roller Lever
D4E-1H00N
D4E-1H10N
D4E-2H00N
D4E-2H10N
3.5
(46)
33±0.15
9.5 dia. x 4.8 stainless
sintered alloy roller
6.5
0.5
4.7 holes
Operating direction
4.2+0.2
0 dia.
holes
15
28.4
19.4
PT
28R
OP
12
4.2+0.2
0
21.5
(60)
18
M12 x 1
One-way Action Roller Lever
D4E-1H20N (See note 4.)
D4E-2H20N (See note 4.)
D4E-1H21N (See note 3.)
D4E-2H21N (See note 3.)
3.5
Operating direction
4.2+0.2
0 dia.
holes
15
28.4
(46)
33±0.15
0.5
4.7 holes
6.5
PT
9.5 dia. x 4.8 stainless
sintered alloy roller
28R
19.4
OP
12
4.2+0.2
0
21.5
16 dia.
(57)
F-40
Small Sealed Switch [email protected]
18
Molded Terminal Models
■ Molded Terminal Models
The molded-terminal model is available with right-hand, left-hand and underside leads and is recommended for use where the Switch is exposed
to dust, oil or moisture. It can be used like a screw-terminal model (with a cable), and the dimensions and operating characteristics are the same
as for standard models.
Example:
Standard type:
D4E-1A20N
Location of lead output: Right-hand → D4E-1A23N
Suffix by Location of Lead Outlet
Location of lead output
Suffix for pre-wired terminal
COM, NC, NO
(2)
(1)
(1) Right-hand
[email protected]@23N
(2) Left-hand
[email protected]@24N
Lead Supplies
Nominal
cross-sectional area
V.C.T.F. S-FLEX
(vinyl cabtire coat)
Finished outside diameter
3 conductors
0.75 mm2
Terminal connections
Black: COM
White: NO
Red: NC
7 mm dia.
Standard length
3m
Limit
Switches
Leads
Comparison between Old and New Mold Terminal Models
The D4E-N and D4E are different from each other in terminal specifications.
D4E-N
D4E
Right-hand
Location of lead output
[email protected]@23N
[email protected]@21
Left-hand
[email protected]@24N
[email protected]@23
Underside
---
[email protected]@22
■ Operation of Indicator-equipped Models
The molded terminal model may be equipped with an operation indicator (neon lamp or LED) upon request to facilitate maintenance and inspection.
The operation indicator is designed to illuminate when the Switch is not operating. (Because of the molded terminal model, any change to the
Switch wiring cannot be made.)
AC Operation
Internal Circuit
A neon lamp indicator is provided.
The operating voltage is 90 to 250 VAC.
Power supply
Built-in switch
Load
Neon lamp R = 240 kΩ
Neon lamp
Terminal protection cover
(transparent)
There is no difference in operating characteristics between D4E AC
Models and corresponding D4E Standard Models.
There is no difference in dimensions between D4E AC Models and
D4E Standard Models.
Example:
Basic type: D4E-1A23N
When placing your order for the molded terminal model with an neon
lamp operation indicator, specify the model number as D4E-1A23LN.
Small Sealed Switch
[email protected]
F-41
DC Operation
LED indicator is provided.
As a rectifier stack is incorporated, into the unit and no directionality
exists for connection of + and –, this type can also be operated on
AC.
Voltage ratings of LED indicators are as shown in the table below.
Internal Circuit
Power supply*
Built-in switch
Load
Resistance
LED
Note: *An external 24VDC power supply can be used, eg. OMRON
S8VS.
Type
Voltage
rating
Lamp current
Internal
resistance
L1
12 V
Approx. 2.4 mA
4.3 kΩ
L2
24 V
Approx. 1.2 mA
18 kΩ
L3
48 V
Approx. 2.1 mA
22 kΩ
Example:
When ordering a D4E DC Model, add the following suffix to the
model number.
Basic Model: The model number of the D4E-1A23N with a built-in
12-V LED indicator is D4E-1A23L1N.
F-42
Small Sealed Switch [email protected]
Precautions
Refer to the Technical Information for Limit Switches (Cat. No. C121).
■ Correct Use
Mounting
Do not solder the screw terminals.
Secure the Switch with two M4 screws and washers. The tightening
torque applied to each terminal must be 1.18 to 1.37 N·m. Tighten
the screws to the specified torque. An excessive tightening torque
may damage the Switch and cause a malfunction.
Sealing materials may deteriorate when used outdoors or when
exposed to cutting oil, solvents, or chemicals. Check this on actual
equipment and, if deterioration is foreseen, consult your OMRON
representative in advance.
If the one-touch connector is to be mounted onto the switch body,
lightly push up the fitting so that the switch body can then be inserted
into the clamp.
Mounting Holes
Two, 4.3 dia. or M4 hole
Lightly push up the filling on the
left and right side alternately.
33±0.15
When mounting the panel mount-type Switch with screws on a side
surface, remove the hexagonal nuts from the actuator.
Insert the switch
body
When mounting the panel mount type on a panel, tighten the hexagonal nuts of the actuator to a torque less than 7.85 N·m.
Mounting Hole
Limit
Switches
14.5±0.2 dia.
Be sure that the clamp is inserted to the full depth, because the
Switch will not function properly if one of the clamps is improperly
inserted.
Confirm
visually
Switch body
Operating method, shape of cam or dog, operating frequency, and
the overtravel (OT) have significant effect on the service life and precision of the Limit Switch. Make sure that the shape of the cam is
smooth enough.
Check that OT has a sufficient margin. The actual OT should be
rated OT x 0.7 to 1.
Do not change the operating position by remodeling the actuator.
Clamp fitting
If the clamp is properly inserted up to the full depth, it will not slide
out easily. Be sure to carefully confirm all the above items.
Be sure to connect a fuse with a breaking current 1.5 to 2 times the
rated current to the Limit Switch in series in order to protect the Limit
Switch from damage due to short-circuiting.
When using the Limit under the EN ratings, use a gI or gG 10-A fuse
that conforms to IEC260.
Wiring
When wiring screw terminals, M3-size round solderless terminals
with an insulation tube is recommended. The conductor size should
be 0.75 mm2 and cable diameter should be 7 mm.
Refer to the following when wiring.
D dia.
dz dia.
dz dia.:
D dia.:
B:
L:
F:
l:
3.2
1.9
5.2
16.4
5.8
8.0 (mm)
Wiring Method
D4E-N
Round solderless terminal
Small Sealed Switch
[email protected]
F-43
Tightening Torque
A loose screw may result in a malfunction. Be sure to tighten each
screw to the proper tightening torque as shown below.
No.
Type
Torque
1
Terminal screw (M3)
0.24 to 0.44 N·m
2
Switch mounting screw (M4) 1.18 to 1.37 N·m
2
1
ALL DIMENSIONS SHOWN ARE IN MILLIMETERS.
To convert millimeters into inches, multiply by 0.03937. To convert grams into ounces, multiply by 0.03527.
Cat. No. C028-E1-05
F-44
In the interest of product improvement, specifications are subject to change without notice.
Small Sealed Switch [email protected]
Enclosed Switch
SHL
Subminiature Enclosed Switch (Measuring
48 x 17.5 x 45 mm) with High Sealing
Property
• Built-in coil spring type basic switch housed in rigid zinc diecast
alloy casting boasts long life and high precision.
• Requires nearly the same operating force as conventional basic
precision switches (2.35 to 3.92 N).
• Molded terminal model is available.
• Operation indicator model is also available.
Limit
Switches
Model Number Structure
■ Model Number Legend
Standard Models
[email protected]@
1
1. Actuator
D:
Q:
Q22:
Q21:
W:
W1:
W2:
W21:
W3:
W31:
2
Plunger
Panel mount plunger
Panel mount roller plunger
Panel mount crossroller plunger
Short hinge lever
Hinge lever
Short hinge roller lever
Hinge roller lever
One-way action short hinge roller lever
One-way action hinge roller lever
2. Rated Current
None: Standard
01:
Micro Load
Note: Refer to page 53 for Molded Terminal Models.
Ordering Information
■ List of Models
Actuator
Standard model
Micro voltage
Plunger
SHL-D55
SHL-D55-01
Panel mount plunger
SHL-Q55
SHL-Q55-01
Panel mount roller plunger
SHL-Q2255
SHL-Q2255-01
Panel mount crossroller plunger
SHL-Q2155
SHL-Q2155-01
Short hinge lever
SHL-W55
SHL-W55-01
Enclosed Switch
SHL
F-45
Actuator
Standard model
Micro voltage
Hinge lever
SHL-W155
SHL-W155-01
Short hinge roller lever
SHL-W255
SHL-W255-01
Hinge roller lever
SHL-W2155
SHL-W2155-01
One-way action short hinge roller lever
SHL-W355
SHL-W355-01
One-way action hinge roller lever
SHL-W3155
SHL-W3155-01
Specifications
■ Approved Standards
Agency
Standard
File No.
UL
UL508
E76675
CSA
CSA C22.2 No. 14
LR45746
TÜV Rheinland
EN60947-5-1
R9451332
■ Approved Standard Ratings
UL/CSA
A300
Rated voltage
Carry current
Current
Make
120 VAC
10 A
240 VAC
Volt-amperes
Break
60 A
6A
30 A
3A
Make
7,200 VA
Break
720 VA
TÜV Rheinland Approved Ratings (EN60947-5-1)
Model
Category and rating
I the
[email protected]
AC-15 2 A/125 V
DC-12 2 A/48 V
5A
4A
[email protected]
AC-14 0.1 A/125 V
DC-12 0.1 A/48 V
0.5 A
0.5 A
[email protected]
AC-15 2 A/125 V
5A
[email protected]
AC-14 0.1 A/125 V
0.5 A
[email protected]
DC-12 0.1 A/12 V
0.5 A
[email protected]
DC-12 2 A/24 V
4A
[email protected]
DC-12 0.1 A/24 V
0.5 A
[email protected]
DC-12 2 A/24 V
4A
[email protected]
DC-12 0.1 A/24 V
0.5 A
[email protected]
DC-12 2 A/48 V
4A
[email protected]
DC-12 0.1 A/48 V
0.5 A
Note: For details on the above models, refer to Model Number Legend under Molded Terminal Models.
F-46
Enclosed Switch SHL
■ Ratings
Rated voltage
Non-inductive load
Resistive load
NC
Inductive load
Lamp load
NO
NC
Inductive load
NO
NC
NO
NC
125 VAC
10 A
1.5 A
250 VAC
10 A
1.5 A
2A
1.5 A
480 VAC
2A
---
---
---
8 VDC
10 A
2A
5A
2A
14 VDC
10 A
2A
5A
2A
30 VDC
5A
1.5 A
1.5 A
1.5 A
125 VDC
0.4 A
0.4 A
0.05 A
0.05 A
250 VDC
0.2 A
0.2 A
0.03 A
0.03 A
Note: 1.
2.
3.
4.
3A
Inrush current
Motor load
NO
2.5 A
NC
NO
15 A max.
The above figures are for steady-state currents.
Inductive loads have a power factor of 0.4 min. (AC) and a time constant of 7 ms max. (DC).
Lamp load has an inrush current of 10 times the steady-state current.
Motor load has an inrush current of 6 times the steady-state current.
Micro Voltage/Current Load Model
Rated voltage
Non-inductive load
Resistive load
125 VAC
0.1 A
8 VDC
0.1 A
14 VDC
0.1 A
30 VDC
0.1 A
NO
Limit
Switches
NC
Enclosed Switch
SHL
F-47
■ Characteristics
Degree of protections (see note 3)
IP67 (EN60947-5-1)
Durability (see note 4)
Mechanical: 10,000,000 operations min.
Electrical: 500,000 operations min.
Operating speed
0.1 mm to 0.5 m/s (hinge lever models)
Operating frequency
Mechanical: 120 operations/min
Electrical: 30 operations/min
Rated frequency
50/60 Hz
Insulation resistance
100 MΩ min. (at 500 VDC)
Contact resistance
15 mΩ max.(initial value)
Dielectric strength
1,000 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 min between terminals of the same polarity
2,000 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 min/Uimp at 2.5 kV (EN60947-5-1) between current-carrying metal part and
ground, and between each terminal and non-current-carrying metal part
Rated insulation voltage (Ui)
150 V (EN60947-5-1)
Switching overvoltage
1,000 VAC max., 300 VDC max. (EN60947-5-1)
Pollution degree
(operating environment)
3 (EN60947-5-1)
Short-circuit protective device
(SCPD)
10 A fuse type gG (IEC269)
Conditional short-circuit current
100 A (EN60947-5-1)
Conventional enclosed thermal current (Ithe)
5 A (EN60947-5-1)
Protection against electric shock
Class II (grounding not required with double insulation)
OFF reverse voltage
1,000 VAC max., 300 VDC max. (EN60947-5-1)
Vibration resistance
Malfunction: 10 to 55 Hz, 1.5-mm double amplitude
Shock resistance
Destruction: 1,000 m/s2 min.
Malfunction: 300 m/s2 min.
Ambient temperature
Operating:
–10°C to 80°C (no icing)
Ambient humidity
Operating:
95% max.
Weight (see note 5)
Approx. 62 to 72 g
Note: 1.
2.
3.
4.
The above figures are for standard currents.
The above ratings may vary depending on the model. Contact your OMRON representative for further details.
The head section of the plunger type SHL-D(Q)@@ is excluded.
Durability values are calculated at an operating temperature of 5°C to 35°C, and an operating humidity of 40% to 70%. Contact your
OMRON sales representative for more detailed information on other operating environments.
5. The values are for the plunger-type models.
■ Operating Characteristics
Model
SHL-D55
SHL-D55-01
SHL-Q55
SHL-Q55-01
SHL-Q2255
SHL-Q2255-01
SHL-Q2155
SHL-Q2155-01
SHL-W55
SHL-W55-01
OF max.
9.81 N
9.81 N
9.81 N
9.81 N
3.14 N
RF min.
1.96 N
1.96 N
1.96 N
1.96 N
0.78 N
PT max.
1.5 mm
1.5 mm
1.5 mm
1.5 mm
8 mm
OT min.
2 mm
2 mm
2 mm
2 mm
3 mm
MD max.
0.5 mm
0.5 mm
0.5 mm
0.5 mm
2.5 mm
OP
34±0.8 mm
34±0.8 mm
43±0.8 mm
43±0.8 mm
21.5±1 mm
FP max.
---
---
---
---
29.5 mm
Model
SHL-W155
SHL-W155-01
SHL-W255
SHL-W255-01
SHL-W2155
SHL-W2155-01
SHL-W355
SHL-W355-01
SHL-W3155
SHL-W3155-01
OF max.
2.35 N
3.92 N
2.55 N
3.92 N
2.55 N
RF min.
0.44 N
0.78 N
0.49 N
0.78 N
0.49 N
PT max.
13 mm
8 mm
13 mm
8 mm
13 mm
OT min.
5 mm
3 mm
5.5 mm
3 mm
5.5 mm
MD max.
4 mm
2.5 mm
4 mm
2.5 mm
4 mm
OP
21.5±1 mm
33±1 mm
33.5±1 mm
44.5±1 mm
44.5±1 mm
FP max.
34.5 mm
41 mm
46.5 mm
52.5 mm
57.5 mm
F-48
Enclosed Switch SHL
■ Contact Form
NC
COM
NO
(COM) 1
2 (NC)
4 (NO)
EN60947-5-1
Engineering Data
■ Electrical Durability
Ambient temperature: 5˚C to 35˚C
Ambient humidity: 40% to 50%
Durability (x 104 operations)
Operating frequency:
30 operations/min.
(cosφ = 1)
Limit
Switches
250 VAC
Switching current (A)
Nomenclature
Movable plunger
Rubber cap (NBR)
Die-cast case (zinc die-cast)
Seal rubber (NBR)
Terminal protection cover
Screw terminal
Seal rubber (NBR)
Enclosed Switch
SHL
F-49
Dimensions
Note: 1. All units are in millimeters unless otherwise indicated.
2. Unless otherwise specified, a tolerance of ±0.4 mm applies to all dimensions.
Plunger
SHL-D55, SHL-D55-01
7.8 dia. (see note)
Two, 4.2 dia.
holes
M14 × 1
9.6
16.9
15 × 15
Note: Stainless steel pin plunger
Terminal
protective
cover
Panel Mount Plunger
SHL-Q55, SHL-Q55-01
Rubber seal
7.8 dia. (see note)
M14 × 1
Two hexagon nut
(thickness: 2.5,
width: 17)
9.6
16.9
Note: Stainless steel pin plunger
15 × 15
Panel Mount Roller Plunger
SHL-Q2255, SHL-Q2255-01
11 dia. × 4.7 (see note)
Two hexagon nut
(thickness: 2.5
width: 17)
9.6
16.9
Note: Stainless sintered alloy roller
15 × 15
Panel Mount Crossroller Plunger
SHL-Q2155, SHL-Q2155-01
11 dia. × 4.7 (see note)
Two hexagon nut
(thickness: 2.5
width: 17)
9.6
16.9
15 × 15
F-50
Enclosed Switch SHL
Note: Stainless sintered alloy roller
Short Hinge Lever
SHL-W55, SHL-W55-01
35R
42.5
6.8
t = 1 (see note)
17.5
13
16.5
24
21
16.9
FP
OP
16
16
9.6
13
3.5
16.5±0.2 13
Hinge Lever
SHL-W155, SHL-W155-01
Note: Stainless steel lever
15 × 15
t = 1 (see note)
6.8
17.5
53R
FP
24
16.9
21
OP
16
16
Note: Stainless steel lever
9.6
3.5
16.5±0.2 13
Short Hinge Roller Lever
SHL-W255, SHL-W255-01
15 × 15
Limit
Switches
9.5 dia. × 4.8 (see note)
6.8
31R
FP
24
OP
21
16
16
9.6
16.9 3.5
16.5±0.2 13
Hinge Roller Lever
SHL-W2155, SHL-W2155-01
15 × 15
9.5 dia. × 4.8 (see note)
6.8
51R
OP
24
16.9
Note: Sintered stainless roller
21
FP
Note: Sintered stainless roller
16
16
9.6
3.5
16.5±0.2 13
15 × 15
Enclosed Switch
SHL
F-51
One-way Action Short Hinge Roller Lever
SHL-W355, SHL-W355-01
Operating direction
9.5 dia. × 4.8 (see note)
35.5R
90°
6.8
OP
24
16.9
21
FP
Note: Stainless sintered roller
16
16
9.6
3.5
16.5±0.2 13
15 × 15
9.5 dia. × 4.8 (see note)
One-way Action Hinge Roller Lever
SHL-W3155, SHL-W3155-01
6.8
Operating direction
52.5R
90°
FP
OP
24
21
16
16
9.6
16.9 3.5
16.5±0.2 13
F-52
Enclosed Switch SHL
15 × 15
Note: Stainless sintered roller
Molded Terminal Models
■ Model Number Legend
Molded Terminal Models
[email protected][email protected]@[email protected]
1
2 3
4
Items 1 (Actuator) and 2 (Rated Current) are the same as those in Standard Models.
4. Location of Lead Outlet
3. Operation Indicator
R: Right-hand
None: Not provided
L: Left-hand
L:
Neon Lamp: 90 to 250 VAC
D: Underside
L2:
LED: 12 V
L3:
LED: 24 V
L4:
LED: 24 V
L5:
LED: 48 V
Use of the molded terminal model is recommended in locations subject to excessive dust, oil drips, or moisture.
All types of SHL Switches can be fabricated into a molded terminal version. In this case, the molded terminal model will have the same dimensions
an operating characteristics as the basic model from which the molded terminal model is fabricated.
Suffix by Location of Lead Outlet
ML
MR
Model
[email protected]
Left-hand
[email protected]
Underside
[email protected]
Note: Three leads (COM, NO, and NC) are provided for terminal connections.
Example:
Basic type:
SHL-Q2255
Location of lead outlet:
Right-hand
When placing your order for the above Switch specify the model
number as SHL-Q2255-MR
MD
Lead Supplies
Leads
VCTF (Vinyl cabtire
cable)
Nominal crosssectional area
No. of conductors/
cond. dia.
30/0.18 dia.
0.75 mm2
Finished outside
diameter
3-core 7 dia.
Terminal
connections
Standard length
Black: COM
White: NO
Red:
NC
3m
■ Operation Indicator-equipped Models
UL, CSA and/or EN (IEC) approved models are available.
The molded terminal model may be equipped with an operation indicator (neon lamp or LED) upon request to facilitate maintenance and inspection.
The operation indicator is designed to illuminate when the Switch is not operating. (Because of the molded terminal model, any change to the
Switch wiring cannot be made.)
AC Operation
A neon lamp indicator is provided.
The operating voltage is 90 to 250 VAC.
Matte finish
Example:
Basic type: SHL-Q2255-01MR
When placing your order for the molded terminal model with an neon
lamp operation indicator, specify the model number as SHL-Q225501LMR.
Contact Circuit
Power supply
Built-in switch
Load
Neon lamp
Transparent terminal
protection cover
Operating characteristics are the same as the basic model from
which the operation indicator equipped model is fabricated.
Dimension are the same as the standard model.
Neon lamp R = 240 kΩ
Enclosed Switch
SHL
F-53
Limit
Switches
Location of lead outlet
Right-hand
DC Operation
Contact Circuit
LED indicator is provided.
As a rectifier stack is incorporated, into the unit and no directionality
exists for connection of + and –, this type can also be operated on
AC.
Power supply*
Built-in switch
Voltage ratings of LED indicators are as shown in the table below.
Load
The Switch case has a protrusion to facilitate visual confirmation of
LED indicator.
Resistor
Example:
Basic type:
SHL-Q2255-01MR
When placing your order for the molded terminal with an LED indicator rated at 12 V, specify the model number as SHL-Q2255-01L2MR.
LED
*An external power supply can be used, eg. OMRON S8VS.
Type
Voltage rating
Lamp current
Internal
resistance
L2
12 V
Approx. 2.4 mA
4.3 kΩ
L3
24 V
Approx. 2 mA
10 kΩ
L4
24 V
Approx. 1.2 mA
18 kΩ
L5
48 V
Approx. 2.1 mA
22 kΩ
Precautions
■ Correct Use
When mounting the panel mount-type Switch with screws on a side
surface, remove the hexagonal nuts from the actuator.
Be sure to connect a fuse with a breaking current 1.5 to 2 times the
rated current to the Limit Switch in series in order to protect the Limit
Switch from damage due to short-circuiting.
When using the Limit under the EN ratings, use a gI or gG 10-A fuse
that conforms to IEC260.
Mounting Holes
Two, 4.3-dia. or
M4 screw holes
Handling
When detaching the Terminal Protective Cover, insert a screwdriver
and apply a force in the opening direction. Do not use excess force to
remove the cover. Doing so may cause deformation in the fitting section and reduce the holding force.
When mounting the panel mount type (SHL-Q55, SHL-Q2255, or
SHL-Q2155) on a panel, tighten the hexagonal nuts of the actuator to
a torque less than 7.84 N·m.
Tightening Torque
Screwdriver
A loose screw may result in a malfunction. Be sure to tighten each
screw to the proper tightening torque as shown below.
No.
Terminal Protective Cover
When mounting the Terminal Protective Cover to the case, align the
cover on the case and then press the cover down to mount it firmly. If
the cover is pressed down in an inclined position, rubber packing will
deform and thus affect the sealing capability.
Mounting
Secure the Switch with two M4 screws and washers. The tightening
torque applied to each terminal must be 1.18 to 1.37 N·m. Tighten
the screws to the specified torque. An excessive tightening torque
may damage the Switch and cause a malfunction.
F-54
Enclosed Switch SHL
Type
Torque
1
Terminal screw (M3 screw) 0.24 to 0.44 N·m
2
Panel mounting screw
(M4 screw)
1.18 to 1.37 N·m
When wiring, use M3 round solderless terminals and apply insulation
shielding to the connections. Tighten the terminals screws to 0.24 to
0.44 N·m.
Operating Stroke
Ensure that the operating stroke for roller plunger models is within
the set position display.
Reference
Operating stroke range
Micro Load Applicable Ranges
When using a Limit Switch for opening or closing micro-load circuit
(zones 1 through 3), contact failure may occur if a Limit Switch with
ordinary contact specifications is used. Therefore, when using Limit
Switches in the micro-load range, use ones with contact specifications that are suited to each zone.
Voltage (VDC)
Use the [email protected] micro-load models within the zones (1 through 3)
shown in the following diagram.
5 mW
800 mW
0.16 mA
30
26 mA
24
Operating range for
micro-load models
Operating
range for
standard
models
12
Unusable
range
5
1 mA
100 mA 160 mA
0
0.1
1
10
100
1,000
Limit
Switches
Current (mA)
The above diagram is for standard conditions (5°C to 35°C, 40% to
70%). Since the values vary depending on the operating environment conditions, contact your OMRON representative for further
details.
Others
The standard seal rubber for the lead wire outlet is one that allows 6to 8-dia. cables. The appropriate nominal cross-section of the lead
wire is 0.75 mm2. (When the sealing capability is required over a long
period of time, use mold specifications.)
Enclosed Switch
SHL
F-55
ALL DIMENSIONS SHOWN ARE IN MILLIMETERS.
To convert millimeters into inches, multiply by 0.03937. To convert grams into ounces, multiply by 0.03527.
Cat. No. C026-E1-09
F-56
In the interest of product improvement, specifications are subject to change without notice.
Enclosed Switch SHL
Two-circuit Limit Switch
WL
Wide Selection of Two-circuit Limit Switches
• A wide selection of models are available, including the overtravel models with greater OT, lamp-equipped models for checking
operation, low-temperature and heat-resistant models, and microload models.
• Microload models are added to the product lineup.
• Meets EN/IEC standards (only Switches with ground terminals).
• Switches with ground terminals have the CE marking.
Limit
Switches
Model Number Structure
■ Model Number Legend
General-purpose Models/Environment-resistant Models
[email protected]@[email protected]@@@@@@@
1 2
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
1. Electrical Rating
Blank:
Standard
01:
Micro
2. Actuator and Head Specifications
Symbol
Actuator type
CA2
Roller lever: Standard model (R38)
CA2-7
Roller lever: Standard, standard model (R50)
CA2-8
Roller lever: Standard, standard model (R63)
H2
Roller lever: Overtravel, general-purpose model, 80°
G2
Roller lever: Overtravel, high-sensitivity, 80°
CA2-2N
Roller lever: Overtravel, 90°
GCA2
Roller lever: High-precision
CA12
Adjustable roller lever: Standard
H12
Adjustable roller lever: Overtravel, general-purpose model, 80°
G12
Adjustable roller lever: Overtravel, high-sensitivity, 80°
CA12-2N
Adjustable roller lever: Overtravel, 90°
CL
Adjustable rod lever: Standard
HL
Adjustable rod lever: Overtravel, general-purpose model, 80°, 25 to 140 mm
HLAL4
Adjustable rod lever: Overtravel, general-purpose model, 80°, 350 to 380 mm
GL
Adjustable rod lever: Overtravel, high-sensitivity, 80°, 25 to 140 mm
CL-2N
Adjustable rod lever: Overtravel, 90°, 25 to 140 mm
HAL5
Rod spring lever: Protective, Overtravel, general-purpose model, 80°
CA32-41
Fork lever lock: Protective, WL-5A100
CA32-42
Fork lever lock: Protective, WL-5A102
CA32-43
Fork lever lock: Protective, WL-5A104
D
Plunger: Top plunger
D2
Plunger: Top-roller plunger
D28
Plunger: Sealed top-roller plunger
D3
Plunger: Top-ball plunger
SD
Plunger: Horizontal plunger
Switches without levers
WLRCA2
WLRCA2
WLRCA2
WLRH2
WLRG2
WLRCA2-2N
WLRGCA2
WLRCA2
WLRH2
WLRG2
WLRCA2-2N
WLRCL
WLRH2
WLRH2
WLRG2
WLRCA2-2N
WLRH2
WLRCA32
WLRCA32
WLRCA32
-----------
Two-circuit Limit Switch
WL
F-57
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Symbol
Actuator type
Switches without levers
SD2
Plunger: Horizontal-roller plunger
--SD3
Plunger: Horizontal-ball plunger
--NJ
Flexible rod: Coil spring
--NJ-30
Flexible rod: Coil spring, multi-wire
--NJ-2
Flexible rod: Coil spring, resin rod
--NJ-S2
Flexible rod: Steel wire
--Environment-resistant Model Specifications
Blank:
Standard
RP:
Corrosion-proof (See note 1.)
P1:
Weather-resistant (See note 1.)
Built-in Switch Specifications
Blank:
General-purpose built-in switch
55:
Hermetically-sealed built-in switch (See note 1.)
Temperature Specifications
Blank:
Standard: –10°C to 80°C
TH:
Heat-resistive: 5°C to 120°C (See note 1.)
TC:
Low temperature: –40°C to 40°C (See note 1.)
Special Hermetic Model Specifications
Blank:
No cables or molding
139:
General-purpose built-in switch with cables attached and molded conduit opening and cover (cover cannot be removed).
(See note 1.)
140:
Airtight built-in switch with cables attached and molded conduit opening, cover, and case cover (cover cannot be removed).
(See note 1.)
141:
Airtight built-in switch with cables attached and molded conduit opening, cover, and case cover (cover cannot be removed).
The Head opening is created to protect it from cutting powder. (See note 1.)
145:
Airtight built-in switch with cables attached and molded conduit opening, cover, and case cover (cover cannot be removed, Head
can be mounted in any of 4 directions).
The Head opening is created to protect it from cutting powder. (See note 1.)
RP40:
Airtight built-in switch with cables attached, SC Connector can be used, molded conduit opening, cover, and case cover
(cover cannot be removed, Head direction can be changed). (See note 1.)
RP60:
Airtight built-in switch with cables attached, fluorine rubber-molded conduit opening, cover, and case cover
(cover cannot be removed, Head direction cannot be changed). (See note 1.)
Conduit Size, Ground Terminal Specifications (See note 2.)
Blank:
G 1 /2
Without ground terminal
G1:
G 1 /2
With ground terminal
G:
Y:
TS:
Pg13.5
M20
1
/2-14NPT
With ground terminal
With ground terminal
With ground terminal
8. Indicator Type
Element
LE:
Neon lamp
Voltage
125 VAC
250 VAC
10 to 115 VAC/VDC
Leakage Current
Approx. 0.6 mA
Approx. 1.9 mA
Approx. 0.5 mA
LD:
LED
9. Lamp Wiring
2:
NC connection: Light-ON when operating
3:
NO connection: Light-ON when not operating
10.Lever Type
Blank:
Standard lever
A:
Double nut lever
Note: 1. For information on applicable models, see page 60.
2. Switches with ground terminals meet EN/IEC standards (and have the CE marking).
Ground Terminal Models
WL
1
F-58
1: Type of actuator
2: Conduit opening size
The models differ depending on the size of the case’s conduit thread.
2
Model
Two-circuit Limit Switch WL
Conduit opening size
G1
G 1 /2
G
Pg 13.5
Y
M20
TS
1
/2-14NPT
Sensor I/O Connector Models
1
2
LD
3
4
1. Electrical Rating
Blank: Standard
01:
Microload
2. Actuator Type
CA2:
Roller lever: Standard
GCA2: Roller lever: High-precision
H2:
Roller lever: Overtravel, general-purpose
G2:
Roller lever: Overtravel, high-sensitivity
D2:
Plunger: Top-roller plunger
D28:
Plunger: Sealed top-roller plunger
3. Built-in Switch Type
Blank: Standard
55:
Hermetically sealed
4. Wiring Specifications
K13A:
Direct-wired Connector
(2-core: AC, NO wiring, connector pins No. 3, 4)
K13:
Direct-wired Connector
(2-core: DC, NO wiring, connector pins No. 3, 4)
K43A:
Direct-wired Connector (4-core: AC)
K43:
Direct-wired Connector (4-core: DC)
-M1J:
Pre-wired Connector (See note 2.)
(2-core: DC, NO wiring, connector pins No. 3, 4)
-M1GJ:
Pre-wired Connector (See note 2.)
(See note 1.) (2-core: DC, NO wiring, connector pins No. 1, 4)
-M1JB:
Pre-wired Connector (See note 2.)
(See note 1.) (2-core: DC, NC wiring, connector pins No. 3, 2)
-AGJ03:
Pre-wired Connector (See note 2.) (4-core, AC)
-DGJ03:
Pre-wired Connector (See note 2.) (4-core, DC)
(See note 1.)
-DK1EJ03:
Pre-wired Connector (See note 2.)
(See note 1.) (3-core: DC, NO wiring, connector pins No. 2, 3, 4)
Note: 1. Models with pre-wired connectors and DC specifications
have EN/IEC approval.
2. With 0.3-m cable attached.
Direct-wired Connector
Limit
Switches
WL
Pre-wired Connector
Two-circuit Limit Switch
WL
F-59
Spatter-prevention Models
WL
1
2
S
3
4
5
4. Indicator Lamp
Blank: None
LD:
LED indicator lamp (AC/DC common)
LE:
Neon Lamp
5. Wiring Specifications
-M1J-1:
Pre-wired Connector (See note.)
(2-core: DC, NO wiring, connector pins No. 3, 4)
-M1GJ-1:
Pre-wired Connector (See note.)
(2-core: DC, NO wiring, connector pins No. 1, 4)
-DGJS03: Pre-wired Connector (See note.) (4 core, DC)
1. Electrical Rating
Blank: Standard
01:
Microload
2. Actuator Type
CA2:
Roller lever: Standard model
GCA2: Roller lever: High-precision model
H2:
Roller lever: Overtravel, general-purpose model
G2:
Roller lever: Overtravel, high-sensitivity model
D28:
Plunger: Sealed top-roller plunger
3. Built-in Switch Type
Blank: Standard
55:
Hermetically sealed
Note: With 0.3-m cable attached.
Ordering Information
■ Classification
Specifications
Standard
Actuators Roller lever
Plunger
Flexible rod
Load/
contact
Highprecision
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
---
---
Yes
---
---
Features
SPST-NO/
SPST-NC
type
Yes
Standard models use a two-circuit doublebreak switch.
Microload
SPST-NO/
SPST-NC
type
Yes
Specifications include gold-plated contacts.
Yes (Cannot be used with heat-resistive
and low-temperature models.)
Uses an airtight-sealed built-in switch.
Lead wires are attached.
The case is filled with epoxy resin, to ensure
high sealing performance.
The Head opening is protected from cutting
powder. ([email protected] and -145 models)
Only WLG2, WLCA2, and WLGCA2 can be
fabricated. ([email protected] models.)
The connector can be removed, so it is possible to use flexible wires in the cable. The
Head can be removed.
[email protected]
Rubber parts are made from fluorine rubber.
The Head cannot be removed.
[email protected]
66, 76
Lead wires are attached.
The case cover and conduit section are molded from epoxy resin to improve sealing performance.
Anti-cool- [email protected]
ant
Spatter-prevention
Page
Five models: Roller lever, adjustable roller le- 77 to
ver, adjustable rod lever, fork lever lock, rod 94
spring lever.
62 to
Six models: Top plunger, top-roller plunger, 64
top-ball plunger, horizontal plunger, horizon- 69, 73
tal-roller plunger, horizontal-ball plunger.
to 75
Two models: coil spring and steel wire.
Standard load
[email protected]
Environ- Airtight-seal
ment-re- Hermet- Molded [email protected]
sistant
ic seal
terminals
models
(See
note 3.)
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
F-60
Overtravel
Yes
Two-circuit Limit Switch WL
To improve spatter prevention during welding, 67, 69,
a heat-resistant resin is used, and screws
71, 73,
and rollers are all made from stainless steel. 76, 89
Standard
Overtravel
Highprecision
Features
Page
[email protected]
Yes (Cannot be used with airtight, hermet- To improve heat resistance, silicone rubber is 66
ic, low-temperature, corrosion-proof, or
used for rubber parts and for the built-in
lamp-equipped models.)
switch.
The operating temperature range is +5°C to
120°C.
[email protected]
Yes (Cannot be used with airtight, hermet- To improve low temperature resistance, siliic, heat-resistive, corrosion-proof, or lamp- cone rubber is used.
equipped models.)
The operating temperature range is –40°C to
40°C.
Corrosion-proof
(See note 4.)
[email protected]
Yes (Cannot be used with lamp-equipped Diecast parts such as the switch box are
models.)
made of corrosion-proof aluminum. Rubbersealing parts are made of fluorine rubber and
exposed nuts and screws are made of stainless steel. These all aid in resisting oil, chemicals and adverse weather conditions.
Outdoor specifications
[email protected]
--Yes
--(See note 5.) (See note 6.)
Rotary shafts are made of unquenched (i.e.,
untreated) stainless steel to improve corrosion resistance. Exposed nuts and screws
are made of stainless steel and rubber sealing parts of silicone rubber. These factors all
combine to create a product which is resistant
to temperature changes and adverse weather
conditions.
[email protected]
Yes
[email protected]
Yes
Operating status can be checked at a glance. 64, 72,
Lit when operating and not lit when not oper- 73, 75,
86
ating.
[email protected]: 100 VAC/VDC min.
[email protected]: 115 VAC/VDC min. (Refer to
page 71 for detailed ratings.)
Environ- Heat-resistive
ment-resistant
models
(See
note 3.) Low-temperature
Lamp-equipped
Relevant pages
Pages 77 to 94
---
---
Note: 1. Do not expose to extreme changes in temperature.
2. Standard Models:
Operate on each side at an angle of 45°.
Possible to set to one-side operation on either side.
Pretravel (PT) is 15°.
Overtravel Models:
Standard and high-sensitivity models operate on each side at an angle of 80°.
Not possible to set to one-side operation.
-2N Series operate on each side at an angle of 90°.
Possible to set to one-side operation on either side.
High-precision Models: Operate on each side at an angle of 45°.
Possible to set to one-side operation on either side.
Pretravel (PT) is 5°.
3. When ordering, add the suffix for the environment-resistant model or indicator specifications required according to the operating environment and purpose.
4. The overtravel model (-2N Series), fork lever lock model (WLCA32-41 to 44), horizontal plunger ([email protected]) model, heat-resistive model,
low-temperature model, and lamp-equipped model cannot be used with the corrosion-proof model.
5. Outdoor specifications are available for some standard models. Consult your OMRON representative for details.
6. Outdoor specifications are only available for general models and high-sensitivity models.
Two-circuit Limit Switch
WL
F-61
Limit
Switches
Specifications
■ List of Models
General-purpose Models
These Limit Switches are two-circuit double-break switches housed in rugged diecast, thus making it an oil-tight, waterproof and dustproof construction (complies with IP67).
In addition to the standard models, microload models are also available.
A wide range of actuators with a range of functions are available; rotating lever, plunger, flexible rod etc.
The rubber material in the standard models is designed to be resistant to water and most oils.
Roller Lever Models: Short, Medium, and Long Lever Models
Type
Total travel (TT)
Features
Actuator (See note 2.)
WL-1A100 Roller
Lever: Short
lever (R38)
WL-1A300 Roller
Lever: Long
lever (R63)
One-side operation is possi- WLCA2
ble. (See note 3.)
Head can be mounted in any
of the four directions.
WLCA2-7
WLCA2-8
General
One-side operation is impos- WLH2
sible. (See note 3.)
Head can be mounted in any
of the four directions.
---
---
High-sensitivity
One-side operation is possi- WLG2
ble. (See note 3.)
Head can be mounted in any
of the four directions.
---
---
Side-installation
One-side operation is possi- WLCA2-2N
ble. (See note 3.)
Head can be mounted in any
of the two directions. (When
the Head can be mounted
horizontally, the Head can be
mounted in any of the four directions.)
---
---
One-side operation is possi- WLGCA2
ble. (See note 3.)
Head can be mounted in any
of the four directions.
---
---
Standard
Overtravel
WL-1A200 Roller
Lever: Medium
lever (R50)
High-precision
Note: 1. For the approved standards file numbers, refer to page 69.
2. For external dimensions and other information, refer to pages 77 to 94.
3. One-side operation means that three operational directions can be selected electrically, according to the change in direction of the operating plunger. Those models for which one-side operation is impossible can only operate on both sides. For details, see page 94.
F-62
Two-circuit Limit Switch WL
Adjustable Roller Levers and Adjustable Rod Levers
Total Travel (TT)
Features
Actuator (See note 2.)
WL-2A100
Adjustable
Roller Lever
Standard
One-side operation possible. (See note 3.)
WLCA12
Head can be mounted in any of the four directions.
---
--Overtrav- General
el
WL-4A100
Adjustable Rod
Lever (Adjustable
length: 25 to
140 mm)
WL-3A100
(Adjustable length:
350 to 380 mm)
WLCL (WL-4A100)
One-side operation possible. (See note 3.)
WLH12
Head can be mounted in any of the four directions.
WLHL (WL-4A100)
High-sensitivity
One-side operation possible. (See note 3.)
WLG12
Head can be mounted in any of the four directions.
WLGL (WL-4A100)
Side-installation
WLCA12-2N
One-side operation is possible. (See note 3.)
Head can be mounted in any of the two directions.
(When the Head can be mounted horizontally, the
Head can be mounted in any of the four directions.)
WLCL-2N (WL-4A100)
p
WLHAL4 (WL-3A100)
Note: 1. For the approved standards file numbers, refer to page 69.
2. For external dimensions and other information, refer to pages 77 to 94.
3. One-side operation means that three operational directions can be selected electrically, according to the change in direction of the operating plunger. The operating plunger is set for operation on both sides before delivery. Those models for which one-side operation is impossible can only operate on both sides. For details, see page 94. The operational plunger is factory-set to both sides.
Rod Spring Levers and Fork Lever Locks
Type
Total travel (TT)
Features
Actuator (See note 2.)
WL-3A200 Rod
Spring Lever
Protective
Head can be mounted in any of the four directions. ---
Fork Lever Locks:
WL-5A100,
WL-5A102,
WL-5A104
WLCA32-41
(WL-5A100)
WLCA32-42
(WL-5A102)
WLCA32-43
(WL-5A104)
Overtrav- General
el
One-side operation is possible. (See note 3.)
WLHAL5
Head can be mounted in any of the four directions.
---
Note: 1. For the approved standard file numbers, refer to page 69.
2. For external dimensions and other information, refer to pages 77 to 94.
3. One-side operation means that three operational directions can be selected electrically, according to the change in direction of the operating plunger. The operating plunger is set for operation on both sides before delivery. Those models for which one-side operation is impossible can only operate on both sides. For details, see page 94. The operational plunger is factory-set to both sides.
4. The fork lever lock is configured so that the dog pushes the lever to reverse the output and this reversed state is maintained even after
the dog continues on. If the dog then pushes the lever from the opposite direction, the lever will return to its original position.
Two-circuit Limit Switch
WL
F-63
Limit
Switches
Type
Standard Plungers
Type
Top
Standard Flexible Rods
Actuators
Actuators
Model
Top Plunger
WLD
Top-roller Plunger
WLD2
Coil spring
WLD28 (See note.)
Horizontal
Top-ball Plunger
WLD3
Horizontal Plunger
WLSD
Horizontal-roller
Plunger
WLSD2
Horizontal-ball Plunger
WLSD3
Steel wire
Model
Spring dia. 6.5
WLNJ
Spring dia. 4.8
WLNJ-30
Resin rod dia. 8.0
WLNJ-2
1.0-dia. wire
WLNJ-S2
Microload Models
A series of microload models has also been developed for the configurations outlined on pages 62 to 64. The model numbers become
[email protected] For example, WLCA2 becomes WL01CA2.
Note: Sealed roller.
Lamp-equipped Models
Operating
characteristics
Neon lamp
LED
Rated voltage
Leakage current
125 VAC
Approx. 0.6 mA
250 VAC
Approx. 1.9 mA
10 to 115 VAC/VDC
Approx. 0.5 mA
Lamp-equipped Switch
Lamp-equipped cover only
[email protected] (See note 1.)
WL-LE
[email protected] (See note 1.)
WL-LD
Note: 1. In the model number, @ indicates the actuator number. For example, CA2, D, NJ, etc.
2. The default setting is “light-ON when not operating.” Turn the lamp holder by 180° to change the setting to “light-ON when operating.”
Ordering Information
When ordering general-purpose indicator-equipped models insert the specifications number at the end of the basic model number.
E.g.: When a neon lamp is installed in a General-purpose/Standard Roller Lever Switch (WLCA2).
WLCA2
↑
Standard
LE
↑
Lamp
specifications
When ordering indicator-equipped molded terminal models, insert the specifications number at the end of the standard model number.
E.g.: When a Neon Lamp (WL-LE) is installed in a general-purpose molded terminal model (WLCA2-139).
WLCA2-139
↑
LE
↑
2
↑
Standard
Lamp
Lamp
specifications wiring
2: NC connection: Light-ON when operating
3: NO connection: Light-ON when not operating
Note: The indicator cover cannot be replaced on the molded terminals. In all cases the indicator does not light when the load is ON.
F-64
Two-circuit Limit Switch WL
Sensor I/O Connector Models
A reduction in the amount of wiring and parts makes maintenance easy and reduced wiring mistakes, in addition it’s already compact size for fitting
into areas of limited space.
Ordering Information
Item
Actuators
Standard
Rotating lever
Load
Overtravel
High sensitivity
Yes
Yes
Yes
Plunger
Yes
---
---
Standard load (SPST-NO/SPST-NC)
Yes
Microload (SPST-NO/SPST-NC)
Yes
High-precision models [email protected]
Yes
Spatter-prevention models (See note 3.)
Yes
Lamp
Yes
Note: 1. Standard Models: For standard models only one-side operation at an angle of 45° is possible.
Overtravel Models: Only one-side operation at an angle of 80° is possible. One-side operation only is not possible.
High-precision Models: Only one-side operation at an angle of 45° is possible, and pretravel (PT) is 5°, as opposed to 15° for standard
models.
2. For information other than that listed at the above, contact your OMRON representative.
3. The spatter-prevention models are only available as pre-wired connectors.
Note: 1. In the model number, @ indicates the actuator number. For
example, Overtravel Model WLG2-LDK13.
2. The lamp is set to “light-ON when not operating” (NO connection).
Direct-wired Connectors
2-core (NO)
4-core
[email protected]
[email protected]
Double-seal
WL[email protected]
[email protected]
Limit
Switches
Type
Lamp-equipped
Pre-wired Connectors
Type
2-core (NO)
2-core (NC)
4-core
3-core (NO)
Lamp-equipped
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
Double-seal
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
Note: 1. In the model number, @ indicates the actuator number. For example, Overtravel Model WLG2-LD-M1J.
2. The lamp is set to “light-ON when not operating” (NO connection).
Two-circuit Limit Switch
WL
F-65
Environment-resistant Models
Airtight, Hermetic Seal, Low-temperature, Heat-resistive, Corrosion-proof, and Weatherresistant Models
Using the general-purpose model, six types of environment-resistant models can be created to meet a variety of difficult operating conditions. Select the model most appropriate to your operating environment.
Type
[email protected]
Airtight seal
[email protected]
Hermetic seal
(molded terminals
and anti-coolant
models)
Usage
Environment-resistant construction
Appropriate models
For use in locations
Uses the W-10FB3-55 Airtight Built-in Switch. (See note 2.) All models except the
subject to splashes of
low-temperature and
water and anti-coolant
heat-resistive models.
(See note 3.)
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
Generalpurpose
built-in
switch
Connection lead wires:
Standard 5-m VCT (vinyl cabtire cable) cable
attached. Finished diameter: 11.5 mm, 4core.
The case cover and
conduit opening are
molded from epoxy
resin. The cover cannot be removed.
Hermeticallysealed
built-in
switch
Connection lead wires:
Standard 5-m VCT cable, with high flexibility
and good anti-oil properties attached. Finished diameter:
11.5 mm, 4-core.
The case cover, cover
box and conduit opening are molded from
epoxy resin. The cover
cannot be removed
(141, 145).
The Head opening is
protected from cutting
powder. ([email protected])
[email protected]
The connector can be
removed, so it is possible to use flexible wires
in the cable.
[email protected]
Rubber parts are made
from fluorine rubber.
All models except the
low-temperature and
heat-resistive models.
(See note 4.)
All models except airtight, hermetic, heatresistive, corrosionproof, or lampequipped models.
[email protected]
Low-temperature
Can be used at a tem- Uses the general-purpose built-in switch.
perature of
Silicone rubber is used for rubber parts such as the O-ring,
–40°C (The operating gasket, etc.
temperature range is
–40°C to 40°C), but
cannot withstand icing.
[email protected]
Heat-resistive
Can be used in temperatures of 120°C
(The operating temperature range is 5°C to
120°C).
Uses a special built-in switch made from heat-resistant resin.
Silicone rubber is used for rubber parts such as the O-ring,
gasket etc.
All models except airtight, hermetic, lowtemperature, corrosion-proof, lampequipped, nylon roller
(WLCA2-26N), seal
roller models, and resin rod (WLNJ-2) models.
[email protected]
Corrosion-proof
For use in locations
subject to corrosive
gases and chemicals.
Diecast parts such as the switch box are made of corrosionproof aluminum.
Rubber sealing parts are made of fluorine rubber which aids
in resisting oil, chemicals and adverse weather conditions.
Exposed nuts and screws (except the actuator section) are
made of stainless steel.
Moving and rotary parts such as rollers are made of sintered stainless steel or stainless steel.
All models except overtravel model (-2N), fork
lever lock models
(WLCA32-41 to -43),
low-temperature, heatresistive, and lampequipped models.
[email protected]
Outdoor specifications
For use in parking lots Rubber parts are made from silicone rubber, which has a
and other such outdoor high-tolerance to deterioration over time, and changes in
locations.
temperature.
Rollers are made of stainless steel to improve corrosion resistance.
Exposed nuts and screws are made of stainless steel.
Only the general-purpose overtravel models
(WLH2/12), the overtravel high-sensitivity
models (WLG2/12)
and some standard
models (e.g., WLCA2)
can be used. Excluding
heat-resistive models.
Note: 1.
2.
3.
4.
F-66
Consult your OMRON representative for the microload [email protected] models.
Use the SC Connector for the conduit opening.
The actuator can be created using the standard model.
The actuator can be created using the standard model. For [email protected] and -145, only WLG2, WLCA2, WLGCA2, and WLH2 can be used.
Two-circuit Limit Switch WL
Ordering Information
Use the following as a guide when ordering environment-resistant
models.
WLCA2 ↑
Standard
E.g.: For a hermetic model of WLCA2
55
↑
Specifications No.
An additional catalog is available for outdoor specifications models.
Spatter-prevention Models
These models are most effective in an arc welding line or places where cutting powder is spattered.
Standard Models
Total travel (TT)
Standard
One-side operation
is possible
Overtravel General
One-side operation
is impossible
High-sensitivity
High-precision
One-side operation
is possible
Actuators
Neon lamp
LED
125 VAC
250 VAC
Approx. 0.6 mA
Approx. 1.9 mA
10 to 115 VAC/DC
Approx. 0.5 mA
Double nut lever
WLCA2-LEAS
WLCA2-LDAS
Allen-head lever
WLCA2-LES
WLCA2-LDS
Double nut lever
WLH2-LEAS
WLH2-LDAS
Allen-head lever
WLH2-LES
WLH2-LDS
Double nut lever
WLG2-LEAS
WLG2-LDAS
Allen-head lever
WLG2-LES
WLG2-LDS
Double nut lever
WLGCA2-LEAS
WLGCA2-LDAS
Allen-head lever
WLGCA2-LES
WLGCA2-LDS
Limit
Switches
Type
Note: Consult your OMRON representative for the microload [email protected] models.
Levers/Lamp-equipped Covers
Type
Model
Without lever
Complete Head
(lever with Head)
Add an “R” to the product WL-1H1100S
number to order.
(in case of [email protected],
E.g.: [email protected]
[email protected])
WL-2H1100S
(in case of [email protected],
[email protected])
Double nut lever
Allen-head lever
Lamp-equipped
cover
WL-1A105S
WL-1A103S
WL-LES
(forward and backward le- (forward and backward le- (Neon Lamp)
ver)
ver)
WL-LDS
(LED)
Switches Without Lever
WLRCA2-LES, WLRCA2-LDS
WLRH2-LES, WLRH2-LDS, WLRG2-LES
WLRG2-LDS
WLRGCA2-LES, WLRGCA2-LDS
Two-circuit Limit Switch
WL
F-67
Head Models
Actuators
Set model
WLCA2
Roller lever
Adjustable roller lever
Adjustable rod lever
Top plunger
Head model
WL-1H1100
Head model without lever
WLRCA2
WLGCA2
WL-1H1100-1 (See note.)
WLRGCA2
WLG2
WL-2H1100
WLRG2
WLH2
WL-2H1100-1 (See note.)
WLRH2
WLCA2-2N
WL-6H1100
WLRCA2-2N
WLCA12
WL-1H2100
WLRCA2
WLG12
WL-2H2100
WLRG2
WLH12
WL-2H2100-1 (See note.)
WLRH2
WLCA12-2N
WL-6H2100
WLRCA2-2N
WLCL
WL-4H4100
WLRCL
WLGL
WL-2H4100
WLRG2
WLCL-2N
WL-6H4100
WLRCA2-2N
WLD
WL-7H100
---
WLD2
WL-7H200
WLD3
WL-7H300
WLD28
WL-7H400
WLSD
WL-8H100
WLSD2
WL-8H200
WLSD3
WL-8H300
Fork lever lock
WLCA32-41
WL-5H5100
WLRCA32
Coil spring
WLNJ
WL-9H100
---
WLNJ-30
WL-9H200
Horizontal plunger
WLNJ-2
WL-9H300
WLNJ-S2
WL-9H400
---
Note: For the model number of Heads without lever, simply remove the numbers after [email protected] For example, WL-1H1100 becomes WL-1H. WLH2
and WLH12 however, become WL-2H-1, and WLGCA2 becomes WL-1H-1. Other Head models are available, but must be ordered separately.
F-68
Two-circuit Limit Switch WL
Specifications
■ Approved Standards
Agency
Standard
UL
File No.
UL508
E76675
CSA
CSA C22.2 No. 14
LR45746
TÜV Rheinland
EN60947-5-1
R9551016
Note: Contact your OMRON representative for more information on approved models.
■ Approved Standard Ratings
General-purpose Models
UL/CSA
Standard Models: A600
Carry current
Current
Make
120 VAC
10 A
Volt-amperes
Break
60 A
6A
240 VAC
30 A
3A
480 VAC
15 A
1.5 A
600 VAC
12 A
1.2 A
Make
Break
7,200 VA
720 VA
Limit
Switches
Rated voltage
Microload Models:
0.1 A at 125 VAC, 0.1 A at 30 VDC
TÜV (EN60947-5-1)
Note: As an example, AC-15 2 A/250 V means the following:
(Only Ground Terminal Models are Approved)
Application category
AC-15
Rated operating current (Ie)
2A
Rated operating voltage (Ue)
250 V
Model
Category/rating
Thermal
current
Indicator
[email protected]@
AC-15 2 A/250 V
DC12 2 A/48 V
10 A
---
[email protected]
AC-14 0.1 A/125 V
DC12 0.1 A/48 V
0.5 A
---
[email protected]
AC-15 2 A/250 V
10 A
Neon lamp
[email protected]
AC-14 0.1 A/125 V
0.5 A
Neon lamp
[email protected]
AC-15 2 A/115 V
DC12 2 A/48 V
10 A
LED
[email protected]
AC-14 0.1 A/115 V
DC12 0.1 A/48 V
0.5 A
LED
Spatter-prevention Models
UL/CSA
LE (Neon Lamp) A300
Rated
voltage
Carry
current
120 VAC
10 A
240 VAC
Current
Make
Break
60 A
6A
30 A
3A
Volt-amperes
Make
7,200 VA
Break
720 VA
LD (LED)
Rated voltage
Carry current
115 VAC
10 A
115 VDC
0.8 A
Two-circuit Limit Switch
WL
F-69
■ Ratings
General-purpose Models/Environment-resistant Models
Standard Load Models
Type
Rated
voltage
Non-inductive load
Resistive load
NC
Standard,
overtravel
(except high-sensitivity models), and
high-precision
models.
Overtravel
(high-sensitivity
models)
Note: 1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Inductive load
Lamp load
NO
NC
Inductive load
NO
NC
Motor load
NO
NC
NO
125 VAC
10 A
3A
1.5 A
10 A
5A
2.5 A
250 VAC
10 A
2A
1A
10 A
3A
1.5 A
500 VAC
10 A
1.5 A
0.8 A
3A
1.5 A
0.8 A
8 VDC
10 A
6A
3A
10 A
6A
14 VDC
10 A
6A
3A
10 A
6A
30 VDC
6A
4A
3A
6A
4A
125 VDC
0.8 A
0.2 A
0.2 A
0.8 A
0.2 A
250 VDC
0.4 A
0.1 A
0.1 A
0.4 A
0.1 A
125 VAC
5A
---
---
---
250 VAC
5A
---
---
---
125 VDC
0.4 A
250 VDC
0.2 A
The above figures are for standard currents.
Inductive loads have a power factor of 0.4 min. (AC) and a time constant of 7 ms max. (DC).
Lamp load has an inrush current of 10 times the steady-state current.
Motor load has an inrush current of 6 times the steady-state current.
For PC loads, use the microload models.
Inrush current
NC
30 A max. (15 A max. (See note.))
NO
20 A max. (10 A max. (See note.))
Note: Only for high-sensitivity overtravel models.
Microload Models
Lamp-equipped Models
Rated voltage
Resistive load
125 VAC
0.1 A
30 VDC
Operation within the three zones illustrated in the following diagram
will produce optimum performance.
Voltage (VDC)
Recommended Load Range: 5 to 30 VDC, 0.5 to 100 mA
5 mW
0.8 W
Current (mA)
F-70
Two-circuit Limit Switch WL
Neon lamp (WL-LE)
125 VAC
250 VAC
Approx. 0.6 mA
Approx. 1.9 mA
WLD28-LES
LED (WL-LD)
10 to 115 VAC/DC
Approx. 0.5 mA
WLD28-LDS
Sensor I/O Connector Models
Type
Rated
voltage
Non-inductive load
Resistive load
NC
For DC
For AC
Note: 1.
2.
3.
4.
Inductive load
Lamp load
NO
NC
Inductive load
NO
NC
Motor load
NO
NC
NO
12 VDC
1A
1A
1A
1A
1A
1A
1A
1A
24 VDC
1A
1A
1A
1A
1A
1A
1A
1A
48 VDC
1A
1A
1A
1A
1A
1A
1A
1A
115 VDC
0.8 A
0.8 A
0.2 A
0.2 A
0.8 A
0.8 A
0.2 A
0.2 A
115 VAC
1A
1A
1A
1A
1A
1A
1A
1A
The above figures are for standard currents.
Inductive loads have a power factor of 0.4 min. (AC) and a time constant of 7 ms max. (DC).
Lamp load has an inrush current of 10 times the steady-state current.
Motor load has an inrush current of 6 times the steady-state current.
Spatter-prevention Models
Rated
current
Non-inductive load
Resistive load
NC
[email protected]
125 VAC
[email protected]
Note: 1.
2.
3.
4.
NO
10 A
Inductive load
Lamp load
NC
3A
Inductive load
NO
1.5 A
NC
10 A
Motor load
NO
NC
5A
NO
2.5 A
250 VAC
10 A
2A
1A
10 A
3A
1.5 A
125 VDC
0.8 A
0.2 A
0.2 A
0.8 A
0.2 A
0.2 A
250 VDC
0.4 A
0.1 A
0.1 A
0.4 A
0.1 A
0.1 A
115 VAC
10 A
3A
1.5 A
10 A
5A
2.5 A
12 VDC
10 A
6A
3A
10 A
6A
24 VDC
6A
4A
3A
6A
4A
48 VDC
3A
2A
1.5 A
3A
2A
Limit
Switches
Model
The above figures are for standard currents.
Inductive loads have a power factor of 0.4 min. (AC) and a time constant of 7 ms max. (DC).
Lamp load has an inrush current of 10 times the steady-state current.
Motor load has an inrush current of 6 times the steady-state current.
Inrush current
NC
30 A max.
NO
20 A max.
Operating temperature
–10°C to 80°C (with no icing)
Operating humidity
95% max.
Two-circuit Limit Switch
WL
F-71
■ Characteristics
General-purpose Models/Environment-resistant Models
Degree of protection
IP67
Durability (See note 3.)
Mechanical: 15,000,000 operations min. (See note 4.)
Electrical: 750,000 operations min. (See note 5.)
Operating speed
1 mm to 1 m/s (for WLCA2)
Operating frequency
Mechanical: 120 operations/minute min.
Electrical: 30 operations/minute min.
Rated frequency
50/60 Hz
Insulation resistance
100 MΩ min. (at 500 VDC)
Contact resistance
25 mΩ max. (initial value)
Dielectric strength
1,000 VAC (600 VAC), 50/60 Hz for 1 min between non-continuous terminals.
2,200 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 min/Uimp 2.5 kV non-current-carrying metal part and ground.
2,200 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 min Uimp 2.5 kV between each terminal and non-current-carrying metal
part.
Rated insulation voltage (Ui)
250 V (EN60947-5-1)
Switching overvoltage
1,000 V max. (EN60947-5-1)
Pollution degree (operating environment)
3 (EN60947-5-1)
Short-circuit protective device (SCPD)
10 A, fuse type gG or gI (IEC269)
Conditional short-circuit current
100 A (EN60947-5-1)
Conventional enclosed thermal current
(Ithe)
10 A, 0.5 A (EN60947-5-1)
Protection against electric shock
Class I
Vibration resistance
10 to 55 Hz, 1.5-mm double amplitude (See note 6.)
Shock resistance
Destruction: 1,000 m/s2 min.
Malfunction: 300 m/s2 min. (See note 6.)
Ambient temperature
Operating: –10°C to 80°C (with no icing) (See note 7.)
Ambient humidity
Operating: 95% max.
Weight
Approx. 275 g (in the case of WLCA2)
Note: 1. The above figures are initial values.
2. The figures in parentheses for dielectric strength, are those for the overtravel (high-sensitivity) model.
3. The values are calculated at an operating temperature of 5°C to 35°C, and an operating humidity of 40% to 70%. Contact your OMRON
sales representative for more detailed information on other operating environments.
4. 10,000,000 operations min. for general-purpose, high-sensitivity, and flexible rod overtravel models.
5. 500,000 operations min. for high-precision and outdoor specifications models. All microload models however, are 1,000,000 operations
min.
6. Except the flexible rod models. The shock resistance (malfunction) for microload models is 200 m/s2 min.
7. For low temperature models this is –40°C to 40°C (no icing). For heat-resistive models the range is +5°C to 120°C.
F-72
Two-circuit Limit Switch WL
■ Contact Form
General-purpose Models
Environment-resistant Models
Standard ([email protected])/Microload ([email protected]) Models
(White)
(Blue)
(Black)
(Red)
Spatter-prevention Models
Limit
Switches
Standard Model
Lamp-equipped Models
Light-ON when operating
(See note 1.)
WL-LE
WL-LD
Power supply
Built-in switch
Load
Internal circuit
Light-ON when not operating
(See note 2.)
WL-LE
WL-LD
Power supply
Internal circuit
Load
Built-in switch
Note: 1. Light-ON when operating means that the lamp lights when the Limit Switch contacts (NC) release, or when the actuator rotates or is
pushed down.
2. Light-ON when not operating means the lamp remains lit when the actuator is free, or when the Limit Switch contacts (NO) close when
the actuator rotates or is pushed down.
Two-circuit Limit Switch
WL
F-73
Internal circuit of Lamp-equipped Models
WL-LE
WL-LD
Neon lamp
Contact
spring
Resistance
Rectifier stack
Contact
spring
Rated current
diode
Zener
diode
Light-emitting
diode (LED)
Resistance
■ Wiring Specifications of Sensor I/O Connector Models
Direct-wired Connector
2-core
4-core
K13 (DC)
K13A (AC)
K43 (DC)
K43A (AC)
Pre-wired Connector
2-core
M1J (DC)
M1GJ (DC)
M1JB (DC)
4-core
3-core
DGJ03 (DC)
AGJ03 (AC)
DK1EJ03 (DC)
Built-in Connec- Built-in Connec- Built-in Connec- Built-in Connec- Built-in Connec- Built-in Connec- Built-in Connecswitch
tor
switch
tor
switch
tor
switch
tor
switch
tor
switch
tor
switch
tor
1 (NC)
---
1 (NC)
1
1 (NC)
---
1 (NC)
---
1 (NC)
3
1 (NC)
1
1 (NC)
---
2 (NC)
---
2 (NC)
2
2 (NC)
---
2 (NC)
---
2 (NC)
2
2 (NC)
2
2 (NC)
2
3 (NO)
3
3 (NO)
3
3 (NO)
3
3 (NO)
1
3 (NO)
---
3 (NO)
3
3 (NO)
3
4 (NO)
4
4 (NO)
4
4 (NO)
4
4 (NO)
4
4 (NO)
---
4 (NO)
4
4 (NO)
4
Engineering Data
General-purpose Models/Spatter-prevention Models/Environment-resistant Models
Electrical Durability
Durability (x 104 operations)
Operating temperature: 5°C to 30°C
Operating humidity: 40% to 70%.
Operating frequency: 30 operations/min
cosφ = 1
125 VAC
250 VAC
480 VAC
Switching current (mA)
F-74
Two-circuit Limit Switch WL
Nomenclature
■ General-purpose Models
Set Position Marker Plate
After operation, set the indicator needle on the
marker plate so that is in the convex section of the
bearing. For the WLD2, insert the needle so that is
is between the two main wires on the plunger.
Roller
The roller is made of self-lubricating sintered stainless steel and boasts high resistance to wear.
Head-mounting
Screws
Lever
The lever forged of anti-corrosive aluminium alloy
features high corrosion resistances and outstanding ruggedness. With roller lever, adjustable rod
and flexible rod models, the actuator position can
be set anywhere within 360°. (The lever cannot be
mounted in the opposite direction.)
Requires maintenance (excessive overtravel)
Proper range
Requires maintenance
(insufficient overtravel)
Proper range
Requires maintenance
(excessive overtravel)
Roller Lever Setscrew
Operational Plunger (See note 2.)
Head
The Head used in the roller lever type, adjustable
rod lever type, or horizontal plunger type (except
the -2N Series) can be mounted in any of the four
directions by removing the screws at the four corners of the Head.
Cover Seal
By using an O-ring as the cover seal, an optimum
squeeze can be obtained and high sealing properties are assured as well.
Terminal Screws
M4 screws
Shaft Section Seal
By fitting an O-ring to the rotary shaft and with an
appropriate interference of the screws, high-sealing properties are maintained.
Cover
Built-in Switch
The built-in switch (for all models except the microload models) has an extended mechanical life of 15
million operations or more.
Conduit Opening (See note 1.)
The conduit threads are parallel threads for G 1/2
tube and offer further increased sealing properties
when used in conjunction with the SC connector.
Limit
Switches
Insulator
The insulator has outstanding insulation properties and prevents the generation of any gases
which may corrode the internal parts.
Bearing
The bearing smooths the plunger movement.
Cover Setscrew
A Phillips screw is used to ensure ease of use.
Note: 1. The display for conduit threads has changed from PF1/2 to G1/2, according to revisions of JIS B 0202. This is only a change in the display,
so the thread size and pitch have not changed. (Conduit threads Pg 13.5 and 1/2-14NPT are also available.)
2. By changing the orientation of the operational plunger, three operational directions can be selected electrically. (This is only possible with
general-purpose roller lever, adjustable roller lever, and adjustable rod lever models. For the overtravel models, only -2N Series models
have this function.)
Lamp-equipped Models
Light-ON when Operating
The operating status of the Switch can be checked using a neon
lamp of LED indictor.
LED at top
Circuit checks and troubleshooting errors are easy done.
Light-emitting diode (LED)
Lamp holder
Indictor window
Contact spring
Light-ON when Not Operating
The built-in switch’s terminal screws are used to connect the lamp
terminal (indicator cover). Since the connection spring (coil spring) is
used for this connection, it will not be necessary to connect to the
lamp terminal. When a ground terminal is provided however, lead
wire method must be used.
LED at bottom
WL-LD has a built-in rectifier stack, so it will not be necessary to
change the polarity.
The indicator cover is molded from diecast aluminum and has outstanding sealing properties. Furthermore, regardless of whether the
power is connected or not, the operating status is shown (operating
or not operating), and indicators can be switched from light-ON when
operating and light-ON when not operating, by simply rotating the
lamp holder by 180°. (Molded terminals do not have this switching
capacity.)
The lamp-equipped models are ideal in locations using a conveyor
belt where items need to be checked, or locations that are difficult to
inspect for faults.
Two-circuit Limit Switch
WL
F-75
■ Environment-resistant Models
Airtight Built-in Switch
Hermetic Seal Model
Sealed by the rubber boot
of the plunger
The lead wires are sealed to the Limit Switch with
resin, providing a hermetically sealed construction.
Filled with epoxy resin
Sealed by the resin molded
into the case cover
Leads for molding
Four, M4 ±terminal screws
Exclusive connector
■ Spatter-prevention Models
Double Nut Lever
Roller, Roller Axis
Using stainless steel prevents
spatter from adhering.
SUS304 is used for double nut.
Screws
SUS304 is used, preventing spatter
from adhering.
Operating Lever
Melamine sinter-painted, it is easy to
peel off the spatter.
Lamp Cover
Heat-resistant resin is used for the
lamp cover.
By using spherical surface for the
display part, it disperses the direction of spatter.
F-76
Two-circuit Limit Switch WL
Head Cap
Using Teflon prevents spatter from adhering.
Note: Spatter means the Zn powder produced when welding.
Adhering spatter to the Limit Switch
may cause malfunction of lever or
lamp cover.
The lack of gap prevents spatter powder from clogging.
Dimensions
■ General-purpose Models
Standard Models
Note: 1. Rotating Lever Models: For all models [email protected] indicates a standard model and [email protected] indicates a microload model.
2. Unless otherwise indicated, a tolerance of ±0.4 mm applies to all dimensions.
Roller Lever
Roller Lever
WLCA2
WL01CA2
WLCA2-7
WL01CA2-7
60 max.
67.2 max.
17.5 dia. × 15 (see note)
17.5 dia. × 7 (see note)
50R
Four, M3.5
M5 (length: 12)
Allen-head bolt
Four, M3.5
M5 (length: 12)
Allen-head bolt
Four, 5.2+0.2
o dia.
holes
Four, 5.2+0.2
o dia.
holes
Three, M4
(length: 13)
Three, M4
(lengh:13)
Four, M6
Depth: 15 min.
JIS B0202 G1/2
Effective thread:
4 threads min.
JIS B0202 G1/2
Effective thread:
4 threads min.
42 max.
Note: Stainless sintered roller
Limit
Switches
38R
Four, M6
Depth: 15 min.
42 max.
Note: Stainless steel roller
Roller Lever
Adjustable Roller Lever
WLCA2-8
WL01CA2-8
WLCA12
WL01CA12
60 max.
67 max.
17.5 dia. × 7 (see note)
63R
17.5 dia. × 7 (see note)
Four, M3.5
Adjustable range:
25 to 89
Four, M3.5
M5 (length:
16) Allenhead bolt
Four, 5.2+0.2
o
dia. holes
Four, 5.2+0.2
o dia.
holes
M5 (length: 12)
Allen-head bolt
Three, M4
(length: 13)
Three, M4
(length: 13)
JIS B0202 G1/2
Effective thread:
4 threads min.
Four, M6
Depth: 15 min.
JIS B0202 G1/2
Effective thread:
4 threads min.
Four, M6
Depth: 15 min.
42 max.
42 max.
Note: Stainless sintered roller
Note: Stainless sintered roller
Operating characteristics
WLCA2
WL01CA2
WLCA2-7
WL01CA2-7
WLCA2-8
WL01CA2-8
WLCA12
WL01CA12
(See note.)
Operating force: OF max.
13.34 N
10.2 N
8.04 N
Release force: RF min.
2.23 N
1.67 N
1.34 N
13.34 N
2.23 N
Pretravel: PT
15±5°
15±5°
15±5°
15±5°
Overtravel: OT min.
30°
30°
30°
30°
Movement differential: MD max.
12°
12°
12°
12°
Note: The operating characteristics for WLCA12 and WL01CA12 are measured at the lever length of 38 mm.
Two-circuit Limit Switch
WL
F-77
OF and RF for WLCA12, with a lever length of 89 mm.
Operating characteristics
WLCA12, WL01CA12
OF
5.68 N
RF
0.95 N
Rotating Lever Models: For all models WL indicates a standard model and [email protected] indicates a microload model.
Adjustable Rod Lever
Fork Lever Lock
WLCL
WL01CL
WLCA32-41 to 44
WL01CA32-41 to 44
(For details see pages 40 and 42.)
55 max.
Adjustable range:
25 to 140
62.5 max.
Two, 17.5 dia.
(length: 7)
(see note)
3±0.2 dia. (length:
160) (see note)
M8×12
Four, M3.5 Allen-head
set screw
M5 × 12
Allen-head bolt
Four,
5.2+0.2
0 dia. holes
Four, M3.5
M5 × 16
Allen-head
bolt
Four,
5.2+0.2
0 dia. holes
Three, M4
(length: 13)
Three, M4
(length: 13)
JIS B0202 G1/2
Effective thread:
4 threads min.
JIS B0202 G1/2
Effective thread:
4 threads min.
Four, M6
Depth: 15 min.
42 max.
Note: Stainless steel rod
42 max.
Note: Plastic roller. This illustration shows the external dimensions of the WLCA32-41. (Models WLCA32-041 to -044
and WL01CA32-041 to -044 have stainless steel rollers.)
WLCA32-41
Note: Unless otherwise indicated, a tolerance of ±0.4 mm applies to
all dimensions.
Operating characteristics
WLCL, WL01CL
Operating force: OF max.
1.39 N
Release force: RF min.
0.27 N
Pretravel: PT
15±5°
Overtravel: OT min.
30°
Movement differential: MD max.
12°
WLCA32-42
WLCA32-43
Two-circuit Limit Switch WL
WLCA32-44
Note: The operating characteristics for WLCA12 and WL01CA12 are
measured at the lever length of 140 mm.
Operating characteristics
Force necessary to reverse the
direction of the lever: Max.
WLCA32-41 to 44,
WL01CA32-41 to 44
11.77 N
Movement until the lever reverses 50±5°
Movement until switch operation: 55°
Max.
Movement after switch operation: 35°
Min.
F-78
Four, M6
Depth: 15 min.
Note: 1. Plunger Models: For all models [email protected] indicates a standard model and [email protected] indicates a microload model.
2. Unless otherwise indicated, a tolerance of ±0.4 mm applies to all dimensions.
Top Plunger
Top-roller Plunger
WLD
WL01D
WLD2
WL01D2
9 dia.
1R (see note)
17 dia. (length: 5) (see note)
Four, M3.5
OP
Four, M3.5
OP
Four,
5.2+0.2
0 dia. holes
Four,
5.2+0.2
0 dia. holes
Three, M4
(length: 13)
JIS B0202 G1/2
Effective thread:
4 threads min.
Three, M4
(length: 13)
Four, M6
Depth: 15 min.
JIS B0202 G1/2
Effective thread:
4 threads min.
42 max.
Four, M6
Depth: 15 min.
42 max.
Note: Stainless sintered roller
Top-ball Plunger
Sealed Top-roller Plunger
WLD3
WL01D3
WLD28
WL01D28
15.5 dia.
1/2 dia. (see note)
OP
11.2 dia. (length: 5) (see note)
Four, M3.5
OP
Four, M3.5
Four,
5.2+0.2
0 dia. holes
Four,
5.2+0.2
0 dia. holes
Three, M4
(length: 13)
Three, M4
(length: 13)
JIS B0202 G1/2
Effective thread:
4 threads min.
JIS B0202 G1/2
Effective thread:
4 threads min.
Four, M6
Depth: 15 min.
Four, M6
Depth: 15 min.
42 max.
42 max.
Note: Stainless steel ball
Limit
Switches
Note: Stainless steel plunger
Note: Stainless steel roller
Two-circuit Limit Switch
WL
F-79
Note: Unless otherwise indicated, a tolerance of ±0.4 mm applies to all dimensions.
Horizontal Plunger
Horizontal-roller Plunger
WLSD
WL01SD
WLSD2
WL01SD2
Four, M3.5
17 dia.
(length: 5)
(see note 1)
Four, M3.5
1R (see note 1)
25 dia. (see
Four,
note 2.)
dia.
holes
5.2+0.2
0
Four,
25 dia.
5.2+0.2
0
(see
dia. holes
note 2.)
Three, M4
(length: 13)
Three, M4
(length: 13)
JIS B0202 G1/2
Effective thread:
4 threads min.
JIS B0202 G1/2
Effective thread:
4 threads min.
Four, M6
Depth: 15 min.
42 max.
Four, M6
Depth: 15 min.
42 max.
Note: 1. Stainless steel plunger
2. Cosmetic nuts.
Note: 1. Stainless sintered roller
2. Cosmetic nuts
3. The WLSD21 model, which has the roller rotated by 90°
is also available.
Horizontal-ball Plunger
WLSD3
WL01SD3
OP
Four, M3.5
1/2 dia.
(see note)
25 dia.
Four,
(see
5.2+0.2
0
dia. holes note 2)
Three, M4
(length: 13)
JIS B0202 G1/2
Effective thread:
4 threads min.
Four, M6
Depth: 15 min.
42 max.
Note: 1. Stainless steel ball
2. Cosmetic nuts
Operating characteristics
WLD
WL01D
WLD2
WL01D2
WLD3
WL01D3
WLD28
WL01D28
WLSD
WL01SD
WLSD2
WL01SD2
WLSD3
WL01SD3
Operating force: OF max.
26.67 N
26.67 N
26.67 N
16.67 N
40.03 N
40.03 N
40.03 N
Release force: RF min.
8.92 N
8.92 N
8.92 N
4.41 N
8.89 N
8.89 N
8.89 N
Pretravel: PT max.
1.7 mm
1.7 mm
1.7 mm
1.7 mm
2.8 mm
2.8 mm
2.8 mm
Overtravel: OT min.
6.4 mm
5.6 mm
4 mm
5.6 mm
6.4 mm
5.6 mm
4 mm
Movement differential: MD 1 mm
max.
1 mm
1 mm
1 mm
1 mm
1 mm
1 mm
Operating position: OP
34±0.8 mm
44±0.8 mm
44.5±0.8 mm
44±0.8 mm
40.6±0.8 mm
54.2±0.8 mm
54.1±0.8 mm
Total travel position: TTP
max.
29.5 mm
39.5 mm
41 mm
39.5 mm
---
---
---
F-80
Two-circuit Limit Switch WL
Note: 1. Flexible Rod Models: For all models [email protected] indicates a standard model and [email protected] indicates a microload model.
2. Unless otherwise indicated, a tolerance of ±0.4 mm applies to all dimensions.
Coil Spring
Coil Spring (Multi-wire)
6.5 dia.
(See note 1.)
(See note 2.)
WLNJ-30
WL01NJ-30
(See note 3.)
4.8 dia.
(See note 1.)
(See note 2.)
(See note 3.)
Four,
5.2+0.2
0
dia. holes
Three, M4
(length: 13)
Four,
5.2+0.2
0 dia. holes
Three, M4
(length: 13)
Four, M6
Depth: 15 min.
JIS B0202 G1/2
Effective thread:
4 threads min.
Four, M6
Depth: 15 min.
JIS B0202 G1/2
Effective thread:
4 threads min.
42 max.
42 max.
Note: 1. The coil spring may be operated from any direction except the axial direction (↓).
2. Stainless steel coil spring
3. Optimum operating range of the coil spring is
within 1/3 of the entire length from the top end.
Note: 1. The coil spring may be operated from any
direction except the axial direction (↓).
2. Piano wire coil
3. Optimum operating range of the coil spring is
within 1/3 of the entire length from the top end.
Coil Spring (Resin Rod)
Steel Wire
WLNJ-2
WL01NJ-2
WLNJ-S2
WL01NJ-S2
8 dia.
(See note 1.)
Limit
Switches
WLNJ
WL01NJ
1 dia.
(See note 1.)
(See note 2.)
(See note 2.)
(See note 3.)
(See note 3.)
M3 (length: 3) Allenhead set screw
26 dia.
Four,
5.2+0.2
0 dia. holes
Four,
5.2+0.2
0 dia. holes
Three, M4
(length: 13)
Three, M4
(length: 13)
Four, M6
Depth: 15 min.
JIS B0202 G1/2
Effective thread:
4 threads min.
Four, M6
Depth: 15 min.
JIS B0202 G1/2
Effective thread:
4 threads min.
42 max.
42 max.
Note: 1. The coil spring may be operated from any direction
except the axial direction (↓).
2. Polyamide resin rod
3. Optimum operating range of the rod is within 1/3 of
the entire length from the top end.
Operating characteristics
Note: 1. The coil spring may be operated from any direction
except the axial direction (↓).
2. Stainless steel wire
3. Optimum operating range of the wire is within 1/3 of
the entire length from the top end.
WLNJ30
WL01NJ30
(See note.)
WLNJ
WL01NJ
(See note.)
WLNJ-2
WL01NJ-2
(See note.)
WLNJ-S2
WL01NJ-S2
(See note.)
Operating force: OF max.
1.47 N
1.47 N
1.47 N
0.28 N
Pretravel: PT
20±10 mm
20±10 mm
40±20 mm
40±20 mm
Note: These values are taken from the top end of the wire or spring.
Two-circuit Limit Switch
WL
F-81
Overtravel Models
Overtravel models are Limit Switches which are provided with a greater OT to facilitate dog setting.
The overtravel models are classified into three types; general-purpose, high-sensitivity, and models which are capable of one-side 90° operation,
the -2N Series.
The -2N Series can also be installed on either side.
Since this model is identical to the standard model in dimensions, both models are interchangeable.
Like the standard model, it is oil-tight, waterproof, and dustproof (complies with IP67).
General-purpose, high sensitivity models
Side-installation models
Head can be mounted in any of the four directions.
The lever operates on either side at 80°.
One-side operation is impossible.
The Head can be mounted in two directions, forward and backward.
The lever operates on either side at 90°.
One side operation is possible.
General-purpose/High Sensitivity Models
Note: 1. For all models [email protected] indicates a standard model and [email protected] indicates a microload model.
2. One-side operation is not possible with the general-purpose and high-sensitivity models.
3. Unless otherwise indicated, a tolerance of ±0.4 mm applies to all dimensions.
Roller Lever
WLH2
WL01H2
WLG2
WL01G2
Adjustable Rod Lever
60 max.
17.5 dia. (length: 7) (see note 1)
38R
WLHL
WL01HL
WLGL
WL01GL
Adjustable range:
25 to 140
Four, M3.5
Four,
5.2+0.2
0 dia. holes
Four,
5.2+0.2
0 dia. holes
Three, M4
(length: 13)
Three, M4
(length: 13)
Four, M6
Depth: 15 min.
JIS B0202 G1/2
Effective thread:
4 threads min.
42 max.
Note: 1. Stainless sintered roller
2. [email protected] is identical to other models except in
the shape of the set position marker plate.
3. The built-in switch for WLH2 is W-10FB3.
4. The built-in switch for WLG2 is W-10FB3-8.
Two-circuit Limit Switch WL
3±0.2 dia.
(length: 160)
(see note 1)
Allen-head
Four, M3.5 lock screw
M5 (length: 12)
Allen-head bolt
M5 (length: 12)
Allen-head bolt
F-82
55 max.
Four, M6
Depth: 15 min.
JIS B0202 G1/2
Effective thread:
4 threads min.
42 max.
Note: 1. [email protected] is identical to other models except in
the shape of the set position marker plate.
2. The built-in switch for WLHL is W-10FB3.
3. The built-in switch for WLGL is W-10FB3-8.
Adjustable Roller Lever
WLH12
WL01H12
WLG12
WL01G12
67 max.
17.5 dia. (length: 7)
Four, M3.5
Adjustable range:
25 to 89
M5 (length:
12) Allenhead bolt
Four,
5.2+0.2
0
dia. holes
Three, M4
(length: 13)
Four, M6
Depth: 15 min.
JIS B0202 G1/2
Effective thread:
4 threads min.
42 max.
Note: 1. Stainless sintered roller
2. [email protected] is identical to other models except in
the shape of the set position marker plate.
Operating characteristics
WLH2
WL01H2
WLG2
WL01G2
WLHL
WL01HL
(See note 2.)
WLGL
WL01GL
(See note 2.)
WLH12
WL01H12
(See note 1.)
WLG12
WL01G12
(See note 1.)
Operating force: OF max.
9.81 N
9.81 N
2.84 N
2.84 N
9.81 N
9.81 N
Release force: RF min.
0.98 N
0.25 N
15±5°
15±5°
0.25 N
10°+2
−1
0.98 N
Pretravel: PT
0.98 N
10°+2
−1
15±5°
0.98 N
10°+2
−1
Overtravel: OT min.
55°
65°
55°
65°
55°
65°
Movement differential: MD
max.
12°
7°
12°
7°
12°
7°
Note: 1. The operating characteristics of WLH12, WL01HL12, WLG12, and WL01G12 are measured at the lever length of 38 mm.
2. The operating characteristics of WLHL, WL01HL, WLGL, and WL01GL are measured at the rod length of 140 mm.
OF and RF for WLH12 and WL01H12, with a lever length of 89 mm.
Operating
characteristics
WLH12,
WL01H12
WLG12,
WL01G12
OF
4.18 N
4.18 N
RF
0.42 N
0.42 N
Two-circuit Limit Switch
WL
F-83
Limit
Switches
3. The built-in switch for WLH12 is W-10FB3.
4. The built-in switch for WLG12 is W-10FB3-8.
Note: 1. For all models [email protected] indicates a standard model and [email protected] indicates a microload model.
2. Unless otherwise indicated, a tolerance of ±0.4 mm applies to all dimensions.
Adjustable Rod Lever
Rod Spring Lever
WLHAL4
WL01HAL4
WLHAL5
WL01HAL5
3.2 dia. (see note)
2.3 dia. (see note)
Adjustable range:
350 to 380
M5 (length:
16) Allenhead bolt
M5 (length: 16)
Allen-head bolt
Four,
5.2+0.2
0 dia. holes
Four,
5.2+0.2
0 dia. holes
Three, M4
(length: 13)
Three, M4
(length: 13)
JIS B0202 G1/2
Effective thread:
4 threads min.
Four, M6
Depth: 15 min.
JIS B0202 G1/2
Effective thread:
4 threads min.
Four, M6
Depth: 15 min.
42 max.
Note: Stainless steel rod
Operating characteristics
Note: Piano wire
WLHAL4
WL01HAL4
(See note 2.)
42 max.
WLHAL5
WL01HAL5
Operating force: OF max.
0.98 N
0.90 N
Release force: RF min.
0.15 N
0.09 N
Pretravel: PT
15±5°
15±5°
Overtravel: OT min.
55°
55°
Movement differential: MD
max.
12°
12°
Note: 1. With WLHAL4, WL01HAL4, WLHAL5, and WL01HAL5, the
actuator’s tare is large, so depending on the installation direction, they may not be properly reset. Always install so
that the actuator is facing downwards.
2. The operating characteristics of WLHAL4, and WL01HAL4
are measured at the rod length of 380 mm.
Side-installation Models
90° operation on one side is possible by simply changing the direction of the cam.
Note: 1. For all models [email protected] indicates a standard model and [email protected] indicates a microload model.
2. With the side-installation models, 90° operation on one side is possible by simply changing the direction of the cam.
3. Unless otherwise indicated, a tolerance of ±0.4 mm applies to all dimensions.
60 max.
Roller Lever
WLCA2-2N
WL01CA2-2N
WLCA12-2N
WL01CA12-2N
17.5 dia. (length: 7) (see note)
17.5 dia. (length: 7) (see note)
Adjustable range:
25 to 89
Four, M3
38R
Two, M5
(length: 18)
M5 (length:
12) Allenhead bolt
Four, M3
Two, M5
(length: 18)
M5 (length:
16) Allenhead bolt
Four, 5.2+0.2
0
dia. holes
+0.2
Two, 5.2 0 dia.
Two, 5.2+0.2
0 dia.
Three, M4
(length: 13)
Three, M4
(length: 13)
JIS B0202 G1/2
Effective thread:
4 threads min.
Four, M6
Depth: 15 min.
Note: Stainless sintered roller
Note: Stainless sintered roller
42 max.
F-84
67 max.
Adjustable Roller Lever
Two-circuit Limit Switch WL
JIS B0202 G1/2
Effective thread:
4 threads min.
Four, M6
Depth: 15 min.
42 max.
Adjustable Rod Lever
WLCL-2N
WL01CL-2N
Adjustable range:
25 to 140
3 ±0.2 dia. (length:
160) (see note)
M8 (length: 12)
Allen-head
lock screw
55 max.
Four, M3
Two, M5
(length: 18)
M5 (length:
12) Allenhead bolt
Four, 5.2+0.2
0
dia. holes
Two, 5.2+0.2
0 dia.
Three, M4
(length: 13)
Four, M6
Depth: 15 min.
JIS B0202 G1/2
Effective thread:
4 threads min.
Note: Stainless steel rod
42 max.
WLCA2-2N
WL01CA2-2N
WLCA12-2N
WL01CA12-2N
(See note 1.)
WLCL-2N
WL01CL-2N
(See note 2.)
Operating force: OF max.
9.61 N
9.61 N
2.84 N
Release force: RF min.
1.18 N
1.18 N
0.25 N
Pretravel: PT max.
20°
20°
20°
Overtravel: OT min.
70°
70°
70°
Movement differential: MD max.
10°
10°
10°
Limit
Switches
Operating characteristics
Note: 1. The operating characteristics of WLCA12-2N and WL01CA12-2N are measured at the lever length of 38 mm.
2. The operating characteristics of WLCL-2N and WL01CL-2N are measured at the rod length of 140 mm.
OF and RF for WLCA12-2N and WL01CA12-2N, with a lever length of 89 mm.
Operating
characteristics
WLCA12-2N, WL01CA12-2N
OF
4.10 N
RF
0.50 N
High-precision Models
The high-precision models feature a pretravel of 5° (as compared with 15° for the standard models) and a repeat accuracy twice as great as standard models. The high-precision models are ideal for positioning control of machine tools.
For all models [email protected] indicates a standard model and [email protected] indicates a microload model.
Note: Unless otherwise indicated, a tolerance of ±0.4 mm applies to all dimensions.
Roller Lever
WLGCA2
WL01GCA2
60 max.
Operating characteristics
17.5 dia. (length: 7) (see note)
38R
Four, M3.5
M5 (length: 12)
Allen-head bolt
Four,
5.2+0.2
0 dia. holes
WLGCA2
WL01GCA2
Operating force: OF max.
13.34 N
Release force: RF min.
1.47 N
Pretravel: PT
5°+2
0
Overtravel: OT min.
40°
Movement differential: MD max.
3°
Three, M4
(length: 13)
JIS B0202 G1/2
Effective thread:
4 threads min.
Four, M6
Depth: 15 min.
42 max.
Note: Stainless sintered roller
Two-circuit Limit Switch
WL
F-85
Lamp-equipped Models
Roller Lever
WLCA2-LE/LD
WL01CA2-LE/LD
Note: Unless otherwise indicated, a tolerance of ±0.4 mm
applies to all dimensions.
60 max.
17.5 dia. (length: 7)
Stainless steel roller
38R
Four, M3.5
M5 (length: 12)
Allen-head bolt
OF max.
13.34 N
RF min.
2.23 N
PT
15±5°
OT min.
30°
MD max.
12°
Four,
5.2+0.2
0 dia. holes
Three, M4
(length: 13)
Four, M6
Depth: 15 min
JIS B0202 G1/2
Effective thread:
4 threads min.
42 max.
Note: Stainless steel roller
Sensor I/O Connector Models
Roller Lever Models
Standard Model (WLCA2), High-precision Model (WLGCA2), Overtravel Model (WLH2), and Overtravel High-sensitivity
Model (WLG2)
Note: 1. For the WLG2 model, only the dimensions for the set position marker plate change.
2. Unless otherwise indicated, a tolerance of ±0.4 mm applies to all dimensions.
3. The above diagram is for a lamp-equipped model.
Direct-wired Connector Models
Pre-wired Connector Models
60 max.
60 max.
17.5 dia.
(length: 7)
(see note)
38R
17.5 dia.
(length: 7)
(see note)
38R
Four,, M3.5
M5 (length:
12) Allenhead bolt
Four,
+0.2
5.2 0 dia. holes
M5 (length: 12)
Allen-head bolt
Four,
5.2+0.2
0 dia. holes
Three, M4
(length: 13)
Three, M4
(length: 13)
JIS B0202 G1/2
Effective thread:
4 threads min.
Four, M3.5
Four, M6
Depth: 15 min.
42 max.
Four, M6
Depth: 15 min.
SC-1M
6 dia.
Note: Stainless sintered roller
XS2H-D421
42 max.
Note: Stainless sintered alloy roller
F-86
Two-circuit Limit Switch WL
Operating characteristics
Roller lever/Standard
model
Roller lever/High
precision model
Roller lever/Overtravel
model
Roller lever/Overtravel
high sensitivity model
Operating force: OF max.
13.34 N
13.34 N
9.81 N
9.81 N
Release force: RF min.
2.23 N
0.98 N
Pretravel: PT
15±5°
1.47 N
5°+2°
−0°
15±5°
0.98 N
10°+2°
−1°
Overtravel: OT min.
30°
40°
55°
65°
Movement differential: MD
max.
12°
3°
12°
7°
Top-roller Plunger
WLD2
Note: 1. Unless otherwise indicated, a tolerance of ±0.4 mm applies to all dimensions.
2. The above diagram is for a lamp-equipped model.
Direct-wired Connector Models
Pre-wired Connector Models
17 dia. (length: 5)
(see note)
17 dia. (length: 5)
(see note)
OP
Four, M3.5 (length: 10)
Four,
5.2+0.2
0 dia. holes
Four,
5.2+0.2
0 dia. holes
Three, M4 (length: 13)
Three, M4 (length: 13)
JIS B0202 G1/2
Effective thread:
4 threads min.
Four, M3.5 (length: 10)
Limit
Switches
OP
Four, M6
Depth: 15 min.
Four, M6
Depth: 15 min.
SC-1M
42 max.
6 dia.
Note: Stainless sintered roller
XS2H-D421
42 max.
Note: Stainless sintered roller
Operating characteristics
Top-roller plunger
actuator
Operating force: OF max.
26.67 N
Release force: RF min.
8.92 N
Pretravel: PT max.
1.7 mm
Overtravel: OT min.
5.6 mm
Movement differential: MD max.
1 mm
Operating position: OP
44±0.8 mm
Total travel position: TTP max.
39.5 mm
Two-circuit Limit Switch
WL
F-87
Sealed Top-roller Plunger
WLD28
Note: 1. Unless otherwise indicated, a tolerance of ±0.4 mm applies to all dimensions.
2. The above diagram is for a lamp-equipped model.
Direct-wired Connector Models
Pre-wired Connector Models
11.2 dia. (length: 5)
(see note)
11.2 dia. (length: 5)
(see note)
Four, M3.5 (length: 10)
OP
OP
Four,
5.2+0.2
0 dia. holes
Four,
5.2+0.2
0 dia. holes
Three, M4 (length: 13)
Three, M4 (length: 13)
JIS B0202 G1/2
Effective thread:
4 threads min.
Four, M3.5 (length: 10)
Four, M6
Depth: 15 min.
Four, M6
Depth: 15 min.
SC-1M
42 max.
Note: Stainless sintered alloy roller
XS2H-D421
42 max.
Note: Stainless sintered alloy roller
Operating characteristics
Sealed top-roller plunger
actuator
Operating force: OF max.
16.67 N
Release force: RF min.
4.41 N
Pretravel: PT max.
1.7 mm
Overtravel: OT min.
5.6 mm
Movement differential: MD max.
1 mm
Operating position: OP
44±0.8 mm
Total travel position: TTP max.
39.5 mm
F-88
Two-circuit Limit Switch WL
■ Environment-resistant Models
The dimensions and operating characteristics are the same as general-purpose, environment-resistant models.
■ Spatter-prevention Models
Roller Lever (Screw Terminals)
[email protected]/[email protected]@S
[email protected]/[email protected]
WLG[email protected]
60 max.
17.5 dia. (length: 7) (see note)
Four, M3.5 head
clamping screws
Two, M5 Allen-head
nut and arm set screw
38R
Four, 5.2+0.2
0 dia. holes
Teflon cap
Lamp cover
Three, M4 (length: 13)
JIS B0202 G1/2
Effective thread:
4 threads min.
Limit
Switches
Four, M6
Depth: 15 min.
42 max.
Note: Stainless steel roller
Roller Lever (Pre-wired Connector)
[email protected]/[email protected]@S-M1J
[email protected]/[email protected]
[email protected]
Note: The dimensions are the same regardless of the number of core lines.
60 max.
53±1.5
41.5±1.5
40±1.5
13.1
17.5 dia. (length: 7) (see note)
Four, M3.5 head
clamping screws
Two, M5 Allenhead nut and
arm set screw
38R
25.4
12.7
25.4
Four, 5.2+0.2
0
dia. holes
14.7
Teflon cap
Three, M4
(length: 13)
58.7±0.2
68.7
Lamp cover
5
Four, M6
Depth: 15 min.
SC-1M
(25)
300 +100
−50
6 dia.
XS2H-D421
(4.9)
21.6
(15.1)
30.2±0.2
40±0.7
Note: Stainless steel roller
29.2±1.2
35
42 max.
53.2±0.8
Operating characteristics
Standard
Overtravel models
General
High-precision
High-sensitivity
Operating force: OF max.
13.34 N
9.81 N
9.81 N
13.34 N
Release force: RF min.
2.23 N
0.98 N
0.98 N
Pretravel: PT
15°±5°
15°±5°
10°+2
−1
1.47 N
5°+2°
−0°
Overtravel: OT min.
30°
55°
65°
40°
Movement differential: MD max.
12°
12°
7°
3°
Two-circuit Limit Switch
WL
F-89
Sealed Top-roller Plunger (Screw Terminals)
[email protected]
11.2 dia. (length: 5) (see note)
Four, M3.5
OP
Four, 5.2+0.2
0 dia. holes
Lamp cover
Three, M4 (length: 13)
JIS B0202 G1/2
Effective thread:
4 threads min.
Four, M6
Depth: 15 min.
42 max.
Note: Stainless steel roller
Sealed Top-roller Plunger (Pre-wired Connector)
[email protected]
Note: The dimensions are the same regardless of the number of core lines.
l
11.2 dia. (length: 5) (see note)
13.1
PT
12.9
Rubber cap (fluorosilicon)
Four, M3.5 (length: 10)
push-in mounting screws
with spring washers
OP
Four, 5.2+0.20 dia. holes
Three, M4
(length: 13)
58.7±0.2
68.7
Lamp cover
5
Four, M6
Depth: 15 min.
(25)
SC-1M
300 +100
−50
6 dia.
XS2H-D421
(4.9)
(15.1)
21.6
29.2±1.2
30.2±0.2
40±0.7
35
Note: Stainless steel roller
42 max.
Operating characteristics
[email protected]
Operating force: OF max.
16.67 N
Release force: RF min.
4.41 N
Pretravel: PT max.
1.7 mm
Overtravel: OT min.
5.6 mm
Movement differential: MD max.
1 mm
Operating position: OP
44±0.8 mm
Total travel position: TTP max.
39.5 mm
Note: Unless otherwise indicated, a tolerance of ±0.4 mm applies to all dimensions.
F-90
Two-circuit Limit Switch WL
■ Actuators (Levers Only)
Note: 1. Lever: Only rotating lever models are illustrated.
2. Unless otherwise indicated, a tolerance of ±0.4 mm applies to all dimensions.
3. When using the adjustable roller (rod) lever, make sure that the lever is facing downwards. Use caution, as telegraphing (the Switch turns
ON and OFF repeatedly due to inertia) may occur.
17.5 dia. (length: 7) stainless
sintered alloy roller
7.3-dia.
mounting
holes
WL-1A115
Resin Roller
17.5 dia. (length: 7)
resin roller
7.3-dia.
mounting
holes
M5
Allen-head bolt
WL-1A118
Nylon Roller:
Roller Width: 30 mm
17.5 dia. (length: 30)
Nylon roller
38
7.3-dia.
mounting
holes
17.5 dia. (length: 15)
stainless sintered roller
17 dia. (length: 6)
bearing roller
7.3-dia.
mounting
holes
M5
Allen-head bolt
WL-1A105
Double Nut
17.5 dia. (length: 7) stainless
sintered alloy roller
M5
Allen-head bolt
WL-1A103S
Spatter Prevention
17.5 dia. (length: 7)
stainless steel roller
7.3-dia.
mounting
holes
7.3-dia.
mounting
holes
M5
Allen-head bolt
WL-1A200
Lever Length: 50
Roller Width: 15
WL-1A400
Bearing Roller
Limit
Switches
WL-1A100
Standard Lever
M5
Allen-head bolt
Two, M5 Allen-head
nut and arm set screw
WL-1A300
Lever Length: 63
17.5 dia. (length: 7)
stainless sintered roller
WL-2A100
17.5 dia. (length: 7) stainless
sintered alloy roller
Adjustable lever:
stainless steel
Adjustable range:
25 to 89
7.3-dia.
mounting
holes
7.3-dia.
mounting
holes
M5
Allen-head bolt
7.3-dia.
mounting
holes
M5
Allen-head
bolt
M5
Allen-head bolt
Two-circuit Limit Switch
WL
F-91
WL-2A111
Resin Roller
WL-2A107
Double Nut
17.5 dia. (length: 7)
resin roller
Adjustable lever:
stainless steel
Adjustable range:
25 to 89
WL-2A108
Resin Roller
17.5 dia. (length: 7) stainless
sintered alloy roller
Adjustable lever:
stainless steel
17.5 dia. (length: 7)
resin roller
Adjustable lever:
stainless steel
Adjustable range:
28 to 88
Adjustable range:
25 to 140
7.3-dia.
mounting
holes
7.3-dia.
mounting
holes
7.3-dia.
mounting
holes
M5
Allen-head
bolt
Two, M5 Allen-head
nut and arm set screw
WL-2A122
WL-2A106
17.5 dia. (length: 7) stainless
M5
sintered alloy roller
Allen-head
Adjustable lever:
bolt
stainless steel
Adjustable range:
25 to 140
WL-2A130
17.5 dia. (length: 7) stainless
sintered alloy roller
Adjustable lever:
stainless steel
17.5 dia. (length: 7)
stainless steel roller
(10)
M5
Allen-head
bolt
15.9 Two, M5 (length: 22.1
16) Allen-head
20
nut and arm set
screw
Note: Can be installed on the rear side.
F-92
Three,
5.3+0.2
0 dia. holes
7.3+0.1
0 -dia.
mounting holes
7.3-dia.
mounting
holes
7.3-dia.
mounting
holes
89.5R
(10)
(112)
WL-2A110
WL-2A105
50 dia. (length: 15)
Nylon roller
Adjustable from
42 to 89
49 dia. rubber roller
Material: EPDM
Adjustable from
41 to 78.5
M5
Allen-head
bolt
7.3-dia.
mounting
holes
Two-circuit Limit Switch WL
19.5±0.8
(21.8)
7.3-dia.
mounting
holes
50 dia. (length: 6)
Nylon roller
24.7±0.8
3
Adjustable range:
25 to 89
WL-2A104
M5
Allen-head
bolt
Adjustable from
16 to 89
M5
Allenhead bolt
7.3-dia.
mounting
holes
M5
Allen-head
bolt
WL-1A106
WL-1A110
WL-4A100
35 dia. (length: 6)
Nylon roller
50 dia. (length: 6)
Nylon roller
3-dia. stainless
steel rod
7.3-dia. mounting
holes M5 Allen-head
bolt
Adjustable
up to
141
38R
M5
Allen-head
bolt
M5
Allen-head
bolt
7.3-dia.
mounting
holes
7.3-dia.
mounting
holes
WL-4A201
WL-3A106
Double Nut
WL-3A100
3.2-dia.
stainless
steel rod
2-dia. stainless
steel for spring
Adjustable to
a maximum
of 290
3.2-dia. stainless
steel rod
Adjustable
from
350 to
380
Adjustable from
350 to
380
13 dia.
7.3-dia. mounting
holes
M5
Allen-head
bolt
Actuator's
center of
rotation
7.3-dia. mounting
holes
WL-3A108
WL-3A200
M5
Allenhead bolt
7.3-dia. mounting
holes
25.5 max.
2.3-dia. piano
wire
Two, M5 Allenhead nut and
arm set screw 25.5 max.
WL-3A203
8 dia.
3.2-dia. stainless
steel rod
Adjustable
from
630 to
660
Limit
Switches
38R
Cap
417.5±2
Adhesive
12.5 dia. max.
12.5 dia.
2.3-dia.
operation max.
rod
7.3-dia.
mounting
holes
M5
Allen-head
bolt
7.3-dia.
mounting
holes
25.5 max.
7.3-dia.
mounting
holes
M5
Allen-head bolt
24.6 max.
WL-2A129
WL-4A112
4-dia. stainless
steel rod
Adjustable up
to 141
M5
Allen-head
bolt
24.6 max.
7.3-dia. mounting
holes M5
Allen-head
bolt
Marking
8R
Three, 5.3+0.2
0
dia. holes
7.3+0.1
0
dia. mounting
holes
Two,
M5 (length:
16) Allenhead bolts
Two-circuit Limit Switch
WL
F-93
WL-5A103
38
R
7.3+0.1
0 dia.
WL-5A105
Two, 17.5 dia. (length: 7)
stainless sintered alloy
rollers
7.3+0.1
0 dia.
M5 (length: 16)
Allen-head bolt
Two, 17.5 dia. (length: 7)
stainless sintered alloy
rollers
7.3+0.1
0 dia.
M5 (length: 16)
Allen-head bolt
WL-5A100 has a resin roller
38
R
Two, 17.5 dia. (length: 7)
stainless sintered alloy
rollers
38
R
WL-5A101
M5 (length: 16)
Allen-head bolt
WL-5A102 has a resin roller
WL-5A104 has a resin roller
Installation
Item
Appropriate model/actuator
Changing the installation position of
the actuator
By loosening the Allen-head bolt on the
actuator lever, the position of the actuator can be set anywhere within the 360°.
With Lamp-equipped Switches, the actuator lever comes in contact with the top
of the lamp cover, so use caution when
rotating and setting the lever. When the
lever only moves forwards and backwards, it will not contact the lamp cover.
Roller Levers: WLCA2, WL01CA2,
WLH2, WL01H2, WLG2, WL01G2
Adjustable Roller Levers: WLCA12,
WL01CA12, WLH12, WL01H12,
WLG12, WL01G12
Adjustable Rod Levers: WLCL,
WL01CL, WLHL, WL01HL, WLGL,
WL01GL
Changing the orientation of the Head
By removing the screws in the four corners of the Head, the Head can be set in
any of the four directions. Be sure to
change the plunger for internal operations at the same time. (The operational
plunger does not need to be changed on
overtravel general-purpose and highsensitivity models.) The roller plunger
can be set in either two positions at 90°.
WLCA2-2N and WL01CA2-2N can only
be set in either the forward or backward
direction.
Roller Levers: [email protected], [email protected],
[email protected]
Adjustable Rod Levers: WLCL,
WL01CL
Horizontal Plungers: [email protected],
[email protected]
Roller Plungers: WLD2, WL01D2
Sealed Roller Plungers: WLD28,
WL01D28.
F-94
Note: Does not include -RP60
Series or -141 Series.
Two-circuit Limit Switch WL
Details
Loosen the M5 × 12 bolt, set the
actuator's position and then tighten
the bolt again.
Head
Loosen the screws.
Head
Loosen
the
screws.
Item
Changing the operating direction
By removing the Head on models which
can operate on one-side only, and then
changing the direction of the operational
plunger, one of three operating directions can be selected. In the case of
overtravel models, by loosening the rubber holder using either a coin or a flatblade screwdriver, and changing the direction of the internal rubber section,
one of three operating directions can be
selected.
The tightening torque for the screws on
the Head is 0.78 to 0.88 N·m.
Appropriate model/actuator
Roller Levers: WLCA2, WL01CA2,
WLGCA2, [email protected]
Adjustable Roller Levers: WLCA12,
WL01CA12
Adjustable Rod Levers: WLCL,
WL01CL
Overtravel Models: [email protected],
[email protected]
Details
The output of the
Switch will be changed,
regardless of which
direction the lever is
pushed.
Operating
Operating
Not operating
The output of the
Switch will only be
changed when the lever
is pushed in one
direction.
Operating
Operating
Not operating
Note: The diagram at the right is not
correct for the overtravel -2N
models.
Operational
plunger
Operation in
both directions
Clockwise operation
Counterclockwise
operation
For details on overtravel -2N models, refer to page 28.
Cam direction changing procedure for side-installation
models
Change the direction of the cam
as required by your intended operation and then reinstall the cam.
Limit
Switches
Loosen the cam holder with
a coin or screwdriver. Take
out the cam from the Switch.
Relationship of cam to operation as observed from the rear of
Switch
Operation on both sides
Operates
Operates Operates
Operation on one side
Does not operate
Installing the roller on the inside
By installing the roller lever in the opposite direction, the roller can be installed
on the inside. (Set so that operation can
be completed within a 180° level range.)
Operation on one side
Does not operate
Avoid this combination
Operates
Roller Levers: [email protected], [email protected],
except for the adjustable roller levers.
Fork Lever Locks: [email protected],
[email protected]
Loosen the
Allen-head bolt.
Two-circuit Limit Switch
WL
F-95
Item
Appropriate model/actuator
Selecting the roller position
Fork Lever Locks: [email protected],
There are four types of fork lever lock for [email protected]
use depending on the roller position.
Details
WLCA32-41
WLCA32-43
WLCA32-42
WLCA32-44
Note: An explanation of the operation of fork lever locks is provided after this table.
Adjusting the length of the rod or lever
The length of the rod or lever can be adjusted by loosening the Allen-head bolt.
Adjustable Roller Levers: WLCA12,
WL01CA12 etc.
Adjustable Rod Levers: WLCL,
WL01CL, etc.
WLCA12 etc.
Loosen this
Allen-head
bolt and
adjust the
length of
the lever.
■ Operation of Fork Lever Locks
The fork lever lock is configured so that the dog pushes the lever to
reverse the output and this reversed state is maintained even after
the dog continues on. If the dog then pushes the lever from the opposite direction, the lever will return to its original position.
Example
NC terminal: ON
F-96
NO terminal: ON
NO terminal: ON
Two-circuit Limit Switch WL
Adjustment range:
25 to 89 mm
Loosen this
Allen-head
bolt and
adjust the
length of
the rod.
Precautions
Refer to the Technical Information for Limit Switches (Cat. No. C121).
■ Correct Use
Tightening Torque
When a rod or wired-type actuator is used, do not touch the top end
of the actuator. Doing so may result in injury.
Applicable models: WLHAL5 and WL01HAL5 Rod Spring Levers and
WLNJ-S2 and WL01NJ-S2 Steel-wire Actuators.
If screws are too loose they can lead to an early malfunction of the
Switch, so ensure that all screws are tightened using the correct
torque.
A short-circuit may cause damage to the Switch, so insert a circuit
breaker fuse, of 1.5 to 2 times the rated current, in parallel with the
Switch. In order to meet EN approval ratings, use a 10-A fuse that
corresponds to IEC269, either a gI or gG for general-purpose types
and spatter-prevention models only.
A
Head mounting screw
B
Cover mounting screw
1.18 to 1.37 N·m
C
Allen-head bolt
(for securing the lever)
4.90 to 5.88 N·m
When wiring terminal screws, use M4 round crimp terminals and
tighten screws to the recommended torque. Wiring with broken
wires, or the incorrect crimp terminals, or not tightening screws to the
recommended torque can lead to short-circuits, leakage current, and
fire.
D
Terminal screw
0.59 to 0.78 N·m
E
Connector
1.77 to 2.16 N·m
F
Main Unit screws
4.90 to 5.88 N·m
No.
Type
Torque
0.78 to 0.88 N·m
When performing internal wiring there is a chance of short-circuit,
leakage current, or fire, so be sure to protect the inside of the Switch
from splashes of oil or water, corrosive gases, and cutting powder.
Limit
Switches
Using an inappropriate connector or assembling Switches incorrectly
(assembly, tightening torque) can result in malfunction, leakage current, or fire, so be sure to read the instruction manual thoroughly
beforehand.
Even when the connector is assembled and set correctly, the end of
the cable and the inside of the Switch may come in contact. This can
lead to malfunction, leakage current, or fire, so be sure to protect the
end of the cable from splashes of oil or water and corrosive gases.
Environmental Precautions
When the Switch is used in locations subject to splashes of water or
oil, the material of the seal, which ensures the sealing properties of
the Switch, may undergo changes in shape and quality. This is due to
deterioration (including expansion and contraction), and may result in
reduced performance, ineffective return, and ineffective sealing
(leading to ineffective contact, insulation, leakage current, and fire).
Confirm the possible effects of the operating environment on the
Switch before use.
Built-in Switch
Do not remove or replace the built-in switch. If the position of the
built-in switch moves, it can cause reduced performance, and if the
insulation sheet moves (separator), the insulation may become ineffective.
In particular, when changing the direction of the Head, make sure
that all screws are tightened again to the correct torque. Do not allow
foreign objects to fall into the Switch.
Installing the Switch
To install the Switch, make a mounting panel, as shown in the following diagram, and tighten screws using the correct torque.
Standard/Overtravel model
Mounting holes
Four, 5.2+0.2
0 dia. holes
Overtravel model (side
installation)
Mounting holes
Two, 5.2+0.2
0 dia. holes
Connectors
Either the easy-to-use Allen-head nut or the SC Connector can be
used as connectors. To ensure high-sealing properties, use the SC
Connector. Consult your OMRON representative for details on SC
Connectors.
Two-circuit Limit Switch
WL
F-97
Wiring
Rotating Lever Set Position
Use 1.25-mm lead wires and M4-insulation covered crimp terminals
for wiring.
All rotating lever models, except the fork lever lock, have a set position marker plate. (See page 75.) After operation, set the indicator
needle on the marker plate so that is in the convex section of the
bearing.
Crimp Terminal External Dimensions
Terminal Plate
By using a short circuit plate, as shown in the following diagram, the
Switch can be fabricated into a single-polarity double-break model.
When ordering specify WL Terminal Plate (product code: WL9662F).
D dia.
dz dia.
dz dia.:
D dia.:
B:
L:
F:
l:
4.3
4.5
8.5
21.0
7.8
9.0 (mm)
Wiring Method
Switch Box Section
t = 0.6 Copper plate
Ground terminal
NO terminal
NC terminal
Note: The ground terminal is only installed on models with ground terminals.
ALL DIMENSIONS SHOWN ARE IN MILLIMETERS.
To convert millimeters into inches, multiply by 0.03937. To convert grams into ounces, multiply by 0.03527.
Cat. No. C001-E1-13
F-98
In the interest of product improvement, specifications are subject to change without notice.
Two-circuit Limit Switch WL
Long-life Two-circuit Limit Switch
[email protected]
New Long-life Limit Switches Added to the
Wide Variety of WL Models
• Improved resistance to abrasion and smoother movement in the
head section means that a mechanical life of 30,000,000 operations minimum is now a reality.
• Wiring and replacement for maintenance purposes are easy
done.
• Fluorescent indicators improve visibility when setting stroke
zones.
Limit
Switches
Model Number Structure
■ Model Number Legend
[email protected]@
1
2
1. Actuators
CA2:
Roller lever: Standard
GCA2:
Roller lever: High-precision
H2:
Roller lever: Overtravel, general-purpose
G2:
Roller lever: Overtravel, high-sensitivity
2. Wiring Specifications
Blank:
Screw terminal: G1/2 conduit
K13A:
Direct-wired connector: 2-core, AC
K13:
Direct-wired connector: 2-core, DC
K43A:
Direct-wired connector: 4-core, AC
K43:
Direct-wired connector: 4-core, DC
-M1J:
Pre-wired connector: 2-core, DC (See note.)
-AGJ03: Pre-wired connector: 4-core, AC (See note.)
-DGJ03: Pre-wired connector: 4-core, DC (See note.)
Note: With 0.3-m cable attached.
Long-life Two-circuit Limit Switch
[email protected]
F-99
Ordering Information
■ List of Models
Roller Lever with LED
Item
Model
Type
Standard
Overtravel
General-purpose
High-precision
High-sensitivity
Overall movement
Features
One-side operation not possible.
Head can be mounted in any of the four directions.
(See note 3.)
Screw terminal
Direct-wired
connector
2-core
4-core
Pre-wired
2-core
connector
4-core
(See note 2.)
One-side operation possible.
Head can be mounted in any
of the four directions.
(See note 3.)
WLMCA2-LD
WLMH2-LD
WLMG2-LD
AC
WLMCA2-LDK13A
WLMH2-LDK13A
WLMG2-LDK13A
WLMGCA2-LD
WLMGCA2-LDK13A
DC
WLMCA2-LDK13
WLMH2-LDK13
WLMG2-LDK13
WLMGCA2-LDK13
AC
WLMCA2-LDK43A
WLMH2-LDK43A
WLMG2-LDK43A
WLMGCA2-LDK43A
DC
WLMCA2-LDK43
WLMH2-LDK43
WLMG2-LDK43
WLMGCA2-LDK43
DC
WLMCA2-LD-M1J
WLMH2-LD-M1J
WLMG2-LD-M1J
WLMGCA2-LD-M1J
AC
WLMCA2-LD-AGJ03
WLMH2-LD-AGJ03
WLMG2-LD-AGJ03
WLMGCA2-LD-AGJ03
DC
WLMCA2-LD-DGJ03
WLMH2-LD-DGJ03
WLMG2-LD-DGJ03
WLMGCA2-LD-DGJ03
Note: 1. The default setting is light-ON when not operating (NO connection). To switch to light-ON when operating, simply rotate the lamp holder
by 180°. Contact your OMRON representative for details on the 2-core models.
2. 0.3-m cable attached.
3. One-side operation possible means that, by changing the direction of the operational plunger, one of three operating directions can be
selected. One-side operation not possible means that only operation on both sides is possible. See page 106 for details.
Applicable Cables
Use the Cables listed below with the Limit Switch with Connector.
Voltage
Core wires
Cable length
Model
Connection wires
1
AC
2
4
DC
2
4
F-100
2m
XS2F-A421-DB0-A
5m
XS2F-A421-GB0-A
2m
XS2F-A421-D90-A
5m
XS2F-A421-G90-A
2m
XS2F-D421-DD0
5m
XS2F-D421-GD0
2m
XS2F-D421-D80-A
5m
XS2F-D421-G80-A
Long-life Two-circuit Limit Switch [email protected]
2
3
4
---
---
Brown
Blue
Brown
White
Blue
Black
---
---
Blue
Brown
Brown
White
Blue
Black
Specifications
■ Ratings
General-purpose Ratings
Refer to these ratings before using the product.
Screw Terminal Models
Model
Rated
voltage
Non-inductive load
Resistive load
NC
115 VAC
Standard, overtravel
(except high-sensitivity), 12 VDC
and high-precision
24 VDC
Overtravel
(High-sensitivity)
Inrush current
Inductive load
Lamp load
NO
NC
Inductive load
NO
NC
Motor load
NO
NC
10
3
1.5
10
5
10
6
3
10
6
6
4
3
6
4
48 VDC
3
2
1.5
3
2
115 VDC
0.8
0.2
0.2
0.8
0.2
115 VAC
5
---
---
---
115 VDC
0.4
---
---
---
NC
30 A max. (15 A max. (See note))
NO
20 A max. (10 A max. (See note))
NO
2.5
Note: Only for high-sensitivity overtravel models.
Model
Rated
voltage
Non-inductive load
Resistive load
NC
DC
AC
Note: 1.
2.
3.
4.
Inductive load
Lamp load
NO
Limit
Switches
Direct-wired/Pre-wired Models
NC
Inductive load
NO
NC
Motor load
NO
NC
NO
12 VDC
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
24 VDC
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
48 VDC
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
115 VDC
0.8
0.8
0.2
0.2
0.8
0.8
0.2
0.2
115 VAC
3
3
3
1.5
3
3
3
2.5
The above figures are for standard currents.
Inductive loads have a power factor of 0.4 min. (AC) and a time constant of 7 ms max. (DC).
Lamp load has an inrush current of 10 times the steady-state current.
Motor load has an inrush current of 6 times the steady-state current.
■ Characteristics
Degree of protection
IP67
Durability (See note 2.)
Mechanical: 30,000,000 operations min. (10 mA at 24 VDC, resistive load)
Electrical: 750,000 operations min. (10 A at 115 VAC, resistive load),
but for high-precision models: 500,000 operations min. (10 A at 115 VAC, resistive load)
Operating speed
1 mm to 1 m/s (for WLMCA2)
Operating frequency
Mechanical: 120 operations/minute
Electrical: 30 operations/minute
Rated frequency
50/60 Hz
Insulation resistance
100 MΩ min. (at 500 VDC)
Contact resistance
25 mΩ max. (initial value)
Dielectric strength
1,000 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 min between non-continuous terminals. (Except connector models.)
2,200 VAC (1,500 V), 50/60 Hz for 1 min between non-current-carrying metal part and ground.
2,200 VAC (1,500 V), 50/60 Hz for 1 min between each terminal and non-current-carrying metal part.
Vibration resistance
10 to 55 Hz, 1.5-mm double amplitude
Shock resistance
Destruction: 1,000 m/s2 min.
Malfunction: 300 m/s2 min.
Ambient temperature
Operating: –10°C to 80°C (with no icing)
Ambient humidity
Operating: 95% max.
Weight
Approx. 275 g (for WLMCA2)
Note: 1. The figures in parentheses for dielectric strength, are those for overtravel (high-sensitivity) or connector models.
2. The values are calculated at an operating temperature of 5°C to 35°C, and an operating humidity of 40% to 70%. Contact your OMRON
sales representative for more detailed information on other operating environments.
Long-life Two-circuit Limit Switch
[email protected]
F-101
■ Operating Characteristics
Operating characteristics
[email protected]
Standard models
[email protected]
Overtravel models
(general-purpose)
[email protected]
Overtravel models
(high-sensitivity)
[email protected]
High-precision models
OF max.
9.81 N
9.81 N
9.81 N
13.34 N
RF min.
0.98 N
0.98 N
0.98 N
1.47 N
PT
15±5°
15±5°
10+2°
−1°
5+2°
−0°
OT min.
30°
55°
65°
40°
MD max.
12°
12°
7°
3°
■ Contact Form
Screw Terminal Models
[email protected]
Lamp-equipped: Light-ON when not operating
Internal circuit
Built-in switch
Direct-wired Connector/Pre-wired Connector Models
AC Models: [email protected]@@
Lamp-equipped: Light-ON when not operating (See note.)
AC model
DC model
Internal circuit
Internal circuit
Built-in switch
Pin No.
2-core
4-core
Built-in switch
Pin No.
2-core
4-core
Note: Light-ON when not operating means that the lamp remains lit when the actuator is free, and goes out when the Limit Switch contacts (NO)
close when the actuator rotates or is pushed down.
F-102
Long-life Two-circuit Limit Switch [email protected]
Engineering Data
■ Electrical Durability: cosφ = 1
Light-ON when Operating
Operating temperature: 5°C to 30°C
Operating humidity:
40% to 70%
LED at top
Durability (x 104 operations)
Operating frequency: 30 operations/min
cosφ = 1
125 VAC
250 VAC
Light-ON when Not Operating
480 VAC
LED at bottom
Switching current (mA)
■ Lamp-equipped Models
The operating status of the Switch can be checked using a neon
lamp of LED indictor.
Circuit checks and troubleshooting errors are easy done.
Light emitting diode (LED)
Lamp holder
Contact spring
Operation
indicator
window
The built-in switch’s terminal screws are used to connect the lamp
terminal (indicator cover). Since the connection spring (coil spring) is
used for this connection, it will not be necessary to connect to the
lamp terminal. When a ground terminal is provided however, lead
wire method must be used.
WL-LD has a built-in rectifier stack, so it will not be necessary to
change the polarity.
The indicator cover is molded from diecast aluminum and has outstanding sealing properties. Furthermore, regardless of whether the
power is connected or not, the operating status is shown (operating
or not operating), and indicators can be switched from light-ON when
operating and light-ON when not operating, by simply rotating the
lamp holder by 180°.
The lamp-equipped models are ideal in locations using a conveyor
belt where items need to be checked, or locations that are difficult to
inspect for faults.
When the indicator lamp is set to light-ON when operating, connect
the load on the NC side, and set so that the load turns ON when the
actuator is free.
When the indicator lamp is set to light-ON when not operating, connect the load on the NO side, and set so that the load turns ON when
the actuator is pushed down.
Light-ON when Operating
When the Switch’s contacts and the internal circuit of the lamp holder
are connected in parallel, there is large resistance from the internal
circuit, so the current will flow through the Switch’s contacts and the
load will turn ON.
When the contacts and the internal circuit are separated, only a
small voltage, enough to light the indicator lamp will flow to the lamp,
but the load will not turn ON.
Operation
LIght-ON
when
operating
(See note 1.)
WL-LD
Power supply
Built-in switch
Load
Internal circuit
Light-ON
when not
operating
(See note 2.)
WL-LD
Power supply
Internal circuit
Load
Built-in switch
Note: 1. Light-ON when operating means that the lamp lights when
the Limit Switch contacts (NC) release, or when the actuator
rotates or is pushed down.
2. Light-ON when not operating means the lamp remains lit
when the actuator is free, or when the Limit Switch contacts
(NO) close when the actuator rotates or is pushed down.
Long-life Two-circuit Limit Switch
[email protected]
F-103
Limit
Switches
Indicator Lamp and Load Operation
Models/Ratings
Internal Circuits
Operating
Maximum
characteristics rated voltage
LED
Leakage
current
Lampequipped
Switch
Lampequipped
cover only
10 to
Approx. 1 mA [email protected]
WL-LD
115 VAC, DC
(See note 1.)
WL-LD
Contact spring
Note: 1. In the model number, @ indicates the actuator number. For
example, MCA2, etc.
2. The default setting is “light-ON when not operating.” Turn the
lamp holder by 180° to change the setting to “light-ON when
operating.”
Resistance
Rectifier stack
Constant current diode
Zener
diode
Light-emitting diode (LED)
Nomenclature
Set Position Marker Plate
The set position is easy to view. The stroke is
indicated in fluorescent color that is visible from
the slit in the rubber cap.
Release Plunger
Hardening method changed for greater abrasion resistance.
Standard Model
Long-life Model
Standard Model
Sintered
alloy
Head
The Head can be mounted in any of the
four directions by removing the screws at
the four corners of the Head.
Fluorescent paint
Requires maintenance
(excessive overtravel)
Proper range
Requires maintenance (insufficient overtravel)
Proper range
Requires maintenance (excessive overtravel)
Shaft Section Seal
By fitting a double seal consisting of an oil seal
and an X-ring to the rotary shaft, even greater
sealing properties are achieved.
Standard Model
Long-life Model
Stainless steel
+
Hardening
Long-life Model
O-ring
Oil seal
X-ring
Smoother Movement
A grease holder is provided on the shaft to
prevent the grease from running out.
Roller
The roller is made of self-lubricating stainless sintered
and boasts high resistance to wear.
Head
Mounting
Screws
Lever
The lever forged of anti-corrosive aluminium alloy
features high corrosion resistance and outstanding
ruggedness. With roller lever models, the actuator
position can be set anywhere within 360°. (The lever
cannot be mounted in the opposite direction.)
Standard Model
Operational Plunger (See note.)
Cover Seal
By using a packing seal as the cover seal, an
optimum squeeze can be obtained and high sealing
properties are assured as well.
Long-life Model
Terminal Screws
Four, M4 screws
Grease holder
Smooth movement is achieved using
olefin grease. (Standard models use
molybdenum disulfide grease.)
Cover
Separator
The separator has outstanding insulation
properties and prevents the generation of any
gases which may corrode the internal parts.
Bearing
The bearing smooths the plunger movement.
Cover Mounting Screw
A Phillips screw is used to ensure ease of use.
Built-in Switch
Built-in switch with SPST-NO+NC contact form.
Conduit Opening
In addition to level screws which use G 1/2 tube, directwired and pre-wired connectors have been added.
Note: By changing the direction of the operational plunger, any one of the three operational directions (both sides, left, or right) can be selected.
(Only applicable to the [email protected])
F-104
Long-life Two-circuit Limit Switch [email protected]
Dimensions
Rotating Lever Models: Standard
Screw Terminals
[email protected]
Direct-wired Connectors
[email protected]@
60 max.
60 max.
13.1
25.4
38R
12.7
25.4
Rubber cap
Three, M4 × 13
58.7±0.2
17.5 dia. × 5 (See note)
Four, M3.5
(length: 26.5)
14.7
(15.1)
(4.9)
40±0.7
68.7
Lamp cover
5
12.5
29.2±1.2
JIS B0202 G1/2
Effective thread:
4 threads min.
25.4
68.7
21.6
30.2±0.2
12.7
M5 × 12
Allen-head
bolt
Four ,5.2+0.2
0 dia.
holes
Rubber cap
Three, M4 × 13
58.7±0.2
Lamp cover
5
40±1.5
13.1
25.4
Four, M6
SC-2FD
Four, M6
Depth: 15 min.
(15.1)
(4.9)
35
30.2±0.2
21.6 Depth: 15 min.
M12 × 1
29.2±1.2
40±0.7
JIS B0202 G1/2
Effective thread:
4 threads min.
42 max.
53.2±0.8
Note: Stainless steel roller
35
42 max.
53.2±0.8
Note: Stainless steel roller
Limit
Switches
17.5 dia. × 7 (See note)
Four, M3.5
(length: 26.5)
M5 × 12
38R
Allen-head
bolt
Four ,5.2+0.2
0 dia.
14.7
holes
53±1.5
41.5±1.5
53±1.5
41.5±1.5
40±1.5
Pre-wired Connectors
[email protected]@
60 max.
17.5 dia. × 7 (See note)
Four, M3.5
(length: 26.5)
M5 × 12
38R
Allen-head
bolt
Four, 5.2+0.2
0 dia.
14.7
holes
53±1.5
41.5±1.5
40±1.5
13.1
25.4
12.7
25.4
Rubber cap
Three, M4 × 13
58.7±0.2
68.7
Lamp cover
(25)
Four, M6
Depth: 15 min.
5
XS2H-D421
300±50
52
(15.1)
(4.9)
6 dia.
21.6
30.2±0.2
40±0.7
29.2±1.2
35
42 max.
53.2±0.8
Note: Stainless steel roller
Note: Unless otherwise indicated, a tolerance of ±0.4 mm applies to all dimensions.
Long-life Two-circuit Limit Switch
[email protected]
F-105
Accessories
Cable
Straight
6 dia.
5 dia.
5 dia.
14.9 dia.
AC
DC
Installation
Item
Appropriate model/actuator
Details
Changing the installation position of Roller Levers: [email protected], [email protected],
[email protected], [email protected]
the actuator
By loosening the Allen-head bolt on the
actuator lever, the position of the actuator can be set anywhere within 360°.
With Lamp-equipped Switches, the actuator lever comes in contact with the
top of the lamp cover, so use caution
when rotating and setting the lever.
Roller Levers: [email protected], [email protected],
Installing the roller on the inside
By installing the roller lever in the oppo- [email protected], [email protected]
site direction, the roller can be installed
on the inside. (Set so that operation can
be completed within a 180° level
range.)
Changing the orientation of the head Roller Levers: [email protected], [email protected],
By removing the screws in the four cor- [email protected], [email protected]
ners of the Head, the Head can be set
in any of the four directions. Be sure to
change the plunger for internal operations at the same time. (The operational
plunger does not need to be changed
on overtravel general-purpose and
overtravel high-sensitivity models.)
Roller Levers: [email protected]
Changing the operating direction
By removing the Head on models which
can operate on one-side, and then
changing the direction of the operational plunger, one of three operating directions can be selected.
The tightening torque for the screws on
the Head is 0.78 to 0.88 N·m.
Loosen the M5 × 12 bolt, set the
actuator's position and then
tighten the bolt again.
Loosen the
Allen head bolt
Loosen the screws
Head
Head
Loosen the
screws
The output of the
Switch will be changed,
regardless of which
direction the lever is
pushed.
Operating
Operating
Not operating
The output of the
Switch will only be
changed when the lever
is pushed in one
direction.
Operating
Operating
Not operating
Operational
plunger
Operation in both
directions
F-106
Long-life Two-circuit Limit Switch [email protected]
Clockwise operation
Anti-clockwise
operation
Precautions
■ Correct Use
Tightening Torque
When wiring terminal screws, use M4 round crimp terminals and
tighten screws to the recommended torque. Wiring with broken
wires, or the incorrect crimp terminals, or not tightening screws to the
recommended torque can lead to short-circuits, leakage current, and
fire.
If screws are too loose they can lead to an early malfunction of the
Switch, so ensure that all screws are tightened using the correct
torque.
When performing internal wiring there is a chance of short-circuit,
leakage current, or fire, so be sure to protect the inside of the Switch
from splashes of oil or water, corrosive gases, and cutting powder.
Using an inappropriate connector or assembling Switches incorrectly
(assembly, tightening torque) can result in malfunction, leakage current, or fire, so be sure to read the instruction manual thoroughly
beforehand.
Even when the connector is assembled and set correctly, the end of
the cable and the inside of the Switch may come in contact. This can
lead to malfunction, leakage current, or fire, so be sure to protect the
end of the cable from splashes of oil or water and corrosive gases.
No.
1
Type
Torque
Head mounting screw
0.78 to 0.88 N·m
2
Cover mounting screw
1.18 to 1.37 N·m
3
Allen-head bolt
(for securing the lever)
4.90 to 5.88 N·m
4
Terminal screw
0.59 to 0.78 N·m
5
Connector
1.77 to 2.16 N·m
6
Main Unit screws
4.90 to 5.88 N·m
Environmental Precautions
Limit
Switches
When the Switch is used in locations subject to splashes of water or
oil, the material of the seal, which ensures the sealing properties of
the Switch, may undergo changes in shape and quality. This is due to
deterioration (including expansion and contraction), and may result in
reduced performance, ineffective return, and ineffective sealing
(leading to ineffective contact, insulation, leakage current, and fire).
Confirm the possible effects of the operating environment on the
Switch before use.
Built-in Switch
Do not replace the built-in switch. If the position of the insulation
sheet moves (separator), the insulation may become ineffective.
In particular, when changing the direction of the Head, make sure
that all screws are tightened again to the correct torque. Do not allow
foreign objects to fall into the Switch.
Installing the Switch
To install the Switch, make a mounting panel, as shown in the following diagram, and tighten screws using the correct torque.
Four, 5.2+0.2
0 dia. mounting holes or M5 taps
Connectors
Either the easy-to-use Allen-head nut or the SC Connector can be
used as connectors. To ensure high-sealing properties, use the SC
Connector. (SC-1M to -5M and others.)
Long-life Two-circuit Limit Switch
[email protected]
F-107
Wiring
Operation Set Position
Use 1.25-mm lead wires and M4-insulation covered crimp terminals
for wiring.
There is a set position marker slit on the rubber cap of the head.
After operation, set the slit on the rubber cap so that the fluorescent
color on the shaft section can be seen.
Crimp Terminal External Dimensions
Terminal Plate
By using a short circuit plate, as shown in the following diagram, the
Switch can be fabricated into a single-polarity double-break model.
When ordering specify WL Terminal-Plate (IWPA01).
D dia.
.
dz dia.
D dia.
B:
L:
F:
l:
4.3
4.5
8.5
21.0
7.8
9.0 (mm)
dz dia.
3R
9+0.2
Wiring Method
16±0.15
2R
Switch Box Section
Ground terminal
2.1R
t = 0.6 Copper plate
NO terminal
NC terminal
Note: Ground terminals are not installed on the standard models.
ALL DIMENSIONS SHOWN ARE IN MILLIMETERS.
To convert millimeters into inches, multiply by 0.03937. To convert grams into ounces, multiply by 0.03527.
Cat. No. C112-E1-02
F-108
In the interest of product improvement, specifications are subject to change without notice.
Long-life Two-circuit Limit Switch [email protected]
Enclosed Switch
[email protected]
Small, High-precision Enclosed Switch
• Employs a modified version of Z Basic Switch as built-in switch.
• Same mounting pitch as Z Basic Switch.
• Pre-wired molded terminal models are available.
• Requires less operating force than conventional limit switches.
• Long life expectancy and economical.
• UL, CSA, and EN models are available.
Limit
Switches
Model Number Structure
■ Model Number Legend
[email protected]
1
1. Actuator
D:
Plunger
Q:
Panel mount plunger
Q22: Panel mount roller plunger
Q21: Panel mount crossroller plunger
N22: Sealed roller plunger
N21: Sealed crossroller plunger
W:
W1:
W2:
W21:
W3:
W31:
Short hinge lever
Hinge lever
Short hinge roller lever
Hinge roller lever
One-way action short hinge roller lever
One-way action hinge roller lever
Ordering Information
■ List of Models
Actuator
Model
Actuator
Model
Plunger
ZC-D55
Short hinge
lever
ZC-W55
Panel mount
plunger
ZC-Q55
Hinge lever
ZC-W155
Panel mount
roller plunger
ZC-Q2255
Short hinge
roller lever
ZC-W255
Panel mount
crossroller plunger
ZC-Q2155
Hinge roller
lever
ZC-W2155
Sealed roller
plunger
ZC-N2255
One-way action
short hinge roller
lever
ZC-W355
Sealed crossroller
plunger
ZC-N2155
One-way action
hinge roller lever
ZC-W3155
Note: 1. Use molded terminal models (refer to page 117) when using the Switch under one of the following conditions:
a) dusty, b) high amount of dripping oil, or c) high humidity
2. Micro-load models are available.
e.g. Standard model
Micro-load model
ZC-Q55
ZC-Q55-01
Enclosed Switch
[email protected]
F-109
Terminal Protective Cover, Seal Rubber, and Rubber Packing
(The Switch is equipped with these 3 items as a standard.)
• ZC Terminal Cover
(Product code: ZC55-0002H)
• ZC Seal Rubber
(Product code: SC-1404C)
• ZC Rubber Packing
(Product code: ZC55-9999G)
Rubber packing
Terminal cover
Seal rubber
Specifications
■ Approved Standards
(Except Molded Terminal Models and Operation Indicator-equipped Model)
Agency
Standard
File No.
UL
UL508
E76675
CSA
C22.2, No. 14
LR45258
TÜV Rheinland
EN60947-1, EN60947-5-1
J9650089
■ Approved Standard Ratings
UL/CSA
A300
Voltage
Carry current
Current
Volt-amperes
Make
120 VAC
10 A
240 VAC
Micro load
Break
60 A
6A
30 A
3A
Make
Break
7,200 VA
720 VA
0.1 A, 125 VAC
0.1 A, 30 VDC
TÜV Rheinland
250 V, 10 A (AC12)
■ Ratings
Rated voltage
Non-inductive load
Resistive load
NC
Inductive load
Lamp load
NO
NC
NO
NC
10 A
2.5 A
1.25 A
10 A
3A
1.5 A
8 VDC
10 A
3A
1.5 A
6A
5A
2.5 A
14 VDC
10 A
3A
1.5 A
6A
5A
2.5 A
30 VDC
6A
3A
1.5 A
5A
5A
2.5 A
125 VDC
0.5 A
0.4 A
0.4 A
0.05 A
0.05 A
0.05 A
250 VDC
0.25 A
0.2 A
0.2 A
0.03 A
0.03 A
0.03 A
Note: 1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
F-110
30 A max.
15 A max.
The above figures are for steady-state currents.
Inductive loads have a power factor of 0.4 min. (AC) and a time constant of 7 ms max. (DC).
Lamp load has an inrush current of 10 times the steady-state current.
Motor load has an inrush current of 6 times the steady-state current.
The above ratings were tested under the following conditions according to JIS C4508.
Ambient temperature: 20±2°C
Ambient humidity:
65±5%
Operating frequency:
20 operations/min
Enclosed Switch [email protected]
5A
NO
250 VAC
NO
10 A
Motor load
NO
10 A
NC
1.5 A
NC
125 VAC
Inrush current
3A
Inductive load
2.5 A
■ Characteristics
Degree of protections
IP67
Durability
Mechanical:
Electrical:
Operating speed
0.05 mm to 0.5 m/s (at pin plunger)
Operating frequency
Mechanical: 120 operations/min
Electrical:
20 operations/min
10,000,000 operations min.
500,000 operations min.
100 MΩ min. (at 500 VDC)
15 mΩ max. (initial value)
Dielectric strength
1,000 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 min between non-continuous terminals
2,000 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 min between current-carrying metal part and ground, and between each terminal
and non-current-carrying metal parts
Rated insulation voltage (Ui)
1,000 VAC
Pollution degree
(operating environment)
3 (IEC947-5-1)
Short-circuit protective device
10 A-fuse type gG (IEC 269)
Protection against electric
shock
Class II
PT1 (tracking characteristics)
175
Switch category
D (IEC335)
Rated operating current (Ie)
10 A
Rated operating voltage (Ue)
250 VAC
Vibration resistance
Malfunction: 10 to 55 Hz, 1.5-mm double amplitude (see note)
Shock resistance
Destruction:
Malfunction:
Limit
Switches
Insulation resistance
Contact resistance
1,000 m/s2 max.
300 m/s2 max. (at pin plunger) (see note)
Ambient temperature
Operating:
–10°C to 80°C (with no icing)
Ambient humidity
Operating:
35% to 95%
Weight
Approx. 92 g (in case of ZC-Q22(21)55)
Note: Less than 1 ms under a free state at the operating limits.
■ Operating Characteristics
Model
ZC-D55
OF max.
11.8 N
RF min.
PT max.
ZC-Q55
ZC-Q2255
ZC-Q2155
ZC-N2255
11.8 N
6.86 N
4.90 N
4.90 N
1.67 N
1.5 mm
1.5 mm
1.5 mm
OT min.
2.4 mm
3 mm
2.5 mm
MD max.
0.2 mm
0.2 mm
OP
32.4±0.8 mm
38.2±0.8 mm
Model
ZC-W55
ZC-N2155
0.2 mm
47.4±0.8 mm
ZC-W155
ZC-W255
ZC-W2155
ZC-W355
ZC-W3155
OF max.
3.92 N
2.75 N
3.92 N
2.75 N
3.92 N
2.75 N
RF min.
0.78 N
0.59 N
0.78 N
0.59 N
0.78 N
0.59 N
OT min.
6 mm
8.4 mm
6 mm
8.4 mm
6 mm
8.4 mm
MD max.
1 mm
1.4 mm
1 mm
1.4 mm
1 mm
1.4 mm
OP
28.5±1.2 mm
28.5±1.2 mm
43±1.2 mm
43±1.2 mm
53±1.2 mm
53±1.2 mm
FP max.
34.7 mm
36.7 mm
49.2 mm
51.3 mm
59.2 mm
61.2 mm
■ Contact Form
NC
COM
NO
EN60947-5-1
COM
NO
NC
Enclosed Switch
[email protected]
F-111
Engineering Data
■ Electrical Durability
Durability (x 104 operations)
Operating temperature: 20±2°C
Operating humidity: 65±5%
No load
Operating frequency: 120 operations/min
Durability (x 104 operations)
■ Mechanical Durability
(for ZC-Q55)
OT (mm)
Operating temperature: 20±2°C
Operating humidity: 65±5%
Operating frequency: 20 operations/min
Switching current (A)
Nomenclature
Changing the Terminal Protective Cover around allows the cable to be pulled out from either the right or the left.
Roller
Plunger
Case
NC fixed contact
Moving contact
Switch
NO fixed contact
Seal rubber
Packing
Terminal
Protective
Cover
Common
terminal
(COM)
Normally
open
terminal
(NO)
Normally
closed
terminal
(NC)
Note: M4 binding head screws (with toothed washers) are used as the terminal screws.
F-112
Enclosed Switch [email protected]
Dimensions
Note: 1. All units are in millimeters unless otherwise indicated.
2. Unless otherwise specified, a tolerance of ±0.4 mm applies to all dimensions.
Plunger
ZC-D55
14 dia
7.8 dia.
(see note)
22 max.
15
Terminal
Protective
Cover
Panel Mount Plunger
ZC-Q55
(21 × 21)
Note: Stainless steel plunger
Seal rubber (NBR)
Two, 4.3±0.1 dia.
mounting holes
7.8 dia.
(see note 1)
M14 × 1 mounting screw
Two hexagon nuts
(thickness: 3
width: 17)
22 max.
(15)
Terminal
Protective
Cover
Two, 4.3±0.1 dia.
mounting holes
Limit
Switches
(See
note 2)
Note: 1. Stainless steel plunger
2. The length of the imperfect threads
is 1.5 mm maximum.
3. Do not use the M14 mounting
(21 × 21)
screw and the case mounting hole
Seal rubber (NBR)
at the same time.
Enclosed Switch
[email protected]
F-113
11 dia. × 4.7
(see note 1)
Set position
indication line
Two hexagon nuts
(thickness: 3
width: 17)
M14 × 1 mounting
screw
Panel Mount Roller Plunger
ZC-Q2255
(See
note 2)
22 max.
15
Terminal
Protective
Cover
Two, 4.3±0.1 dia.
mounting holes
Panel Mount Crossroller Plunger
Set position
ZC-Q2155
Note: 1. Stainless sintered alloy roller
2. The length of the imperfect
(21 × 21)
threads is 1.5 mm maximum.
3. Do not use the M14 mounting
Seal rubber (NBR)
screw and the case mounting
hole at the same time.
11 dia. × 4.7
(see note 1)
indication
line
M14 × 1 mounting
screw
Two hexagon nuts
(thickness: 3
width: 17)
Note: 1. Stainless sintered alloy roller
2. The length of the imperfect
threads is 1.5 mm maximum.
3. Do not use the M14 mounting
screw and the case mounting
Seal rubber (NBR)
hole at the same time.
22 max.
15
Sealed Roller Plunger
ZC-N2255
(21 × 21)
Two, 4.3±0.1 dia.
mounting holes
Terminal
Protective
Cover
9.5 dia. × 4.7
(see note)
Rubber boot
(chloroprene
rubber)
22 max.
Note: Stainless sintered alloy roller
15
Terminal
Protective
Cover
(21 × 21)
Seal rubber (NBR)
Two, 4.3±0.1 dia.
mounting holes
Sealed Crossroller Plunger
ZC-N2155
9.5 dia. × 4.7
(see note)
Rubber boot
(chloroprene
rubber)
22 max.
15
Terminal
Protective
Cover
Short Hinge Roller Lever
ZC-W55
t=1
(see note)
(21 × 21)
Note: Stainless sintered alloy roller
Seal rubber (NBR)
Two, 4.3±0.1 dia.
mounting holes
34.6
50R
5
22 max.
15
Terminal
Protective
Cover
F-114
Enclosed Switch [email protected]
Two, 4.3±0.1 dia.
mounting holes
(21 × 21)
Note: Stainless steel lever
Seal rubber (NBR)
Hinge Lever
ZC-W155
t=1
(see note)
34.6
70R
22 max.
Note: Stainless steel lever
15
Terminal
Protective
Cover
Short Hinge Roller Lever
ZC-W255
t=1
(see note1)
(21 × 21)
Two, 4.3±0.1 dia.
mounting holes
Seal rubber (NBR)
12.7 dia. × 7.5
(see note 2)
34.6
50R
Note: 1. Stainless steel lever
2. Stainless steel roller
22 max.
15
t=1
(see note1)
(21 × 21)
Seal rubber (NBR)
Two, 4.3±0.1 dia.
mounting holes
12.7 dia. × 7.5
(see note 2)
34.6
Limit
Switches
Hinge Roller Lever
ZC-W2155
Terminal
Protective
Cover
70R
22 max.
15
Terminal
Protective
Cover
12.7 dia. × 7.5
(see note 2)
34.6
t=1
(see note1)
Seal rubber (NBR)
Two, 4.3±0.1 dia.
mounting holes
Operating
direction
One-way Action Short Hinge Roller Lever
ZC-W355
Note: 1. Stainless steel lever
2. Stainless steel roller
(21 × 21)
Angle of
roller
swing:
90° 54R
22 max.
Note: 1. Stainless steel lever
2. Stainless steel roller
15
One-way Action Hinge Roller Lever
ZC-W3155
t=1
(see note1)
(21 × 21)
Two, 4.3±0.1
dia. holes
Terminal
Protective
Cover
Seal rubber (NBR)
Operating
direction
12.7 dia. × 7.5
(see note 2)
34.6
Angle of
73R roller
swing:
90°
22 max.
15
Terminal
Protective
Cover
Two, 4.3±0.1 dia.
mounting holes
(21 × 21)
Note: 1. Stainless steel lever
2. Stainless steel roller
Seal rubber (NBR)
Enclosed Switch
[email protected]
F-115
■ Operation Indicator-equipped Models
All the models can be equipped upon request with a operation indicator to facilitate maintenance and inspection.
Because the indicator is incorporated in the Terminal Protective Cover, the dimensions of the Limit Switch are not affected. In this model, the lead
wire is to be connected to the screw terminal. (A connecting washer is provided on the tip of the lead wire).
The lead wire can be connected to either the NC or NO terminal.
Operating characteristics are the same as the standard model from which the operation indicator equipped model is fabricated.
AC Operation
DC Operation
The operating voltage range is from 90 to 250 VAC.
The DC-operated is provided with an LED indicator.
The dimensions are the same as the standard type. The top of the
Terminal Protective Cover is transparent to allow checking the operation easily.
Since a rectifier stack is incorporated into the unit to permit reversing
the polarity, this type can also operate on AC power source. An external 24VDC power supply can be used, eg. OMRON S8VS or S82K.
When placing your order for the indicator equipped, AC-operated
model, add suffix “L” to the end of the model number.
The LED projects from the housing for easy visibility.
Example:
Standard type:
ZC-Q2255
Indicator equipped type: ZC-Q2255-L
When placing your order, add suffix “L2” to “L5” to the model number
of the standard type.
Example:
Standard type:
ZC-Q2255
Indicator equipped type: ZC-Q2255-L2
Neon lamp position
Terminal Protective Cover (transparent)
LED
Contact Circuit
Type
Voltage rating
Leakage current
NC terminal
Power source
Neon lamp
R = 240 kΩ
Internal
resistance
L2
12 V
Approx. 2.4 mA
4.3 kΩ
L4
24 V
Approx. 1.2 mA
18 kΩ
Contact Circuit
Load
NC terminal
Power source
Built-in switch
LED
Resistance
NO terminal
Power source
Built-in switch
Load
Load
Built-in switch
NO terminal
Power source
Built-in switch
R = 240 kΩ
Neon lamp
Note: If the wiring is as shown above, the operation of the respective
parts will be as follows:
Contact
NC
NO
Neon lamp
Load
Load
Actuator
ON
Does not operate
Operates
OFF
Operates
Does not
operate
ON
Does not operate
Does not
operate
OFF
Operates
Operates
Resistance
LED
Note: If the wiring is as shown above, the operation of the respective
parts will be as follows:
Contact
NC
NO
F-116
Enclosed Switch [email protected]
LED
Load
Actuator
ON
Does not operate Operates
OFF
Operates
ON
Does not operate Does not operate
OFF
Operates
Does not operate
Operates
Molded Terminal Models
■ Molded Terminal Model
The molded-terminal model is available with right-hand, left-hand
and underside leads and is recommended for use where the Switch
is exposed to dust, oil or moisture.
The molded-terminal model is not approved by UL and CSA.
Note: When placing your order for the Switch, specify the required
length of V.C.T. cable in addition to the model number of the
Switch.
Example:
Standard type:
ZC-Q2155
Location of lead output: Underside
Length of lead:
1 m (V.C.T. lead)
When placing your order for the above Switch, specify the model
number as ZC-Q2155-MD VCT 1 m.
MR
ML
MD
Suffix by Location of Lead Outlet
Model
Limit
Switches
Location of lead output
COM, NC and NO
Right-hand
[email protected]
Left-hand
[email protected]
Underside
[email protected]
Lead Supplies
Leads
V.C.T. (vinyl cabtire cable)
Nominal
cross-sectional area
1.25 mm2
Finished outside
diameter
3 core: 10.5 dia.
Terminal connections
Black: COM
White: NO
Red:
NC
Enclosed Switch
Standard length
1, 3, 5 m
[email protected]
F-117
Precautions
■ Correct Use
Mounting Hole Dimensions
14.5+0.2
0 dia.
Dog Angle
When operating the roller type, be sure to set the dog angle to less
than 30° (even when operating at a low speed). Operating the model
at a dog angle exceeding 30° will soon cause abrasion or damage.
Do not apply a twisting force to the plunger. Set the OT to 70% to
100% of the specified value so that the actuator will not exceed the
OT.
Handling
When detaching the Terminal Protective Cover, insert a screwdriver
and apply a force in the opening direction. Do not use excess force to
remove the cover. Doing so may cause deformation in the fitting section and reduce the holding force.
Screwdriver
Tightening Torque
A loose screw may result in a malfunction. Be sure to tighten each
screw to the proper tightening torque as shown below.
No.
Type
Torque
1
Terminal screw
0.78 to 1.18 N·m
2
Panel mounting screw
4.90 to 7.84 N·m
3
Side mounting screw
1.18 to 1.47 N·m
Operation
With the ZC-Q22(21)55, an appropriate OT line is marked on the
plunger. Set the OT so that it is between the two X-surface lines.
Appropriate OT line
X-surface
Terminal Protective Cover
Rubber packing
Rubber packing
• A 8.5- to 10.5-dia. cable can be applied as seal rubber for the lead
wire outlet. (Use two- or three-core cable of VCT1.25 mm2.)
• Use weather-proof rubber (chloroprene rubber) as seal rubber for
the ZC-N22(21)55.
Micro-load Applicable Ranges
Using a standard load switch for opening and closing a micro-load
circuit may cause wear on the contacts. Use the switch within the
operating range. (Refer to the diagram below.) Even when using
micro-load models within the operating range shown below, if inrush
current occurs when the contact is opened or closed, it may cause
the contact surface to become rough, and so decrease life expectancy. Therefore, insert a contact protection circuit where necessary.
The minimum applicable load is the N-level reference value. This
value indicates the malfunction reference level for the reliability level
of 60% (λ60). The equation λ60 = 0.5 × 10−6/operations indicates that
the estimated malfunction rate is less than 1/2,000,000 operations
with a reliability level of 60%.
Voltage (VDC)
When mounting the Terminal Protective Cover to the case, align the
cover on the case and then press the cover down to mount it firmly. If
the cover is pressed down in an inclined position, rubber packing will
deform and thus affect the sealing capability.
0.8 W
26 mA 100 mA
30
24
Mounting
• When mounting the Switch with screws on a side surface, fasten
the Switch with M4 screws and use washers, spring washers, etc.,
to ensure secure mounting.
Mounting Holes
Operating area for
[email protected] microload models
12
Unusable
area
5
Two, 4.3-dia. or M4 screw holes
Operating
area for
[email protected]
standard
models
0
0.1
1 mA
1
100 mA 160 mA
10
100
1,000
Current (mA)
Model
• When mounting the Panel Mount-type Enclosed Switch (ZC-Q55,
ZC-Q2255, or ZC-Q2155) with screws on a side surface, remove
the hexagonal nuts from the actuator.
[email protected]
Minimum
1 mA at 5 VDC
applicable load
[email protected]
160 mA at 5 VDC
ALL DIMENSIONS SHOWN ARE IN MILLIMETERS.
To convert millimeters into inches, multiply by 0.03937. To convert grams into ounces, multiply by 0.03527.
Cat. No. C025-E1-09
F-118
In the interest of product improvement, specifications are subject to change without notice.
Enclosed Switch [email protected]
Enclosed Switches
ZE/ZV/XE/XV
Long Service Life and Large Breaking Power
• ZE, ZV, and ZV2 incorporate Model Z Basic Switches with rugged diecast cases.
• Available with various models of built-in switches (including split
contact model, maintained operation type, magnetic blowout
model) and various actuators.
Limit
Switches
Model Number Structure
■ Model Number Legend
@@[email protected]@
1 2
3
4
1. Built-in Switch
Z:
SPDT (AC)
X:
SPDT (DC)
2. Mounting Direction
E:
Side mounting
V:
Base mounting
V2: Diagonal side mounting
3. Actuator
Q:
Plunger
Q22:
Roller plunger
Q21:
Crossroller plunger
QA2:
Roller arm lever
QA277: One-way action roller arm lever
N:
Sealed plunger
N22:
Sealed roller plunger (ZE, ZV, ZV2 only)
N21:
Sealed crossroller plunger (ZE, ZV, ZV2 only)
NA2:
Sealed roller arm lever
NA277: Sealed one-way action roller arm lever
4. Conduit/Ground Terminal
None: G 1/2/without ground terminal
G1:
G 1/2/with ground terminal
G:
Pg13.5/with ground terminal
SG1: 1/2-14NPSM/with ground terminal
YG1: M20/with ground terminal
1
/2-14NPSM/without ground terminal
S:
Y:
M20/without ground terminal
Enclosed Switches
ZE/ZV/XE/XV
F-119
Ordering Information
■ List of Models
Standard Switches
Contact
Actuator
Side mounting
General
purpose
AC/DC
load
SPDT
DC load SPDT
Diagonal side mounting
Sealed
(Booted)
General
purpose
Sealed
(Booted)
Base mounting
General
purpose
Sealed
(Booted)
Plunger
ZE-Q-2
ZE-N-2
ZV2-Q-2
ZV2-N-2
ZV-Q-2
ZV-N-2
Roller plunger
ZE-Q22-2
ZE-N22-2
ZV2-Q22-2
ZV2-N22-2
ZV-Q22-2
ZV-N22-2
Crossroller plung- ZE-Q21-2
er
ZE-N21-2
ZV2-Q21-2
ZV2-N21-2
ZV-Q21-2
ZV-N21-2
Roller arm lever
ZE-QA2-2
ZE-NA2-2
ZV2-QA2-2
ZV2-NA2-2
ZV-QA2-2
ZV-NA2-2
One-way action
arm lever
ZE-QA277-2
ZE-NA277-2
ZV2-QA277-2
ZV2-NA277-2
ZV-QA277-2
ZV-NA277-2
Plunger
XE-Q-2
XE-N-2
XV2-Q-2
XV2-N-2
XV-Q-2
XV-N-2
Roller plunger
XE-Q22-2
---
XV2-Q22-2
---
XV-Q22-2
---
Crossroller plung- XE-Q21-2
er
---
XV2-Q21-2
---
XV-Q21-2
---
Roller arm lever
XE-QA2-2
XE-NA2-2
XV2-QA2-2
XV2-NA2-2
XV-QA2-2
XV-NA2-2
One-way action
arm lever
XE-QA277-2
XE-NA277-2
---
XV2-NA277-2
XV-QA277-2
XV-NA277-2
Note: 1. The diagonal side mounting model feature improved sealing property, improved mounting strength through use of M5 screws, increased
stability in seating with large mounting width (31 x 75 mm) and permit coupling of a number of Switch units.
2. ZE, ZV, and ZV2 series are approved by UL and CSA.
Specifications
■ Approved Standards
Agency
Standard
File No.
UL
UL508
E76675
CSA
CSA C22.2 No. 14
LR45746
Note: Models XE, XV, and XV2 are not approved by UL and CSA.
■ Approved Standard Ratings
UL/CSA
Model
ZE
Rated voltage
125 VAC
Current
Horsepower
15 A
1/8 HP
1/4 HP
125 VDC
0.5 A
---
250 VDC
0.25 A
250 VAC
480 VAC
F-120
Enclosed Switches ZE/ZV/XE/XV
■ Ratings
Contact
Contact
Rated voltage
Non-inductive load
Resistive load
NC
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
Note: 1.
2.
3.
4.
Inductive load
Lamp load
NO
NC
Inductive load
NO
NC
Motor load
NO
NC
NO
125 VAC
15 A
3A
1.5 A
15 A
5A
2.5 A
250 VAC
15 A
2.5 A
1.25 A
480 VAC
10 A
1.5 A
0.75 A
15 A
3A
1.5 A
6A
1.5 A
125 VDC
0.5 A
0.5 A
0.75 A
0.05 A
0.05 A
250 VDC
0.25 A
0.25 A
8 VDC
15 A
3A
3A
15 A
15 A
10 A
10 A
14 VDC
15 A
3A
3A
15 A
10 A
10 A
10 A
30 VDC
15 A
3A
3A
10 A
10 A
10 A
6A
125 VDC
10 A
3A
1.5 A
7.5 A
6A
6A
4A
250 VDC
3A
1.5 A
0.75 A
2A
1.5 A
2A
1A
0.03 A
0.03 A
The above figures are for standard currents.
Inductive loads have a power factor of 0.4 min. (AC) and a time constant of 7 ms max. (DC).
Lamp load has an inrush current of 10 times the steady-state current.
Motor load has an inrush current of 6 times the steady-state current.
Inrush current
NC
30 A max.
NO
15 A max.
Limit
Switches
■ Characteristics
Degree of protection
IP65 (see note 2)
Durability (see note 3)
Mechanical:
[email protected]: 10,000,000 operations min.
[email protected]: 1,000,000 operations min.
Electrical:
[email protected]: 500,000 operations min., for 15 A, 250 VAC resistive load
[email protected]: 100,000 operations min., for 10 A, 125 VDC resistive load
Operating speed
Plunger type: 0.01 mm to 0.5 m/s
Lever type: 0.02 mm to 0.5 m/s
Operating frequency
Mechanical: 120 operations/min
Electrical: 20 operations/min
Rated frequency
50/60 Hz
Insulation resistance
100 MΩ min. (at 500 VDC)
Contact resistance
15 mΩ max. (initial value)
Terminal temperature rise
50° max.
Dielectric strength
1,000 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 min between terminals of the same polarity
2,000 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 min between current-carrying metal part and ground, and between each
terminal and non-current-carrying metal part (1,500 VAC for [email protected] models and [email protected] models)
Vibration resistance
Malfunction: 10 to 55 Hz, 1.5-mm double amplitude (see note 4)
Shock resistance (see note 4)
Destruction: 1,000 m/s2 min.
Malfunction: 100 m/s2 min. (see note 5), 50 m/s2 min. (see note 6)
Ambient temperature (see note 1)
Operating: –10°C to 80°C (with no icing)
Ambient humidity
Operating: General-purpose type: 85% max.
Sealed type:
95% max.
Weight
Approx. 260 to 280 g
Note: 1. The above figures are initial values.
2. IP65 for @E-N models and IP60 for @E-Q models.
3. The values are calculated at an operating temperature of 5°C to 35°C, and an operating humidity of 40% to 70%. Contact your OMRON
sales representative for more detailed information on other operating environments.
4. At the operation limit positions.
5. Only for plunger, sealed plunger, roller arm lever, and sealed roller arm lever.
6. Only for crossroller plunger, sealed crossroller plunger, roller plunger, and sealed roller plunger.
Enclosed Switches
ZE/ZV/XE/XV
F-121
■ Operating Characteristics
Model
ZE-Q-2
XE-Q-2
ZE-Q22-2
2.45 to 3.43 N
5.00 N max.
ZE-Q21-2
2.45 to 3.43 N
RF min.
1.12 N
1.12 N
1.12 N
1.12 N
1.12 N
PT max.
0.4 mm
0.9 mm
0.5 mm
0.9 mm
0.5 mm
OT min.
5.5 mm
5.5 mm
3.6 mm
3.6 mm
3.6 mm
MD max.
0.05 mm
0.47 mm
0.05 mm
0.47 mm
0.05 mm
OP
38.2±0.8 mm
Model
5.00 N max.
XE-Q22-2
OF
2.45 to 3.43 N
49.7±1 mm
XE-Q21-2
ZE-QA2-2
XE-QA2-2
ZE-QA277-2
RF min.
1.12 N
1.67 N
1.67 N
1.67 N
1.67 N
2.35 N
PT max.
0.9 mm
4 mm
6 mm
4 mm
6 mm
2 mm
OT min.
3.6 mm
6 mm
5.5 mm
6 mm
5.5 mm
5 mm
MD max.
0.47 mm
0.4 mm
0.72 mm
0.4 mm
0.72 mm
OP
49.7±1 mm
---
RF min.
PT max.
ZE-N22-2
ZE-N21-2
ZE-NA2-2
4.90 N
6.28 N
2.35 N
0.98 N
3 mm
1 mm
OT min.
4 mm
3.5 mm
MD max.
0.47 mm
OP
45.8±0.8 mm
Model
6.47 N
7.85 N
0.1 mm
45.8±0.8 mm
XE-N-2
10.20 N
5.59 N
ZE-N-2
5.00 N max.
OF
6.47N max.
XE-QA277-2
OF
Model
5.59 N max.
49.7±1 mm
XE-NA2-2
ZE-NA277-2
7.26 N
6.28 N
2.26 N
2.26 N
2.26 N
5 mm
6 mm
5 mm
6 mm
5.5 mm
6 mm
0.12 mm
0.4 mm
0.72 mm
0.4 mm
49.7±0.8 mm
---
XE-NA277-2
ZV(2)-Q-2
XV(2)-Q-2
RF min.
2.26 N
1.12 N
1.12 N
1.12 N
1.12 N
PT max.
6 mm
0.4 mm
0.9 mm
0.5 mm
0.9 mm
OT min.
5.5 mm
5.5 mm
5.5 mm
3.6 mm
3.6 mm
MD max.
0.72 mm
0.05 mm
0.47 mm
0.05 mm
0.47 mm
OP
---
63.7±0.8 mm (ZV-Q-2, XV-Q-2) (see note 1)
ZV(2)-Q21-2
5.00 N max.
XV(2)-Q21-2
2.45 to 3.43 N
XV(2)-Q22-2
7.26 N
Model
2.45 to 3.43 N
ZV(2)-Q22-2
OF
75.2±0.8 mm (ZV-Q-22.2, XV-Q21-2) (see note 2)
ZV(2)-QA2-2
5.00 N max.
5.00 N max.
5.59 N max.
XV(2)-QA2-2
6.47 N max.
ZV(2)-QA277-2
OF
2.45 to 3.43 N
5.59 N
RF min.
1.12 N
1.12 N
1.67 N
1.67 N
1.67 N
PT max.
0.5 mm
0.9 mm
4 mm
6 mm
4 mm
OT min.
3.6 mm
3.6 mm
6 mm
5.5 mm
6 mm
MD max.
0.05 mm
0.47 mm
0.4 mm
0.72 mm
0.4 mm
OP
75.2±0.8 mm (ZV-Q22-2, XV-Q21-2) (see note 3)
---
Note: 1. The OP of ZV2-Q-2/XV2-Q-2 is 24.2±0.8 mm.
2. The OP of ZV2-Q22-2/XV2-Q22-2 is 35.7±1 mm.
3. The OP of ZV2-Q21-2/XV2-Q21-2 is 35.7±0.8 mm.
Model
XV(2)-QA277-2
ZV(2)-N-2
7.85 N
XV(2)-N-2
ZV(2)-N22-2
ZV(2)-N21-2
ZV(2)-NA2-2
OF
6.47 N
10.20 N
4.90 N
RF min.
1.67 N
PT max.
6 mm
2.35 N
2.35 N
0.98 N
2.26 N
2 mm
3 mm
1 mm
5 mm
OT min.
5.5 mm
5 mm
4 mm
3.5 mm
6 mm
MD max.
0.72 mm
0.1 mm
0.47 mm
0.12 mm
0.4 mm
OP
---
71.4±0.8 mm (ZV-N-2, XV-N-2) (see note 1)
Note: 1. The OP of ZV2-N-2/XV2-N-2 is 31.9±0.8 mm.
2. The OP of ZV2-N22-2/ZV2-N21-2 is 35.7±0.8 mm.
Model
XV(2)-NA2-2
ZV(2)-NA277-2
7.26 N
RF min.
2.26 N
2.26 N
2.26 N
PT max.
6 mm
5 mm
6 mm
OT min.
5.5 mm
6 mm
5.5 mm
MD max.
0.72 mm
0.4 mm
0.72 mm
FP max.
---
OP
---
F-122
6.28 N
XV(2)-NA277-2
OF
7.26 N
Enclosed Switches ZE/ZV/XE/XV
6.28 N
75.2±0.8 mm (ZV-N22-2, ZV-N21-2) (see note 2) ---
■ Contact Form
[email protected], [email protected], [email protected]
[email protected], [email protected], [email protected]
NC
NC
COM
COM
NO
Note:
NO
EN60947-5-1
With the [email protected], [email protected], and
[email protected], be sure to connect
COM to the + terminal.
Engineering Data
■ Electrical Durability
125 VAC
250 VAC
480 VAC
Switching current (A)
125 VDC
250 VDC
Switching current (A)
Operating frequency:
20 operations/min
OT: Full stroke
125 VAC
250 VAC
480 VAC
Switching current (A)
Durability (x 104 operations)
XE (L/R = 7 ms)
ZE (cosφ = 0.4)
Durability (x 104 operations)
Operating frequency:
20 operations/min
OT: Full stroke
Limit
Switches
Durability (x 104 operations)
Operating frequency:
20 operations/min
OT: Full stroke
Durability (x 104 operations)
XE (L/R = 0)
ZE (cosφ = 1)
Operating frequency:
20 operations/min
OT: Full stroke
125 VDC
250 VDC
Switching current (A)
Enclosed Switches
ZE/ZV/XE/XV
F-123
Nomenclature
Pin plunger
Tightening band
Rubber cap (CR)
Case
Separator
Built-in switch
Conduit
opening
Terminal
Cover
Seal rubber (NBR)
Dimensions
Note: 1. All units are in millimeters unless otherwise indicated.
2. Unless otherwise specified, a tolerance of ±0.4 mm applies to all dimensions.
3. In the drawings for the Base Mounting Type Switches (ZV), the mounting surfaces (flanges) are shown by lines of alternate long and two
short dashes.
Side Mounting
Plunger
ZE-Q-2, XE-Q-2
JIS B0202 G1/2
12R
(see note) Effective thread: 4 threads min.
Two, M4
(length: 45)
PT
17
OP
19
25.5
23
2.1
±0.1
25.4±0.3
Roller Plunger
ZE-Q22-2, XE-Q22-2
Note: Stainless steel plunger
24
25.4±0.12
86
12.7 dia. × 4.8 (see note)
JIS B0202 G1/2
Effective thread:
4 threads min.
Two, M4
(length: 45)
PT
17
OP
19
25.5
23
2.1
±0.1
25.4±0.3
Note: Stainless steel roller
24
25.4±0.12
86
Crossroller Plunger
ZE-Q21-2, XE-Q21-2
Two, M4
(length: 45)
12.7 dia. × 4.8 (see note)
JIS B0202 G1/2
Effective thread:
4 threads min.
17
PT
OP
19
23
25.4±0.3
25.5
2.1
±0.1
25.4±0.12
86
F-124
Enclosed Switches ZE/ZV/XE/XV
24
Note: Stainless steel roller
Roller Arm Lever
ZE-QA2-2, XE-QA2-2
19.1 dia. × 7.9 (see note 1)
(See note 2)
39.7
(23.1)
JIS B0202 G1/2
Effective thread:
4 threads min.
Two, M4
(length: 45)
44±0.8
17
19.3
25.5
23
Note: 1. Stainless sintered roller
2. Adjustable between 0° and 225°
2.1
±0.1
25.4±0.3
One-way Action Roller Arm Lever
ZE-QA277-2, XE-QA277-2
19
24
25.4±0.12
86
18.7 dia. × 9 (see note 1)
← Operate in this direction only
(See note 2)
39.7
(40)
JIS B0202
17.4R
G1/2
Effective
thread: 4
threads min.
44±0.8
17
19.3
19
Note: 1. Stainless sintered alloy roller
2. Adjustable between 0° and 225°
25.5
23
2.1
±0.1
25.4±0.3
Limit
Switches
Two, M4
(length: 45)
24
25.4±0.12
86
Sealed Plunger
ZE-N-2, XE-N-2
Two, M4
(length: 45)
12R (see note)
JIS B0202 G1/2
Effective thread:
4 threads min.
PT
OP
17
19
25.5
23
2.1
±0.1
25.4±0.3
Note: Stainless steel plunger
24
25.4±0.12
86
Sealed Roller Plunger
ZE-N22-2
12.7 dia. × 4.8 (see note)
Two, M4
(length: 45)
PT
JIS B0202 G1/2
Effective thread:
4 threads min.
OP
17
19
25.5
23
2.1
±0.1
25.4±0.3
Sealed Crossroller Plunger
ZE-N21-2
Note: Stainless steel roller
24
25.4±0.12
86
12.7 dia. × 4.8 (see note)
Two, M4
(length: 45)
PT
JIS B0202 G1/2
Effective thread:
4 threads min.
17
OP
19
23
25.5
Note: Stainless steel roller
25.4±0.3
2.1
±0.1
24
25.4±0.12
86
Enclosed Switches
ZE/ZV/XE/XV
F-125
Sealed Roller Arm Lever
ZE-NA2-2, XE-NA2-2
19.1 dia. × 7.9 (see note 1)
(See note 2)
39.7
(23.1)
Two, M4
(length: 45)
JIS B0202
G1/2
Effective thread:
4 threads min.
53.4±0.8
17
19
19.3
25.5
23
2.1
±0.1
25.4±0.3
Note: 1. Stainless steel roller
2. Adjustable between 0° and 225°
24
25.4±0.12
86
One-way Action Sealed Roller Arm Lever
ZE-NA277-2, XE-NA277-2
← Operates in this direction only
18.7 dia. × 9 (see note 1)
(See note 2)
(40)
39.7
17.4R
JIS B0202
G1/2
Effective thread:
4 threads min.
Two, M4
(length: 45)
17
53.4±0.8
19.3
19
25.5
23
2.1
±0.12
25.4±0.3
24
Note: 1. Stainless steel roller
2. Adjustable between 0° and 225°
25.4±0.12
86
Mounting Hole
Two, 4.3 dia.
mounting holes or
M4 screw holes
25.4±0.1
Base Mounting/Diagonal Side Mounting
Plunger
ZV(2)-Q-2, XV(2)-Q-2
t = 3 (ZV-Q-2/XV-Q-2 flange)
53R
41.3±0.2 54
10.5±0.3
Two, 4.3±0.2 dia. holes
12R (see note 1.)
JIS B0202
17
G1/2 Effective
thread: 4
threads min.
36.6
PT
26.1
5
31±0.2 OP (see note 4)
23
3
75±0.2
25.4±0.3
86
+0.2
Two, 5.4 −0 dia. holes (see note 2)
F-126
Enclosed Switches ZE/ZV/XE/XV
OP (see note 3)
5.5
Note: 1. Stainless steel plunger
2. Only the ZV2-Q-2 and
XV2-Q-2 incorporate
mounting holes.
3. OP for ZV2-Q-2 and
XV2-Q-2 is 24.2 ±0.8 mm.
Roller Plunger
ZV(2)-Q22-2, XV(2)-Q22-2
t = 3 (ZV-Q22-2/XV-Q22-2 flange)
53R
41.3±0.2 54
10.5±0.3
Two, 4.3±0.2 dia. holes
12.7 dia. × 4.8 (see note 1)
JIS B0202 G1/2
Effective thread:
4 threads min.
36.6
PT
26.1
17
OP (see note 3)
5
Note: 1. Stainless steel roller
2. Only the ZV2-Q22-2 and
XV2-Q22-2 incorporate mounting holes.
3. OP for ZV2-Q22-2 and
XV2-Q22-2 is 35.7 ±1 mm.
31±0.2 OP (see note 4)
23
3
75±0.2
5.5
25.4±0.3
86
−0 dia. holes (see note 2)
Two, 5.4+0.2
Crossroller Plunger
ZV(2)-Q21-2, XV(2)-Q21-2
t = 3 (ZV-Q21-2/XV-Q21-2 flange)
53R
Limit
Switches
41.3±0.2 54
10.5±0.3
Two, 4.3±0.2 dia. holes
36.6
12.7 dia. × 4.8 (see note 1)
JIS B0202
G1/2
Effective
thread: 4
threads min.
26.1
PT
17
OP (see note 3)
5
Note: 1.
2.
31±0.2 OP (see note 4)
3.
23
3
75±0.2
5.5
25.4±0.3
86
−0 dia. holes (see note 2)
Two, 5.4+0.2
Roller Arm Lever
ZV(2)-QA2-2, XV(2)-QA2-2
Stainless steel roller
Only the ZV2-Q21-2 and XV2-Q21-2
incorporate mounting holes.
OP for ZV2-Q21-2 and XV2-Q21-2 is
35.7 ±0.8 mm.
t = 3 (ZV-QA2-2/XV-QA2-2 flange)
53R
41.3±0.2
54
10.5±0.3
36.6
Two, 4.3±0.2 dia. holes
19.1 dia. × 7.9 (see note 1)
39.7
JIS B0202 23.1 max.
G1/2
17
Effective
19.3
thread: 4
threads min.
Note: 1. Stainless sintered alloy roller
2. Adjustment between 0° to 225°.
3. Only the ZV2-QA2-2 and XV2-QA2-2
incorporate mounting holes.
(See note 2)
30±0.8
69.5±0.8
23
3
86
25.4±0.3
Two, 5.4
+0.2
−0
dia. holes (see note 3)
Enclosed Switches
ZE/ZV/XE/XV
F-127
One-way Action Roller Arm Lever
ZV(2)-QA277-2, XV(2)-QA277-2
t = 3 (ZV-QA277-2/XV-QA277-2 flanges)
53R
18.7 dia. × 9 (see note 1)
Two, 4.3±0.2 dia. holes
Operates in this direction only
JIS B0202
G1/2
Effective
thread: 4
threads min.
(See note 2)
Note: 1. Stainless steel roller
2. Adjustment between 0° to 225°.
3. Only the ZV2-QA277-2 and
XV2-QA277-2 incorporate mounting
holes.
−0 dia. holes (see note 3)
Two, 5.4+0.2
t = 3 (ZV-N-2/XV-N-2 flange)
Sealed Plunger
ZV(2)-N-2, XV(2)-N-2
53R
41.3±0.2 54
10.6±0.3
Two, 4.3±0.2 dia. holes
36.6
26.1
12CR (see note 1)
JIS B0202
G1/2
17
Effective
thread: 4
threads min.
PT
OP (see note 3)
5
31±0.2 OP (see note 4)
23
3
75±0.2
25.4±0.3
86
+0.2
Two, 5.4 −0 dia. holes (see note 2)
Sealed Roller Plunger
ZV(2)-N22-2
5.5
Note: 1. Stainless steel plunger
2. Only the ZV2-N-2 and XV2-N-2
incorporate mounting holes.
3. OP for ZV2-N-2 and XV2-N-2 is
31.9 ±0.8 mm.
t = 3 (ZV-N22-2 flange)
53R
41.3±0.2 54
10.6±0.3
Two, 4.3±0.2 dia. holes
12.7 dia. × 4.8 (see note 1)
JIS B0202
G1/2
17
Effective
thread: 4
threads min.
36.6
PT
26.1
5
31±0.2
23
3
F-128
75±0.2
25.4±0.3
86
+0.2
Two, 5.4 −0 dia. holes (see note 2)
Enclosed Switches ZE/ZV/XE/XV
Note: 1. Stainless steel roller
2. Only the ZV2-N22-2 incorpo incorporate mounting holes.
OP (see note 4)
3. OP for ZV2-N22-2 is 35.7 ±0.8 mm.
OP (see note 3)
5.5
Sealed Crossroller Plunger
ZV(2)-N21-2
t = 3 (ZV flange)
53R
41.3±0.2 54
10.6±0.3
Two, 4.3±0.2 dia. holes
12.7 dia. × 4.8 (see note 1)
36.6
26.1
PT
JIS B0202 G1/2
Effective thread: 4
threads min.
OP (see note 3)
5
OP (see note 4)
31±0.2
23
3
75±0.2
5.5
25.4±0.3
86
−0 dia. holes (see note 2)
Two, 5.4+0.2
Note: 1. Stainless steel roller
2. Only the ZV2-N21-2 incorporate mounting holes.
3. OP for ZV2-N21-2 is 35.7
±0.8 mm.
Sealed Roller Arm Lever
ZV(2)-NA2-2, XV(2)-NA2-2
t=3 (ZV-NA2-2/XV-NA2-2 flanges)
19.1 dia. × 7.9 (see note 1)
Limit
Switches
53R
Two, 4.3±0.2 dia.
(See note 2)
Note: 1. Stainless steel roller
2. Adjustment between 0° to 225°.
3. Only the ZV2-NA2-2 and XV2-NA2-2
incorporate mounting holes.
JIS B0202 G1/2
Effective thread:
4 threads min.
−0 dia. holes (see note 3)
Two, 5.4+0.2
One-way Action Sealed Roller Arm Lever
ZV(2)-NA277-2, XV(2)-NA277-2
t=3 (ZV-NA277-2/XV-NA277-2 flanges)
53R
18.7 dia. × 9 (see note 1)
JIS B0202
G1/2
Effective
thread: 4
threads min.
Two,
4.3±0.2 dia.
Operates in this direction only
(See note 2)
17.4R
Note: 1. Stainless steel roller
2. Adjustment between 0° to 225°.
3. Only the ZV2-NA277-2 and
XV2-NA277-2 incorporate mounting
holes.
−0 dia. holes (see note 3)
Two, 5.4+0.2
Enclosed Switches
ZE/ZV/XE/XV
F-129
Precautions
■ Correct Use
Mounting
Mounting
Mounting Holes
With the Roller Lever-type Enclosed Switches, the roller arm has
been temporarily tightened prior to shipment, so that its position may
be adjusted later. When mounting the Switch, be sure to re-tighten
the roller arm so as to prevent it from becoming loose during operation.
Side Mounting
Bottom Mounting
Two, 4.3 dia.
mounting holes or
M4 screw holes
Two, 4.3 dia.
mounting holes or
M4 screw holes
To adequately maintain the seals at the mounting screw section on
the side of the Enclosed Switch, insert each O-ring correctly and
secure it with the lock nut.
To provide the Switch with improved sealing property, use of the SC
Connector is recommended.
When routing wires into the conduit opening, be sure that cuttings
and other foreign matter do not enter the Switch.
Side Diagonal Mounting
Two, 5.4 dia.
mounting holes or
M5 screw holes
Environmental Precautions
Sealing materials may deteriorate when used outdoors or when
exposed to cutting oil, solvents, or chemicals. Check this on actual
equipment and, if deterioration is foreseen, consult your OMRON
representative in advance.
Be sure to protect part A with grease in order to maintain the
mechanical life and performance of the Limit Switch. The use of
molybdenum disulfide grease is recommended.
Operation
• Operating method, shape of cam or dog, operating frequency, and
the overtravel (OT) have significant effect on the service life and
precision of the Limit Switch. Make sure that the shape of the cam
is smooth enough.
• Check that OT has a sufficient margin. The actual OT should be
rated OT x 0.7 to 1.
Dedicated Wrench
Tightening Torque
A loose screw may result in a malfunction. Be sure to tighten each
screw to the proper tightening torque as shown below.
No.
Type
Torque
1
Cover mounting screw
1.18 to 1.37 N·m
2
Switch mounting screw (see note 1)
1.18 to 1.37 N·m
3
Switch mounting screw (see note 2)
4.90 to 5.88 N·m
4
Switch terminal screw (M4 screws for
head)
0.78 to 1.18 N·m
5
Roller arm mounting nut
4.90 to 5.88 N·m
Note: 1. This torque range applies to side mounting or bottom
mounting. (M4 screws for head)
2. This torque range applies to side diagonal mounting. (M5
Allen-head bolt)
The roller arm can be set freely within a range of 225° after loosening
the nut.
The roller arm mounting bracket can be set in any direction after
loosening the nut.
A dedicated wrench is provided separately.
Model: SUPANA FOR ZE
Make sure that the nut is free of foreign substances when the nut is
loosened.
ALL DIMENSIONS SHOWN ARE IN MILLIMETERS.
To convert millimeters into inches, multiply by 0.03937. To convert grams into ounces, multiply by 0.03527.
Cat. No. C020-E1-09
F-130
In the interest of product improvement, specifications are subject to change without notice.
Enclosed Switches ZE/ZV/XE/XV
General-purpose Basic Switch
A
High-capacity Switch Capable of Handling
20 A Loads with Large Inrush Currents
Limit
Switches
• Same shape as OMRON Z Basic Switches except in pin plunger
position, yet endures inrush currents as large as 75 A.
Model Number Structure
■ Model Number Legend
[email protected]@
1
2 3
4
1. Ratings
20: 20 A (250 VAC)
2. Contact Gap
G:
0.5 mm
3. Actuator
None: Pin plunger
D:
Short spring plunger
Q:
Panel mount plunger
Q21: Panel mount cross roller plunger
Q22: Panel mount roller plunger
V:
Hinge lever
V2: Hinge roller lever
V21: Short hinge lever
V22: Short hinge roller lever
4. Terminals
None: Solder terminal
B:
Screw terminal (with toothed washer)
General-purpose Basic Switch
A
F-131
Ordering Information
■ List of Models
Actuator
Solder terminal
Screw terminal (-B)
Pin plunger
A-20G
A-20G-B
Short spring plunger
A-20GD
A-20GD-B
Panel mount plunger
A-20GQ
A-20GQ-B
Panel mount roller
plunger
A-20GQ22
A-20GQ22-B
Panel mount cross
roller plunger
---
A-20GQ21-B
Short hinge lever
A-20GV21
A-20GV21-B
Hinge lever
A-20GV
A-20GV-B
Short hinge roller
lever
A-20GV22
A-20GV22-B
Hinge roller lever
A-20GV2
A-20GV2-B
Note: Refer to Terminals in Model Z for solder and screw terminals.
Specifications
■ Approved Standards
Agency
Standard
File No.
UL
UL508
E41515
CSA
CSA C22.2 No. 55
LR21642
■ Approved Standard Ratings
UL508 (File No. E41515)
CSA C22.2 No.55 (File No. LR21642)
Rated voltage
A-20G
125 VAC
1 HP 10 A “L”
250 VAC
2 HP
480 VAC
20 A
125 VDC
0.5 A
250 VDC
0.25 A
F-132
General-purpose Basic Switch A
■ Ratings
Rated voltage
Non-inductive load
Resistive load
NC
NO
NC
125 VAC
250 VAC
500 VAC
20 A
20 A
15 A
7.5 A
7.5 A
4A
8 VDC
14 VDC
30 VDC
125 VDC
250 VDC
20 A
20 A
6A
0.5 A
0.25 A
3A
3A
3A
Note: 1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Inductive load
Lamp load
Inductive load
NO
1.5 A
1.5 A
1.5 A
0.5 A
0.25 A
NC
NO
Motor load
NC
20 A
20 A
10 A
12.5 A
8.3 A
2A
20 A
15 A
5A
0.05 A
0.03 A
12.5 A
12.5 A
5A
0.05 A
0.03 A
NO
The above values are for steady-state current.
Inductive load has a power factor of 0.4 min. (AC) and a time constant of 7 ms max. (DC).
Lamp load has an inrush current of 10 times the steady-state current.
Motor load has an inrush current of 6 times the steady-state current.
The ratings values apply under the following test conditions:
Ambient temperature: 20±2°C
Ambient humidity: 65±5%
Operating frequency: 20 operations/min
Limit
Switches
■ Characteristics
Operating speed
0.01 mm to 1 m/s (see note 1)
Operating frequency
Mechanical: 240 operations/min
Electrical:
20 operations/min (under rated load)
Insulation resistance
100 MΩ min. (at 500 VDC)
Contact resistance
15 mΩ max. (initial value)
Dielectric strength
1,000 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 min between terminals of the same polarity
2,000 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 min between the current-carrying metal parts and the ground, and between each terminal and non-current-carrying metal parts
Vibration resistance
Malfunction: 10 to 55 Hz, 1.5-mm double amplitude (see note 2)
Shock resistance
Destruction: 1,000 m/s2 {approx. 100G} max.
Malfunction: 300 m/s2 {approx. 30G} max. (see note 1, 2)
Durability
Mechanical: 1,000,000 operations min.
Electrical:
500,000 operations min.
Degree of protection
IP00
Degree of protection against Class I
electric shock
Proof tracking index (PTI)
175
Switch category
D (IEC335-1)
Ambient temperature
Operating: −25°C to 80°C (with no icing)
Ambient humidity
Operating: 35% to 85%
Weight
Approx. 23 to 58 g
Note: 1. The value is for the pin plunger. (Contact your OMRON representative for other models.)
2. Malfunction: 1 ms max.
■ Contact Form (SPDT)
General-purpose Basic Switch
A
F-133
■ Contact Specification
Item
Contacts
A-20
Shape
Rivet
Material
Silver alloy
Gap (standard value)
0.5 mm
Inrush current NC
75 A max.
NO
75 A max.
Engineering Data
■ Mechanical Durability
■ Electrical Durability
A-20G
10
7
5
10
Ambient temperature: 20±2°C
Ambient humidity: 65±5%
Without load
Operating frequency: 240 operations/min
3
2
1
0.7
0.5
1
0.2
0.1
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
250 VAC,
cosφ = 1
0.7
0.5
0.2
0.2
125 VAC,
cosφ = 0.4
2
0.3
0.1
125 VAC, cosφ = 1
3
0.3
0
Ambient temperature: 20±2°C
Ambient humidity: 65±5%
Operating frequency: 20 operations/min
7
5
Durability (x106 operations)
Durability (x106 operations)
A-20G
0.1
0
0.7 0.8
Overtravel (mm)
250 VAC, cosφ = 0.4
5
10
15
20
25
Switching current (A)
Dimensions
Note: 1. All units are in millimeters unless otherwise indicated.
2. Unless otherwise specified, a tolerance of ±0.4 mm applies to all dimensions.
■ Dimensions and Operating Characteristics
The models, illustrations, and graphics are for screw-terminal models. (The dimensions for models that are omitted here are the same as for pinplunger models.)
Pin Plunger
19.05±0.25
PT
A-20G-B
OF
4.2+0.075
−0.025 dia. hole
2.3 dia.
OP
24.2
4.2+0.075
−0.025
9.2
4.36+0.1
−0.05 dia.
NTLP: Anchored Frames in table above.
11.9
25.4±0.1
49.2
Short Spring Plunger
A-20GD-B
PT
OP
11.2
dia.
7.15
dia.
11.9SR (stainlesssteel plunger)
7.5
24.2
F-134
General-purpose Basic Switch A
OP
16.3±0.4 mm
OF
RF min.
PT max.
OT min.
MD max.
3.92 to 6.13 N
{400 to 625 gf}
2.79 N {285 gf}
1.3 mm
3 mm
0.2 mm
OP
26.2±0.5 mm
17.45+0.2
15 dia.
19.05±0.25
RF min.
PT max.
OT min.
MD max.
3.92 to 6.13 N
{400 to 625 gf}
2.79 N {285 gf}
1.3 mm
0.25 mm
0.2 mm
2.3SR (stainless-steel plunger)
Panel Mount Plunger
A-20GQ-B
OF
8.35 dia.
PT
11.9SR (stainless-steel plunger)
M12 × 1 mounting screw (see note 1)
(See note 2)
OP
Two hexagon nuts
(2 t × 14 width across flats)
13.1
16.3
RF min.
PT max.
OT min.
MD max.
3.92 to 6.13 N
{400 to 625 gf}
2.79 N (285 gf)
1.3 mm
5.6 mm
0.2 mm
OP
21.8±0.8 mm
OF
RF min.
PT max.
OT min.
MD max.
6.18 N {630 gf}
max.
2.75 N {280 gf}
1.3 mm
3.58 mm
0.35 mm
OP
33.4±1.2 mm
OF
RF min.
PT max.
OT min.
MD max.
6.18 N {630 gf}
max.
2.75 N {280 gf}
1.3 mm
3.58 mm
0.35 mm
OP
33.4±1.2 mm
OF
RF min.
PT max.
OT min.
MD max.
1.57 N {160 gf}
max.
0.41 N {42 gf}
6.5 mm
1.2 mm
1.2 mm
OP
19±0.8 mm
19.05±0.25
Two lock nuts
(2 t × 15.6 width across flats)
16 dia.
Note: 1. Do not use both M12 mounting screw and mounting holes at the same time.
2. Imperfect screw part with a maximum length of 1.5 mm.
Panel Mount Roller Plunger
A-20GQ22-B
PT
12.7 dia. × 4.8
(stainless-steel roller)
19.05±0.25
Two hexagon nuts
(3 t × 17 width across flats)
(See
OP
15.5 note 2)
Limit
Switches
16.3
M12 × 1 mounting screw
(see note 1)
16 dia.
Note: 1. Do not use both M12 mounting screw and mounting holes at the same time.
2. Imperfect screw part with a maximum length of 1.5 mm.
Panel Mount Cross Roller Plunger
A-20GQ21-B
12.7 dia. × 4.8
(stainlesssteel roller)
19.05±0.25
PT
Two hexagon nuts
(3 t × 17 width across flats)
(See
OP
15.5 note 2)
M12 × 1 mounting
screw (see note 1)
16 dia.
16.3
Note: 1. Do not use both M12 mounting screw and mounting holes at the same time.
2. Imperfect screw part with a maximum length of 1.5 mm.
Short Hinge Lever
24.56±0.25
A-20GV21-B
t=1
(stainlesssteel lever)
4.9
28.3R
PT
20.2
17.9
14.7 OP
General-purpose Basic Switch
A
F-135
Hinge Lever
A-20GV-B
24.56±0.25
t = 1 (stainless-steel lever)
63.5R
4.9
20.2
17.9
14.7
OF
RF min.
PT max.
OT min.
MD max.
0.69 N {70 gf}
max.
0.14 N {14 gf}
15.9 mm
4 mm
2.4 mm
OP
19±0.8 mm
OF
RF min.
PT max.
OT min.
MD max.
1.57 N {160 gf}
0.41 N {42 gf}
6.3 mm
1.2 mm
1.22 mm
OP
29.8±0.8 mm
OF
RF min.
PT max.
OT min.
MD max.
0.88 N {90 gf}
0.14 N {14 gf}
12 mm
2.4 mm
2.2 mm
OP
30.2±0.8 mm
.
Short Hinge Roller Lever
A-20GV22-B
24.56±0.25
9.5 dia. × 4 (plastic roller)
t=1
(stainlesssteel lever)
PT
26.2R
OP
20.2
17.9
14.7
Hinge Roller Lever
A-20GV2-B
24.56±0.25
t=1
(stainlesssteel lever)
PT
9.5 dia. × 4 (plastic roller)
48.4R
OP
20.2
17.9
14.7
■ Terminals
Screw Terminals (-B)
Solder Terminal
6.4
9.2
20
20
25.4±0.1 11.9
17.45±0.2
49.2
Three, M4 × 5.5
Terminal screws
(with toothed
washer)
Appropriate terminal screw tightening torque:
0.78 to 1.18 N⋅m {8 to 12 kgf⋅cm}.
F-136
General-purpose Basic Switch A
49.2
17.45±0.2
Precautions
Refer to the Technical Information for Basic Switches (Cat. No. C122) for common precautions.
■ Correct Use
Mounting
Use M4 mounting screws with plane washers or spring washers to
securely mount the Switch. Tighten the screws to a torque of 1.18 to
1.47 N·m {12 to 15 kgf·cm}.
The Switch can be panel mounted, provided that the hexagonal nut
of the actuator is tightened to a torque of 2.94 to 4.9 N·m {30 to
50 kgf·cm}.
Mounting Holes
Two, 4.2 dia. mounting holes or M4
Panel Mount Plunger
12.5+0.2
0
dia.
Panel Mount Roller Plunger
dia.
12.5+0.2
0
25.4+0.1
Limit
Switches
Panel-mounting ([email protected])
If a Switch is side-mounted with screws, remove the hexagonal nut of
the actuator.
If a Switch is side-mounted and secured with screws, make sure that
the angle or speed of the actuating object is not excessively large or
too high, otherwise the Switch may be damaged.
If a Switch is panel-mounted, pay utmost attention to make sure that
the actuating speed or OT distance is not excessively high or large.
Not doing so may damage the Switch.
■ Accessories (Order Separately)
Refer to Z/A/X/DZ Common Accessories for details about Terminal
Covers, Separators, and Actuators.
General-purpose Basic Switch
A
F-137
ALL DIMENSIONS SHOWN ARE IN MILLIMETERS.
To convert millimeters into inches, multiply by 0.03937. To convert grams into ounces, multiply by 0.03527.
Cat. No. B002-E1-07
F-138
In the interest of product improvement, specifications are subject to change without notice.
General-purpose Basic Switch A
Special-purpose Basic Switch
DZ
DPDT Basic Switch for Two Independent
Circuit Control
• Incorporates two completely independent built-in switches.
• Ideal for switching the circuits operating on two different voltages, and for controlling two independent circuits.
• Interchangeable with OMRON Z Basic Switches, as both
switches are identical in mounting hole dimensions, mounting
pitch and pin plunger position.
Limit
Switches
Model Number Structure
■ Model Number Legend
[email protected]@
1 2 3 4 5
4. Contact Form
1:
DPDT
5. Terminals
A:
Solder terminal
B:
Screw terminal
1. Ratings
10: 10 A (250 VAC)
2. Contact Gap
G:
0.5 mm
3. Actuator
None: Pin plunger
V:
Hinge lever
V22: Short hinge roller lever
V2: Hinge roller lever
W:
Hinge lever
W22: Short hinge roller lever
W2: Hinge roller lever
Ordering Information
■ List of Models
Actuator
OT
Solder terminal
Screw terminal
Pin plunger
0.13 mm min.
DZ-10G-1A
DZ-10G-1B
Hinge lever
1.6 mm min.
DZ-10GW-1A
DZ-10GW-1B
0.4 mm min.
DZ-10GV-1A
DZ-10GV-1B
0.9 mm min.
DZ-10GW22-1A
DZ-10GW22-1B
0.13 mm min.
DZ-10GV22-1A
DZ-10GV22-1B
Short hinge roller lever
Hinge roller lever
1.2 mm min.
DZ-10GW2-1A
DZ-10GW2-1B
0.26 mm min.
DZ-10GV2-1A
DZ-10GV2-1B
Special-purpose Basic Switch
DZ
F-139
Specifications
■ Approved Standards
Agency
■ Approved Standard Ratings
Standard
File No.
UL
UL508
E41515
CSA
CSA C22.2 No. 55
LR21642
UL508 (File No. E41515)/
CSA C22.2 No. 55 (File No. LR21642)
Rated voltage
DZ-10G
125 VAC
10 A 1/3 HP
250 VAC
10 A 1/4 HP
480 VAC
2A
125 VDC
0.5 A
250 VDC
0.25 A
■ Ratings
Rated voltage
Non-inductive load
Resistive load
NC
Inductive load
Lamp load
NO
NC
Inductive load
NO
NC
Inrush current
Motor load
NO
NC
NO
125 VAC
250 VAC
10 A
10 A
2A
1.5 A
1A
0.7 A
6A
4A
3A
2A
1.5 A
1A
8 VDC
14 VDC
30 VDC
10 A
10 A
10 A
3A
3A
3A
1.5 A
1.5 A
1.5 A
6A
6A
4A
5A
5A
3A
2.5 A
2.5 A
1.5 A
125 VAC
0.5 A
0.5 A
0.05 A
0.05 A
250 VDC
0.25 A
0.25 A
0.03 A
0.03 A
NC
NO
30 A max.
15 A max.
Note: 1. Inductive load has a power factor of 0.4 min. (AC) and a time constant of 7 ms max. (DC).
2. Lamp load has an inrush current of 10 times the steady-state current.
3. Motor load has an inrush current of 6 times the steady-state current.
■ Characteristics
Operating speed
0.1 mm to 1 m/s (at pin plunger)
Operating frequency
Mechanical: 240 operations/min
Electrical:
20 operations/min
Insulation resistance
100 MΩ min. (at 500 VDC)
Contact resistance
15 mΩ max. (initial value)
Dielectric strength
1,000 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 min between non-continuous terminals
1,500 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 min between current-carrying metal parts and non-current-carrying metal part,
and between current-carrying metal part and ground and between switches
Vibration resistance
Malfunction: 10 to 55 Hz, 1.5-mm double amplitude
Shock resistance
Destruction: 1,000 m/s2 {approx. 100G} max.
Malfunction: 300 m/s2 {approx. 30G} max. (See notes 1 and 2.)
Durability
Mechanical: 1,000,000 operations min.
Electrical:
500,000 operations min.
Ambient temperature
Operating: −25°C to 80°C (with no icing)
Ambient humidity
Operating: 35% to 85% max.
Weight
Approx. 30 to 50 g
Note: 1. The values are for pin plunger models. (Contact your OMRON representative for other models.)
2. Malfunction: 1 ms max.
■ Contact Form (DPDT)
COM1
NC1
NO1
COM2
NC2
NO2
F-140
Special-purpose Basic Switch DZ
Engineering Data
■ Mechanical Durability
(Pin Plunger)
Without load
Operating frequency:
240 operations/minute
50,000
Durability (x103 operations)
Durability (x103 operations)
100,000
70,000
■ Electrical Durability
(Pin Plunger)
30,000
10,000
7,000
5,000
3,000
10,000
7,000
5,000
Operating frequency:
20 operations/minute
Overtravel: 0.13 mm
cosφ = 1
3,000
125 VAC cosφ = 1
1,000
700
500
250 VAC cosφ = 1
300
2,000
1,000
0
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5 0.6
0.7
100
0.8
0
5
10
15
Switching current (A)
Overtravel (mm)
■ Dimensions and Operating Characteristics
Note: 1. All units are in millimeters unless otherwise indicated.
2. Unless otherwise specified, a tolerance of ±0.4 mm applies to all dimensions.
3. The solder terminal model has a suffix “-1A” in its model number and its omitted dimensions are the same as the corresponding dimensions of the pin plunger model.
Pin Plunger
DZ-10G-1B
PT
2.5SR (stainless-steel pin plunger)
3 dia.
0.4
23.3±0.25
OP
14.5
4.2+0.075
−0.025
OF max.
RF min.
PT max.
OT min.
MD max.
5.59 N {570 gf}
0.55 N {57 gf}
1.7 mm
0.13 mm
0.4 mm
OP
15.6±0.4 mm
OF max.
RF min.
OT min.
MD max.
1.67 N {170 gf}
0.27 N {28 gf}
1.6 mm
4 mm
FP max.
OP
46.3 mm
21.8±1 mm
OF max.
RF min.
PT max.
OT min.
MD max.
1.96 N {200 gf}
0.13 N {14 gf}
6 mm
0.4 mm
1.7 mm
OP
18.3±1 mm
8.2
4.2+0.075
−0.025 dia. hole
11.9
4.36+0.1
−0.05 dia.
25.4±0.1
49.2
17.45±0.2
Hinge Lever
DZ-10GW-1B
t = 1 (stainless-steel lever)
28.4
63.5R
4.9
FP
19.7 17.7
14.5 OP
*
8.2
+0.075
4.2 −0.025
11.9
+0.1
4.36 −0.05 dia.
25.4±0.1
49.2
4.2+0.075
−0.025 dia. hole
17.45±0.2
DZ-10GV-1B
PT
63.5R
t = 1 (stainless-steel lever)
1.1
4.9
17.7 19.7
OP 14.5
8.2
+0.075
4.2 −0.025
+0.075
11.9 4.2 −0.025 dia. hole
+0.1
4.36 −0.05 dia.
25.4±0.1
49.2
17.45±0.2
Special-purpose Basic Switch
DZ
F-141
Limit
Switches
Dimensions
Short Hinge Roller Lever
DZ-10GW22-1B
t = 1 (stainless-steel lever)
28.4
9.5 dia. × 4 (plastic roller)
26.2R
FP
OP
19.7 17.7
25.4±0.1
49.2
4.2+0.075
−0.025 dia. hole
39.7 mm
30.2±0.8 mm
OF max.
RF min.
PT max.
OT min.
MD max.
4.22 N {430 gf}
0.41 N {42 gf}
3 mm
0.13 mm
0.6 mm
OP
29.4±0.8 mm
OF max.
RF min.
OT min.
MD max.
2.09 N {213 gf}
0.41 N {42 gf}
1.2 mm
3.3 mm
FP max.
OP
47.6 mm
31.8±0.8 mm
OF max.
RF min.
PT max.
OT min.
MD max.
2.65 N {270 gf}
0.33 N {34 gf}
4 mm
0.26 mm
1.1 mm
OP
29.4±0.8 mm
17.45±0.2
t = 1 (Stainless-steel lever)
9.5 dia. × 4 (plastic roller)
PT
30.2R 1.1
OP
14.5
17.7
19.7
8.2
4.2+0.075
−0.025
+0.075
+0.1
4.36−0.05
dia.
FP max.
OP
8.2
11.9
DZ-10GV22-1B
3.92 N {400 gf}
0.83 N {85 gf}
0.9 mm
2.4 mm
14.5
4.2+0.075
−0.025
4.36+0.1
−0.05 dia.
OF max.
RF min.
OT min.
MD max.
25.4±0.1
11.9
4.2 −0.025 dia. hole
17.45±0.2
49.2
Hinge Roller Lever
9.5 dia. × 4 (plastic roller)
28.4
DZ-10GW2-1B
t = 1 (stainless-steel lever)
48.4R
FP
OP
19.7 17.7
14.5
8.2
4.2+0.075
−0.025
+0.1
4.36−0.05 dia.
25.4±0.1
11.9
4.2+0.075
−0.025 dia. hole
49.2
DZ-10GV2-1B
17.45±0.2
t = 1 (stainless-steel lever)
PT
9.5 dia. × 4 (plastic roller)
48.4R
1.1
OP
17.7
14.5
8.2
4.2+0.075
−0.025
4.36+0.1
−0.05 dia.
F-142
19.7
4.2+0.075
−0.025 dia. hole
25.4±0.1 11.9
49.2
Special-purpose Basic Switch DZ
17.45±0.2
■ Terminals
Solder Terminals (-1A)
Screw Terminals (-1B)
Six M3 pan head screws
(with toothed washer)
Precautions
Refer to the Technical Information for Basic Switches (Cat. No. C122) for common precautions.
■ Correct Use
Terminal Connection
Mounting
When soldering lead wires to the Switch, make sure that the capacity
of the soldering iron is 60 W maximum. Do not take more than 5 s to
solder any part of the Switch. Improper soldering may cause abnormal heat radiation from the Switch and the Switch may burn.
Use M4 mounting screws with plane washers or spring washers to
securely mount the Switch. Tighten the screws to a torque of 1.18 to
1.47 N·m {12 to 15 kgf·cm}
The characteristics of the Switch will deteriorate if a soldering iron
with a capacity of more than 60 W is applied to any part of the Switch
for 6 s or more.
Limit
Switches
■ Cautions
Mounting Holes
Two, 4.2 dia. mounting holes or
M4 screw holes
Operation
Make sure that the switching frequency or speed is within the specified range.
If the switching speed is extremely slow, the contact may not be
switched smoothly, which may result in a contact failure or contact
welding.
If the switching speed is extremely fast, switching shock may damage
the Switch soon. If the switching frequency is too high, the contact
may not catch up with the speed.
25.4 ± 0.1
■ Accessories (Order separately)
Refer to Z/A/X/DZ Common Accessories for details about Terminal
Covers, Separators, and Actuators.
The rated permissible switching speed and frequency indicate the
switching reliability of the Switch.
The life of a Switch is determined at the specified switching speed.
The life varies with the switching speed and frequency even when
they are within the permissible ranges. In order to determine the life
of a Switch model to be applied to a particular use, it is best to conduct an appropriate durability test on some samples of the model
under actual conditions.
Make sure that the actuator travel does not exceed the permissible
OT position. The operating stroke must be set to 70% to 100% of the
rated OT.
Special-purpose Basic Switch
DZ
F-143
ALL DIMENSIONS SHOWN ARE IN MILLIMETERS.
To convert millimeters into inches, multiply by 0.03937. To convert grams into ounces, multiply by 0.03527.
Cat. No. B060-E1-07
F-144
In the interest of product improvement, specifications are subject to change without notice.
Special-purpose Basic Switch DZ
High-temperature Basic Switch
TZ
Stable Operation at an Ambient Temperature
of 400°C
• Incorporates a ceramic insulator, cobalt-alloy spring, and special-alloy contact, thus ensuring high contact reliability at high
ambient temperature.
• Smoothly operates at an ambient temperature of 400°C.
Limit
Switches
Model Number Structure
■ Model Number Legend
[email protected]
1 2 3
1. Rating
1:
1 A, 250 VAC
2. Contact Gap
G:
0.5 mm
3. Actuator
None: Pin plunger
V:
Hinge lever
V2: Hinge roller lever
V22: Short hinge roller lever
Ordering Information
■ List of Model
Actuator
Model
Pin plunger
TZ-1G
Hinge lever
TZ-1GV
Short hinge roller lever
TZ-1GV22
Hinge roller lever
TZ-1GV2
High-temperature Basic Switch
TZ
F-145
Specifications
■ Ratings
Rated voltage
Non-inductive load (A)
Resistive load
NC
Inductive load (A)
Lamp load
NO
NC
Inductive load
NO
NC
Motor load
NO
NC
NO
125 VAC
250 VAC
1
1
0.9
0.45
0.45
0.3
1
1
1.5
0.45
0.75
0.3
8 VDC
14 VDC
30 VDC
125 VDC
1
1
1
0.4
0.9
0.9
0.9
0.05
0.45
0.45
0.45
0.05
1
1
1
0.4
1.5
1.5
1.5
0.05
1.5
1.5
1.5
0.05
Note: 1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
The above current ratings are the values of the steady-state current.
Inductive load has a power factor of 0.4 min. (AC) and a time constant of 7 ms max. (DC).
Lamp load has an inrush current of 10 times the steady-state current.
Motor load has an inrush current of 6 times the steady-state current.
The above ratings are tested under the following conditions.
1. Ambient temperature: 20±2 °C
2. Ambient humidity: 65±5%
3. Switching frequency: 20 times/min
■ Characteristics
Operating speed
0.05 mm to 1 m/s (see note 1)
Operating frequency
Mechanical: 60 operations/min
Electrical:
20 operations/min
Insulation resistance
100 MΩ min. (at 500 VDC)
Contact resistance
100 mΩ max. (initial value)
Dielectric strength
1,000 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 min between terminals of same polarity
1,500 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 min between current-carrying metal parts and ground and between each
terminal and non-current-carrying metal parts
Vibration resistance
Malfunction: 10 to 55 Hz, 1.5-mm double amplitude (see note 2)
Shock resistance
Destruction: 500 m/s2 {50G} max.
Malfunction: 300 m/s2 {30G} max. (see note 2)
Durability
Mechanical: 100,000 operations min.
Electrical:
50,000 operations min.
Degree of protection
IP00
Electric shock protection
Class I
Ambient temperature
Operating:
−65°C to 400°C (with no icing)
Ambient humidity
Operating:
35% to 85% max.
Weight
Approx. 45 to 54 g
Note: 1. This operating speed applies to switches with pin-type pushbuttons.
2. This refers to a malfunction period of 1 ms max.
■ Contact Specifications
Item
Contact
Inrush current
F-146
Specification
Cross bar
Material
Platinum alloy
Gap (standard value)
0.5 mm
NC
9 A max.
NO
4.5 A max.
High-temperature Basic Switch TZ
Nomenclature
Ceramic
pushbutton
Bracket
Fixed contact
Movable spring
Movable contact
Ceramic terminal block
Fixed contact
Dimensions
Note: 1. All units are in millimeters unless otherwise indicated.
2. Each dimension has a tolerance of ±0.4 mm unless otherwise specified.
Pin Plunger
TZ-1G
(Ceramic pushbutton)
8.2 dia.
3 dia.
Two, 3.56-dia. holes
OF max.
RF min.
PT max.
OT min.
MD max.
4.9 N {500 gf}
1.12 N {114 gf}
0.4 mm
0.13 mm
0.15 mm
OP
15.6±0.6 mm
OF max.
RF min.
PT max.
OT min.
MD max.
0.98 N {100 gf}
0.14 N {14 gf}
3.5 mm
4.6 mm
1.3 mm
OP
18±1.2 mm
OF max.
RF min.
PT max.
OT min.
MD max.
2.35 N {240 gf}
0.33 N {34 gf}
1.5 mm
1.9 mm
0.6 mm
OP
28.6±1.2 mm
Three, M3.5
11.4
Hinge Lever
TZ-1GV
(Stainless-steel lever)
63.5R
Two, 3.56-dia.
holes
Three, M3.5
11.4
Short Hinge Roller Lever
(Stainless-steel lever)
TZ-1GV22
9.5 dia. 4 (stainless-steel roller)
26.2R
Two, 3.56-dia.
holes
11.4
Three, M3.5
High-temperature Basic Switch
TZ
F-147
Limit
Switches
■ Dimensions and Operating Characteristics
Hinge Roller Lever
(Stainless-steel lever)
TZ-1GV2
9.5 dia. 4 (stainless-steel roller)
48.4R
OF max.
RF min.
PT max.
OT min.
MD max.
1.27 N {130 gf}
0.2 N {20 gf}
2.6 mm
3.5 mm
1 mm
OP
28.6±1.2 mm
Two, 3.56-dia.
holes
11.4
Three, M3.5
Precautions
Refer to the Technical Information for Basic Switches (Cat. No. C122) for common precautions.
■ Correct Use
Operation
Do not modify the Actuator and change the operating position.
Handling
The Switch has a ceramic casing. Do not drop the Switch from a
height of 30 cm or more. Doing so will break the casing.
Mounting
Be sure to turn OFF the power supply to the Switch before mounting,
dismounting, wiring, or working on the Switch for maintenance. Not
doing so may result in an electric shock or the Switch may burn.
Mount the switch with M3.5 stainless-steel screws with plane washer
and spring washers securely.
Use M3.5 stainless-steel mounting screws with plane washers or
spring washers to securely mount the Switch. Tighten the screws to
a torque of 0.69 to 0.98 N·m {7 to 10 kgf·cm}.
Mounting Holes
Two, 3.56-dia. mounting holes or
M3.5 screw holes
25.4 ± 0.1
Connect nickel-plated solderless terminals to the TZ. Each terminal
must be secured on the TZ with M3.5 nut.
Make sure that the switching speed is not extremely slow or do not
use the Switch so that the pushbutton will be set to a position
between the FP and OP.
Make sure that the pin-type pushbutton and the switching stroke are
on the same vertical line.
Make sure that the switching frequency or speed is within the specified range.
• If the switching speed is extremely slow, the contact may not be
switched smoothly, which may result in a contact failure or contact
welding.
• If the switching speed is extremely fast, switching shock may damage the Switch soon. If the switching frequency is too high, the contact may not catch up with the speed.
The rated permissible switching speed and frequency indicate the
switching reliability of the Switch.
The life of a Switch is determined at the specified switching speed.
The life varies with the switching speed and frequency even when
they are within the permissible ranges. In order to determine the life
of a Switch model to be applied to a particular use, it is best to conduct an appropriate durability test on some samples of the model
under actual conditions.
Make sure that the actuator travel does not exceed the permissible
OT position. The operating stroke must be set to 70% to 100% of the
rated OT.
Make sure that the ceramic case is free of metal powder or other
impurities.
ALL DIMENSIONS SHOWN ARE IN MILLIMETERS.
To convert millimeters into inches, multiply by 0.03937. To convert grams into ounces, multiply by 0.03527.
Cat. No. B102-E1-02
F-148
In the interest of product improvement, specifications are subject to change without notice.
High-temperature Basic Switch TZ
General-purpose Basic Switch
X
Direct Current Switch with Built-in Magnetic
Blowout
• Incorporates a small permanent magnet in the contact mechanism to deflect the arc to effectively extinguish it.
• Same shape and mounting procedures as the Z Basic Switches.
Limit
Switches
Model Number Structure
■ Model Number Legend
[email protected]@
1 2 3
4
1. Ratings
10: 10 A (125 VDC)
2. Contact Gap
G:
0.9 mm
3. Actuator
None: Pin plunger
D:
Short spring plunger
S:
Slim spring plunger
Q:
Panel mount plunger
Q21: Panel mount cross roller plunger
Q22: Panel mount roller plunger
L:
Leaf spring
W:
Hinge lever
W2: Hinge roller lever
W21: Short hinge lever
W22: Short hinge roller lever
W4: Low-force hinge lever
M:
Reverse hinge lever
M2: Reverse hinge roller lever
M22: Reverse short hinge roller lever
4. Terminals
None: Solder terminal
B:
Screw terminal (with toothed washer)
General-purpose Basic Switch
X
F-149
Ordering Information
■ List of Models
Actuator
Solder
Screw
Pin plunger
X-10G
X-10G-B
Slim spring
plunger
X-10GS
X-10GS-B
Short spring
plunger
X-10GD
X-10GD-B
Panel mount
plunger
X-10GQ
X-10GQ-B
Panel mount
roller plunger
X-10GQ22
X-10GQ22-B
Panel mount cross
roller plunger
X-10GQ21
Leaf spring
X-10GL
X-10GL-B
Short hinge lever
X-10GW21
X-10GW21-B
X-10GQ21-B
Actuator
Solder
Screw
Hinge lever
X-10GW
X-10GW-B
Low-force hinge
lever
X-10GW4
X-10GW4-B
Short hinge roller
lever
X-10GW22
X-10GW22-B
Hinge roller lever
X-10GW2
X-10GW2-B
Reverse hinge
lever
X-10GM
X-10GM-B
Reverse short
hinge roller lever
X-10GM22
X-10GM22-B
Reverse hinge
roller lever
X-10GM2
X-10GM2-B
Note: The plungers of reverse-type models are continuously pressed by the compression coil springs and the plungers are freed by operating the
levers.
Specifications
■ Approved Standards
Agency
Standard
File No.
UL
UL508
E41515
CSA
CSA C22.2 No. 55
LR21642
■ Approved Standard Ratings
UL508 (File No. E41515)
CSA C22.2 No.55 (File No. LR21642)
Rated voltage
X-10G
125 VDC
10 A
250 VDC
3A
F-150
General-purpose Basic Switch X
■ Ratings
Rated voltage
Non-inductive load
Resistive load
Inductive load
Lamp load
NC
Note: 1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
3A
3A
3A
3A
1.5 A
10 A
10 A
10 A
10 A
3A
8 VDC
14 VDC
30 VDC
125 VDC
250 VDC
Inductive load
NO
NC
10 A
10 A
10 A
6A
1.5 A
10 A
10 A
10 A
7.5 A
2A
1.5 A
1.5 A
1.5 A
1.5 A
0.75 A
Motor load
NO
NC
5A
5A
5A
5A
2A
NO
2.5 A
2.5 A
2.5 A
2.5 A
1.5 A
The above values are for the steady-state current.
Inductive load has a power factor of 0.4 min. (AC) and a time constant of 7 ms max. (DC).
Lamp load has an inrush current of 10 times the steady-state current.
Motor load has an inrush current of 6 times the steady-state current.
The above electrical ratings also apply to the AC voltage.
With the reverse-type models ([email protected]), the normally closed circuits and normally open circuits are reversed.
The ratings values apply under the following test conditions:
Ambient temperature: 20±2°C
Ambient humidity: 65±5%
Operating frequency: 20 operations/min
■ Characteristics
0.1 mm to 1 m/s (see note 1)
Operating frequency
Mechanical: 240 operations/min
Electrical:
20 operations/min
Insulation resistance
100 MΩ min. (at 500 VDC)
Contact resistance
15 mΩ max. (initial value)
Dielectric strength
1,500 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 min between terminals of the same polarity, between current-carrying metal parts and
the ground, and between each terminal and non-current-carrying metal parts
Vibration resistance
Malfunction: 10 to 55 Hz, 1.5-mm double amplitude (see note 2)
Shock resistance
Destruction: 1,000 m/s2 {approx. 100G} max.
Malfunction: 300 m/s2 {approx. 30G} max. (see note 1, 2)
Durability
Mechanical: 1,000,000 operations min.
Electrical:
100,000 operations min.
Degree of protection
IP00
Limit
Switches
Operating speed
Degree of protection against Class I
electric shock
Proof tracking index (PTI)
175
Switch category
D (IEC335-1)
Ambient temperature
Operating: −25°C to 80°C (with no icing)
Ambient humidity
Operating: 35% to 85% max.
Weight
Approx. 27 to 63 g
Note: 1. The values are for the pin plunger models. (Contact your OMRON representative for other models.)
2. Malfunction: 1 ms max.
■ Contact Specification
Item
■ Contact Form (SPDT)
X-10
Contacts
Material
Silver alloy
Gap (standard value)
0.9 mm
Inrush current
NC
30 A max.
NO
15 A max.
COM
NC
NC
Note: With the reverse-type models ([email protected]), the NC and NO terminal arrangements are reversed.
General-purpose Basic Switch
X
F-151
Engineering Data
■ Mechanical Durability
(Pin Plunger)
■ Electrical Durability
(Pin Plunger)
5,000
50,000
Durability (x103 operations)
10,000
7,000
5,000
Durability (x103 operations)
Ambient temperature: 20±2°C
Ambient humidity: 65±5%
Without load
Operating frequency: 240 operations/min
30,000
3,000
2,000
1,000
700
500
1,000
700
500
125 VDC L/R = 0
300
200
125 VDC
L/R = 7 ms
100
70
50
30
20
300
200
100
Ambient temperature: 20±2°C
Ambient humidity: 65±5%
Operating frequency: 20 operations/min
3,000
2,000
0
10
0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9
0
2
Overtravel (mm)
4
6
8
10
12
14
Switching current (A)
Dimensions
Note: 1. All units are in millimeters unless otherwise indicated.
2. Unless otherwise specified, a tolerance of ±0.4 mm applies to all dimensions.
■ Dimensions and Operating Characteristics
The models, illustrations, and graphics are for screw-terminal models. (The dimensions for models that are omitted here are the same as for pinplunger models.)
Pin Plunger
4.2+0.075
−0.025 dia.
X-10G-B
PT
23.3±0.25
2.3 dia.
2.3SR (see note 1)
(see note 2)
OP
24.2
9.2
4.2+0.075
−0.025
+0.1
4.36−0.05
dia.
11.9
X-10GS-B
OP
15.9±0.4 mm
OF max.
RF min.
PT max.
OT min.
MD max.
5.00 N {510 gf}
1.12 N {114 gf}
0.9 mm
1.6 mm
0.18 mm
OP
28.2±0.5 mm
OF max.
RF min.
PT max.
OT min.
MD max.
5.00 N {510 gf}
1.12 N {114 gf}
0.9 mm
1.6 mm
0.18 mm
OP
21.2±0.5 mm
Note: 1. Stainless-steel pin plunger
2. Three vent holes
Slim Spring Plunger
PT
5.00 N {510 gf}
1.12 N {114 gf}
0.9 mm
0.13 mm
0.18 mm
17.45±0.2
25.4±0.1
49.2
OF max.
RF min.
PT max.
OT min.
MD max.
23.3±0.25
See
note 1
5.2 dia.
4 dia.
(see note 2)
OP
9 dia.
24.2
Note: 1. Stainless-steel pin plunger (flat, 1R chamfering)
2. Vent holes (3 places)
Short Spring Plunger
X-10GD-B
12SR (see note 1)
PT
23.3±0.25
12.3 dia.
10 dia.
7.15 dia.
(see note 2)
OP
24.2
Note: 1. Plated iron plunger
2. Three vent holes
F-152
General-purpose Basic Switch X
Panel Mount Plunger
X-10GQ-B
23.3±0.25
PT
8.35 dia.
M12 × 1 mounting screw
11.9SR
(see
note 1)
Two hexagonal nuts
(2 t × 14 width across flats)
Two lock nuts
(2 t × 15.6 width across flats)
(see note 2)
See note 3
OP
13.1
16 dia.
16.3
OF max.
RF min.
PT max.
OT min.
MD max.
5.00 N {510 gf}
1.12 N {114 gf}
0.9 mm
5.5 mm
0.18 mm
OP
21.8±0.8 mm
OF max.
RF min.
PT max.
OT min.
MD max.
5.00 N {510 gf}
1.12 N {114 gf}
0.9 mm
3.6 mm
0.18 mm
OP
33.4±1.2 mm
OF max.
RF min.
PT max.
OT min.
MD max.
5.00 N {510 gf}
1.12 N {114 gf}
0.9 mm
3.6 mm
0.18 mm
OP
33.4±1.2 mm
OF max.
RF min.
OT min.
MD max.
1.96 N {200 gf}
0.14 N {14 gf}
1.6 mm (see note)
2.3 mm
FP max.
OP
22.1 mm
17.4±0.8 mm
Note: 1. Stainless-steel pin plunger
2. Three vent holes
3. Imperfect screw part with a maximum length of 1.5 mm.
Panel Mount Roller Plunger
X-10GQ22-B
23.3±0.25
PT
12.7 dia. × 4.8 (see note 1)
M12 × 1 mounting screw
OP
Two hexagonal nuts
(3 t × 17 width across flats)
See note 3
15.5
(see note 2)
Limit
Switches
16 dia.
16.3
Note: 1. Stainless-steel roller
2. Three vent holes
3. Imperfect screw part with a maximum length of 1.5 mm.
Panel Mount Cross Roller Plunger
X-10GQ21-B
23.3±0.25
PT
12.7 dia. × 4.8 (see note 1)
M12 × 1 mounting screw
Two hexagonal nuts
(3 t × 17 width across flats)
OP
15.5
See note 3
16.3
(see note 2)
16 dia.
Note: 1. Stainless-steel roller
2. Three vent holes
3. Imperfect screw part with a maximum length of 1.5 mm.
Leaf Spring
t = 0.3 (see note 1)
X-10GL-B
49.6±0.8
4.8
(see note 2)
FP OP
Note: 1. Stainless-steel spring lever
2. Three vent holes
Note: 1. Reference value
2. Be sure to use the switch at the
rated OT value of 1.6 mm.
General-purpose Basic Switch
X
F-153
Short Hinge Lever
26.2
X-10GW21-B
t = 1 (see note 1)
28.2 R
20.2 17.4
14.4
4.9
(see note 2)
OP FP
9.2
4.2+0.075
−0.025
OF max.
RF min.
OT min.
MD max.
2.45 N {250 gf}
0.31 N {32 gf}
2.1 mm
1.7 mm
FP max.
OP
25.5 mm
20.7±0.8 mm
OF max.
RF min.
OT min.
MD max.
1.08 N {110 gf}
0.14 N {14 gf}
4.8 mm
3.9 mm
FP max.
OP
34.6 mm
21.1±0.8 mm
OF max.
RF min.
PT max.
OT min.
MD max.
0.25 N {25 gf}
0.05 N {5 gf}
14.3 mm
4.8 mm
3.9 mm
OP
21.1±0.8 mm
OF max.
RF min.
OT min.
MD max.
2.16 N {220 gf}
0.34 N {35 gf}
2.4 mm
1.7 mm
FP max.
OP
37.1 mm
32.2±0.8 mm
OF max.
RF min.
OT min.
MD max.
1.42 N {145 gf}
0.21 N {21 gf}
4 mm
3 mm
FP max.
OP
40.5 mm
32.2±0.8 mm
+0.1
4.36−0.05
dia.
25.4±0.1
11.9
49.2
17.45±0.2
+0.075
dia. holes
4.2−0.025
Note: 1. Stainless-steel lever
2. Three vent holes
Hinge Lever
X-10GW-B
t = 1 (see note 1)
4.9
63.5R
26.2
(see note 2)
20.2 17.4
14.4
OP
FP
Note: 1. Stainless-steel lever
2. Three vent holes
Low-force Hinge Lever
X-10GW4-B
t= 1 (see note 1)
4.9
63.5R
26.2
(see note 2)
PT
20.2 17.4
14.4
OP
Note: 1. Stainless-steel lever
2. Three vent holes
Short Hinge Roller Lever
t = 1 (see note 3)
26.2
X-10GW22-B
(see note 2)
26.6R
20.2
9.5 dia. × 4 (see note 1)
OP FP
17.4
14.4
Note: 1. Plastic roller
2. Three vent holes
3. Stainless-steel spring lever
Hinge Roller Lever
t = 1 (see note 3)
X-10GW2-B
26.2
(see note 2)
48.5R
20.2 17.4
9.5 dia. × 4 (see note 1)
OP
FP
14.4
Note: 1. Plastic roller
2. Three vent holes
3. Stainless-steel spring lever
F-154
General-purpose Basic Switch X
Reverse Hinge Lever
t = 1 (see note 1)
X-10GM-B
4.9
18.65
(see note 2)
56R
20.2 17.4
OP
14.4
FP
OF max.
RF min.
OT min.
MD max.
2.16 N {220 gf}
0.25 N {25 gf}
5.5 mm
2.1 mm
FP max.
OP
26.8 mm
21.1±0.8 mm
OF max.
RF min.
OT min.
MD max.
6.86 N {700 gf}
1.52 N {155 gf}
2 mm
0.75 mm
FP max.
OP
36.1 mm
32.2±0.8 mm
OF max.
RF min.
OT min.
MD max.
3.14 N {320 gf}
0.49 N {50 gf}
4 mm
1.5 mm
FP max.
OP
37.4 mm
32.2±0.8 mm
Note: 1. Stainless-steel lever
2. Three vent holes
Reverse Short Hinge Lever
X-10GM22-B
t = 1 (see note 3)
9.5 dia. × 4 (see note 1)
18.65
(see note 2)
18.5R
OP FP
20.2 17.4
14.4
Reverse Hinge Roller Lever
t = 1 (see note 3)
X-10GM2-B
9.5 dia. × 4 (see note 1)
18.65
40.6R
(see note 2)
OP
20.2 17.4
FP
14.4
Note: 1. Plastic roller
2. Three vent holes
3. Stainless-steel spring lever
■ Terminals
Screw Terminals (-B)
Solder Terminal
6.4
9.2
20
20
25.4±0.1 11.9
17.45±0.2
17.45±0.2
49.2
Three, M4 × 5.5
Terminal screws
(with toothed
washer)
49.2
Appropriate terminal screw tightening torque:
0.78 to 1.18 N⋅m {8 to 12 kgf⋅cm}.
Note: 1. Tighten the terminal screws to a torque of 0.78 to 1.18 N·m {8 to 12 kgf·cm}.
2. In case of DC voltage, set the COM to the positive terminal.
General-purpose Basic Switch
X
F-155
Limit
Switches
Note: 1. Plastic roller
2. Three vent holes
3. Stainless-steel spring lever
Precautions
Refer to the Technical Information for Basic Switches (Cat. No. C122) for common precautions.
■ Correct Use
Mounting
Use M4 mounting screws with plane washers or spring washers to
securely mount the Switch. Tighten the screws to a torque of 1.18 to
1.47 N·m {12 to 15 kgf·cm}
The Switch can be panel mounted, provided that the hexagonal nut
of the actuator is tightened to a torque of 2.94 to 4.9 N·m {30 to
50 kgf·cm}.
Mounting Holes
Two, 4.2-dia. mounting
holes or M4 screw holes
Panel Mount Plunger
12.5+0.2
0
dia.
Panel Mount Roller Plunger
12.5+0.2
0 dia.
25.4±0.1
Handling
Panel-mounted Model ([email protected])
Set the common (COM) terminal to the positive terminal. If it is set to
the negative terminal, the Switch will not turn OFF.
To side-mount the panel-mount Switch to the panel with screws,
remove the hexagonal nut from the actuator.
When using the Switch under an inductive load, the arc suppression
capability varies depending on current. If the current becomes 0.6 to
1.2 A or of the time constant L/R exceeds 7 ms, be sure to provide an
arc suppressor.
Too large a dog angle and too fast operating speed may damage the
Switch when the Switch is side-mounted on the panel.
Since the Switch incorporates a permanent magnet, attention must
be paid to the following points:
• Avoid mounting the Switch directly onto a magnetic substance.
• Do not subject the Switch to severe shocks.
• Avoid placing the Switch in a strong magnetic field.
Too fast operating speed and too long overtravel of the roller plunger
Switch may result in damage to the Switch.
■ Accessories (Order separately)
Refer to Z/A/X/DZ Common Accessories for details about Terminal
Covers, Separators, and Actuators.
• Be sure to prevent iron dust or iron chips from adhering to the
built-in magnet or the magnetic blowout function of the Switch
will be adversely affected.
• Do not apply thermal shock to the Switch, or the magnetic flux
will be diminished.
Since a ventilation hole is provided to avoid abnormal corrosion due
to operating conditions, provide a dustproofing device in locations
where the Switch is exposed to dust.
Do not change operating positions for the actuator. Changing the
position may cause malfunction.
ALL DIMENSIONS SHOWN ARE IN MILLIMETERS.
To convert millimeters into inches, multiply by 0.03937. To convert grams into ounces, multiply by 0.03527.
Cat. No. B003-E1-08
F-156
In the interest of product improvement, specifications are subject to change without notice.
General-purpose Basic Switch X
General-purpose Basic Switch
Z
Best-selling Basic Switch Boasting High
Precision and Wide Variety
• A large switching capacity of 15 A with high repeat accuracy.
• A wide range of variations in contact form for your selection: basic, split-contact, maintained-contact, and adjustable contact
gap types.
• A series of standard models for micro loads is available.
• A series of molded terminal-type models incorporating safety
terminal protective cover is available.
Limit
Switches
Model Number Structure
■ Configuration
Basic models
Refer to page 3.
General-purpose
Drip-proof
Without terminal protective cover
With terminal protective cover
Molded terminal
Refer to individual datasheets.
(Contact your OMRON representative).
Refer to individual datasheets.
(Contact your OMRON representative).
Refer to page 5.
Split-contact models
General-purpose
Refer to page 4.
Maintained-contact models
General-purpose
Refer to page 5.
Basic Models
Maintained-contact Models
General-purpose
The maintained-contact type has a reset button at the bottom of the
switch case, in addition to the pushbutton (plunger) located on the
opposite side of the reset button. Use these buttons alternately.
A variety of actuators is available for a wide range of application.
The contact mechanism of models for micro loads is a crossbar type
with gold-alloy contacts, which ensures highly reliable operations for
micro loads.
Since the Switch has greater pretravel than overtravel, it is suitable
for use in reversible control circuits, manual reset circuits, safety limit
circuits, and other circuits which are not preferable for automatic
resetting. (For further details, refer to individual datasheets.)
Contact Gap:
H: 0.25 mm (high-sensitivity, micro voltage current load)
G: 0.5 mm (standard)
E: 1.8 mm (high-capacity)
F: 1.0 mm (split-contact models)
Split-contact Models
This type is identical in construction to the general-purpose basic
switch except that it has two pairs of simultaneous acting contacts by
splitting moving contacts.
Since the moving contacts are connected to a common terminal,
either parallel or series connection is possible.
Highly reliable micro load switching is ensured if the model is used as
a twin-contact switch.
General-purpose Basic Switch
Z
F-157
■ Model Number Legend
Basic Models
Split-contact Models
[email protected]@@@[email protected]
[email protected]
1 2 3 4
5
1. Ratings
01: 0.1 A (for micro load)
15: 15 A
2. Contact Gap
H:
0.25 mm (high-sensitivity, micro load)
G:
0.5 mm (standard)
E:
1.8 mm (high-capacity)
3. Actuator
None: Pin plunger
S:
Slim spring plunger
D:
Short spring plunger
K:
Spring plunger (medium OP)
K3:
Spring plunger (high OP)
Q3:
Panel mount plunger (low OP)
Q:
Panel mount plunger (medium OP)
Q8:
Panel mount plunger (high OP)
Q22:
Panel mount roller plunger
Q21:
Panel mount cross roller plunger
L:
Leaf spring (high OF)
L2:
Roller leaf spring
W21:
Short hinge lever
W:
Hinge lever (low OF)
W3:
Hinge lever (medium OF)
W32:
Hinge lever (high OF)
W4:
Low-force hinge lever
W44:
Long hinge lever
W78:
Low-force wire hinge lever (low OF)
W52:
Low-force wire hinge lever (high OF)
W22:
Short hinge roller lever
W2:
Hinge roller lever
W25:
Hinge roller lever (large roller)
W49:
Short hinge cross roller lever
W54:
Hinge cross roller lever
W2277: Unidirectional short hinge roller lever (Low OF)
M:
Reverse hinge lever
M22:
Reverse short hinge roller lever
M2:
Reverse hinge roller lever
NJ:
Flexible rod (high OF)
NJS:
Flexible rod (low OF)
4. Degree of Protection
None: General-purpose
55: Drip-proof
A55: Drip-proof (including the terminals)
5. Terminals
None: Solder terminal
B:
Screw terminal (with toothed washer)
B5V: Screw terminal with terminal cover (for [email protected] only)
Note: For combinations of models, refer to the following pages.
F-158
General-purpose Basic Switch Z
1 2 3 4
5
1. Ratings
10: 10 A
2. Contact Gap
F:
1 mm (high-capacity)
3. Actuator
None: Pin plunger
S:
Slim spring plunger
D:
Short spring plunger
Q:
Panel mount plunger
Q22: Panel mount roller plunger
W:
Hinge lever
W22: Short hinge roller lever
W2: Hinge roller lever
M22: Reverse short hinge roller lever
4. Construction
Y:
Split-contact models
5. Terminals
None: Solder terminal
B:
Screw terminal (with toothed washer)
Maintained-contact Models
[email protected]
1
2 3 4
1. Ratings
15: 15 A
2. Contact Gap
E:
1.8 mm (High capacity)
3. Actuator
None: Pin plunger
S:
Slim spring plunger
W:
Hinge lever
4. Structure
R:
Maintained-contact models
Ordering Information
■ List of Models
Basic Models (General-purpose)
Actuator
Pin plunger
Slim spring plunger
Short spring
plunger
Panel mount
plunger
Low OP
Standard
High-sensitivity
High-capacity
Micro load
G (0.5 mm)
H (0.25 mm)
E (1.8 mm)
H (0.25 mm)
Solder terminal Z-15G
Z-15H
Z-15E
Z-01H
Screw terminal Z-15G-B
Z-15H-B
Z-15E-B
Z-01H-B
Solder terminal Z-15GS
Z-15HS
---
Z-01HS
Screw terminal Z-15GS-B
Z-15HS-B
---
Z-01HS-B
Solder terminal Z-15GD
Z-15HD
Z-15ED
Z-01HD
Screw terminal Z-15GD-B
Z-15HD-B
Z-15ED-B
Z-01HD-B
Solder terminal Z-15GQ3
---
---
--Z-01HQ
Screw terminal Z-15GQ3-B
Medium OP Solder terminal Z-15GQ
High OP
Z-15HQ
Z-15EQ
Screw terminal Z-15GQ-B
Z-15HQ-B
Z-15EQ-B
Z-01HQ-B
Solder terminal Z-15GQ8
---
---
---
Solder terminal Z-15GQ22
Z-15HQ22
Z-15EQ22
---
Screw terminal Z-15GQ22-B
Z-15HQ22-B
Z-15EQ22-B
---
Panel mount cross
roller plunger
Solder terminal Z-15GQ21
Z-15HQ21
Z-15EQ21
---
Screw terminal Z-15GQ21-B
Z-15HQ21-B
Z-15EQ21-B
Leaf spring
Solder terminal Z-15GL
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
Limit
Switches
Screw terminal Z-15GQ8-B
Panel mount roller
plunger
Screw terminal Z-15GL-B
Solder terminal Z-15GL2
Roller leaf spring
Screw terminal Z-15GL2-B
Solder terminal Z-15GW21
Short hinge lever
Screw terminal Z-15GW21-B
Hinge lever
Low OF
Solder terminal Z-15GW
Z-15HW
---
---
Screw terminal Z-15GW-B
Z-15HW-B
---
---
---
---
---
Medium OF Solder terminal Z-15GW3
Screw terminal Z-15GW3-B
High OF
Solder terminal Z-15GW32
---
Screw terminal Z-15GW32-B
Low-force hinge lever
Low-force wire
hinge lever
Low OF
High OF
Short hinge roller lever
Short hinge cross
roller lever
Hinge roller lever
Solder terminal Z-15GW4
Z-15HW24
---
Screw terminal Z-15GW4-B
Z-15HW24-B
---
Solder terminal ---
Z-15HW78
---
Screw terminal
Z-15HW78-B
---
Solder terminal ---
Z-15HW52
---
Screw terminal
Z-15HW52-B
---
---
-----
Solder terminal Z-15GW22
Z-15HW22
Z-15EW22
Z-01HW22
Screw terminal Z-15GW22-B
Z-15HW22-B
Z-15EW22-B
Z-01HW22-B
Solder terminal Z-15GW49
---
---
---
Screw terminal Z-15GW49-B
Parallel
Large roller
Solder terminal Z-15GW2
Z-15HW2
---
---
Screw terminal Z-15GW2-B
Z-15HW2-B
---
---
Solder terminal Z-15GW25
---
---
---
Screw terminal Z-15GW25-B
General-purpose Basic Switch
Z
F-159
Actuator
Standard
High-sensitivity
High-capacity
Micro load
G (0.5 mm)
H (0.25 mm)
E (1.8 mm)
H (0.25 mm)
Hinge cross
roller lever
Solder terminal Z-15GW54
Unidirectional short
hinge roller lever
Solder terminal Z-15GW2277
Reverse hinge lever
(see note)
Solder terminal Z-15GM
Reverse short hinge
roller lever (see note)
Solder terminal Z-15GM22
Reverse hinge roller lever
(see note)
Solder terminal Z-15GM2
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
Screw terminal Z-15GW54-B
Screw terminal Z-15GW2277-B
Screw terminal Z-15GM-B
Screw terminal Z-15GM22-B
Screw terminal Z-15GM2-B
Note: The pin plungers of reverse-type models are continuously pressed by the actuator levers with compression coil springs and the pin plungers
are freed by operating the levers. Reverse-type models are highly vibration- and shock-resistive because the pin plungers are normally
pressed.
Minimum Order Lot
The following models are available at the minimum order lot specified below. Orders must be placed per lot.
Actuator
Standard
High-sensitivity
G (0.5 mm)
H (0.25 mm)
Short spring plunger
Z-15GD-B
---
Panel mount plunger
Z-15GQ
Z-15GQ-B
Z-15GQ8-B
---
Panel mount roller plunger
Z-15GQ22
Z-15GQ22-B
---
Panel mount cross roller plunger
Z-15GQ21-B
---
Short hinge lever
Z-15GW21-B
---
Hinge lever
Z-15GW
Z-15GW-B
---
Low-force hinge lever
Z-15GW4-B
Z-15HW24-B
Low-force hinge wire lever
---
Z-15HW78-B
Short hinge roller lever
Z-15GW22
Z-15GW22-B
---
Hinge roller lever
Z-15GW2
Z-15GW2-B
---
Reverse short hinge roller lever
Z-15GM22-B
---
Reverse hinge roller lever
Z-15GM2-B
---
Minimum order lot (pcs)
10
Split-contact Models
Actuator
F (1.0 mm)
Solder terminal ---
Pin plunger
Screw terminal Z-10FY-B
Solder terminal ---
Slim spring plunger
Screw terminal Z-10FSY-B
Solder terminal ---
Short spring plunger
Screw terminal Z-10FDY-B
Panel mount plunger
Medium OP
Solder terminal --Screw terminal Z-10FQY-B
F-160
General-purpose Basic Switch Z
Actuator
F (1.0 mm)
Solder terminal ---
Panel mount roller
plunger
Screw terminal Z-10FQ22Y-B
Low OP
Hinge lever
Solder terminal --Screw terminal Z-10FWY-B
Solder terminal ---
Short hinge roller
lever
Screw terminal Z-10FW22Y-B
Parallel
Hinge roller lever
Solder terminal --Screw terminal Z-10FW2Y-B
Solder terminal ---
Reverse short
hinge roller lever
Screw terminal Z-10FM22Y-B
Note: The pin plungers of reverse-type models are continuously pressed by the actuator levers with compression coil springs and the pin plungers
are freed by operating the levers. Reverse-type models are highly vibration- and shock-resistive because the pin plungers are normally
pressed.
Maintained-contact Models
Maintained-contact model
Z-15ER
Slim spring plunger
Z-15ESR
Hinge lever
Z-15EWR
Limit
Switches
Actuator
Pin plunger
Basic Models (Drip-proof Models)
Actuator
Pin plunger
Short spring plunger
Basic model (drip-proof)
Standard
Micro load
G (0.5 mm)
H (0.25 mm)
Without drip-proof terminal With drip-proof terminal
protective cover
protective cover
Without drip-proof terminal
protective cover
Solder terminal Z-15G55
---
Screw terminal Z-15G55-B
Z-15GA55-B5V
Z-01H55
Z-01H55-B
Solder terminal Z-15GD55
---
Z-01HD55
Screw terminal Z-15GD55-B
Spring plunger
Medium OP Solder terminal Z-15GK55
Z-01HD55-B
---
---
Solder terminal Z-15GK355
---
---
Screw terminal Z-15GK355-B
Z-15GK3A55-B5V
Screw terminal Z-15GK55-B
HIgh OP
Panel mount
plunger
Medium OP Solder terminal Z-15GQ55
---
---
Screw terminal Z-15GQ55-B
Z-15GQA55-B5V
Panel mount
roller plunger
Solder terminal Z-15GQ2255
---
Screw terminal Z-15GQ2255-B
Z-15GQ22A55-B5V
Panel mount cross
roller plunger
Solder terminal ---
---
Screw terminal Z-15GQ2155-B
Z-15GQ21A55-B5V
Leaf spring
Solder terminal Z-15GL55
---
---
---
---
---
---
Solder terminal Z-15GW4455
---
---
Screw terminal Z-15GW4455-B
Z-15GW44A55-B5V
Solder terminal Z-15GW55
---
Screw terminal Z-15GW55-B
Z-15GWA55-B5V
Solder terminal Z-15GW2255
---
Z-01HW2255
Screw terminal Z-15GW2255-B
Z-15GW22A55-B5V
Z-01HW2255-B
-----
Screw terminal Z-15GL55-B
Roller leaf spring
Solder terminal Z-15GL255
Screw terminal Z-15GL255-B
Short hinge lever
Solder terminal Z-15GW2155
Screw terminal Z-15GW2155-B
Long hinge lever
Hinge lever
Short hinge
roller lever
---
General-purpose Basic Switch
Z
F-161
Actuator
Basic model (drip-proof)
Standard
Micro load
G (0.5 mm)
H (0.25 mm)
Without drip-proof terminal
protective cover
Hinge roller lever
Parallel
With drip-proof terminal
protective cover
Solder terminal Z-15GW255
---
Screw terminal Z-15GW255-B
Z-15GW2A55-B5V
Without drip-proof terminal
protective cover
---
Unidirectional short
hinge roller lever
Solder terminal Z-15GW227755
---
Screw terminal Z-15GW227755-B
Z-15GW2277A55-B5V
---
Reverse hinge lever
(see note 1)
Solder terminal Z-15GM55
---
---
Reverse short hinge
roller lever (see note 1)
Solder terminal Z-15GM2255
---
---
Reverse hinge roller
lever (see note 1)
Solder terminal Z-15GM255
---
---
Flexible rod (coil spring)
(see note 2)
Solder terminal Z-15GNJ55
---
---
Screw terminal Z-15GM55-B
Screw terminal Z-15GM2255-B
Screw terminal Z-15GM255-B
Screw terminal Z-15GNJ55-B
Note: 1. The pin plungers of reverse-type models are continuously pressed by the actuator levers with compression coil springs and the pin plungers are freed by operating the levers.
2. The tip is made of resin.
Minimum Order Lot
The following models are available at the minimum order lot specified below. Orders must be placed per lot.
Actuator
Standard
High-sensitivity
G (0.5 mm)
H (0.25 mm)
Short spring plunger
Z-15GD55-B
---
---
Spring plunger
Z-15GK55-B
---
---
Hinge lever
Z-15GW4455-B
Z-15GW55
Z-15GW55-B
---
---
Short hinge roller lever
Z-15GW2255
Z-15GW2255-B
---
---
Hinge roller lever
Z-15GW255-B
---
---
Flexible rod (coil spring)
Z-15GNJ55-B
---
---
Flexible rod (steel wire)
---
---
Z-15HNJS55-B
10
Basic Models (Drip-proof High-sensitivity Models)
Actuator
High-sensitivity
H (0.25 mm)
Flexible rod (steel wire)
Solder terminal Z-15HNJS55
Screw terminal Z-15HNJS55-B
F-162
General-purpose Basic Switch Z
Minimum order lot
Specifications
■ Approved Standards
Agency
Standard
File No.
UL
UL508
E41515
CSA
CSA C22.2 No. 55
LR21642
TÜV Rheinland
EN61058-1
R9451585
■ Approved Standard Ratings
UL508 (File No. E41515)
CSA C22.2 No.55 (File No. LR21642)
Rated voltage
Z-15
Z-10F
EN (EN61058-1)
Rated voltage
Z-01H
125 VAC
15 A 1/8 HP
6 A 1/10 HP
0.1 A
250 VAC
15 A 1/4 HP
6 A 1/8 HP
---
480 VAC
15 A
6A
---
30 VDC
---
---
0.1 A
125 VDC
0.5 A
0.6 A
---
250 VDC
0.25 A
0.3 A
---
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
250 VAC
15 A
15 A
---
125 VAC
---
---
0.1 A
30 VDC
---
---
0.1 A
Limit
Switches
Note: Consult with OMRON about approved part numbers by standards.
■ Ratings
Z-15 (Except Micro Load and Flexible Rod Models)
Item
Non-inductive load
Resistive load
Model
Rated voltage
NC
Inductive load
Lamp load
NO
NC
Inductive load
NO
NC
Motor load
NO
NC
NO
G, H, E
125 VAC
250 VAC
500 VAC
15 (10) A (see note)
15 (10) A (see note)
10 A
3A
2.5 A
1.5 A
1.5 A
1.25 A
0.75 A
15 (10) A (see note)
15 (10) A (see note)
6A
5A
3A
1.5 A
2.5 A
1.5 A
0.75 A
G
8 VDC
14 VDC
30 VDC
125 VDC
250 VDC
15 A
15 A
6A
0.5 A
0.25 A
3A
3A
3A
0.5 A
0.25 A
1.5 A
1.5 A
1.5 A
0.5 A
0.25 A
15 A
10 A
5A
0.05 A
0.03 A
5A
5A
5A
0.05 A
0.03 A
2.5 A
2.5 A
2.5 A
0.05 A
0.03 A
H
8 VDC
14 VDC
30 VDC
125 VDC
250 VDC
15 A
15 A
2A
0.4 A
0.2 A
3A
3A
2A
0.4 A
0.2 A
1.5 A
1.5 A
1.4 A
0.4 A
0.2 A
15 A
10 A
1A
0.03 A
0.02 A
5A
5A
1A
0.03 A
0.02 A
2.5 A
2.5 A
1A
0.03 A
0.02 A
E
8 VDC
14 VDC
30 VDC
125 VDC
250 VDC
15 A
15 A
15 A
0.75 A
0.3 A
3A
3A
3A
0.75 A
0.3 A
1.5 A
1.5 A
1.5 A
0.75 A
0.3 A
15 A
15 A
10 A
0.4 A
0.2 A
5A
5A
5A
0.4 A
0.2 A
2.5 A
2.5 A
2.5 A
0.4 A
0.2 A
Note: Figures in parentheses are for the Z-15HW52 and Z-15HW78(-B) models, the AC ratings of these models are 125 and 250 V only.
Z-15 (Flexible Rod Models)
Rated voltage
Non-inductive load
Resistive load
NC
Inductive load
Lamp load
NO
NC
Inductive load
NO
NC
NO
Motor load
NC
NO
125 VAC
250 VAC
15 A
2A
1A
1A
0.5 A
7A
5A
2.5 A
1.5 A
2A
1A
8 VDC
14 VDC
30 VDC
125 VDC
250 VDC
15 A
15 A
2A
0.4 A
0.2 A
2A
2A
2A
0.4 A
0.2 A
1A
1A
1A
0.4 A
0.2 A
7A
7A
1A
0.03 A
0.02 A
3A
3A
1A
0.03 A
0.02 A
1.5 A
1.5 A
0.5 A
0.03 A
0.02 A
General-purpose Basic Switch
Z
F-163
Z-01H
Rated voltage
Resistive load
NC
125 VAC
0.1 A
8 VDC
14 VDC
30 VDC
0.1 A
0.1 A
0.1 A
NO
Z-10F
Model
Rated voltage
Non-inductive load
Resistive load
NC
Series
connection
Parallel
connection
Note: 1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
F-164
NO
Inductive load
Lamp load
NC
Inductive load
NO
NC
Motor load
NO
NC
NO
125 VAC
250 VAC
10 A
10 A
4A
2.5 A
2A
1.5 A
6A
5A
3A
2.5 A
1.5 A
30 VDC
125 VDC
250 VDC
10 A
1A
0.6 A
4A
1A
0.6 A
2A
1A
0.6 A
6A
0.1 A
0.05 A
6A
0.1 A
0.05 A
3A
0.1 A
0.05 A
125 VAC
250 VAC
6A
6A
3A
2.5 A
1.5 A
1.25 A
4A
4A
4A
2A
2A
1A
30 VDC
125 VDC
250 VDC
6A
0.6 A
0.3 A
4A
0.6 A
0.3 A
2A
0.6 A
0.3 A
4A
0.1 A
0.05 A
6A
0.1 A
0.05 A
3A
0.1 A
0.05 A
The above current ratings are the values of the steady-state current.
Inductive load has a power factor of 0.4 min. (AC) and a time constant of 7 ms max. (DC).
Lamp load has an inrush current of 10 times the steady-state current.
Motor load has an inrush current of 6 times the steady-state current.
The normally closed and normally open ratings of reverse hinge lever models are opposite to each other.
The AC ratings of molded terminals are 125 and 250 V only.
The ratings values apply under the following test conditions:
Ambient temperature: 20±2°C
Ambient humidity: 65±5%
Operating frequency: 20 operations/min
General-purpose Basic Switch Z
■ Characteristics
Basic
(except micro load
and flexible rod)/
maintained
contact
Z-15
Basic
(micro load)
Z-01H
Basic
(flexible rod)
Z-15
Split-contact
Z-10F
Operating speed
(see note)
0.01 mm to 1 m/s (see note 1)
1 mm to 1 m/s
0.1 mm to 1 m/s (see note 1)
Operating frequency
Mechanical: 240 operations/min
Electrical:
20 operations/min
Mechanical: 120 operations/min
Electrical:
20 operations/min
Mechanical: 240 operations/min
Electrical:
20 operations/min
Insulation resistance
100 MΩ min. (at 500 VDC)
Contact resistance
15 mΩ max. (initial
value)
15 mΩ max. (initial value)
25 mΩ max. (initial value)
Dielectric strength
Between contacts of same polarity
Contact gap G: 1,000 VAC, 50/60 Hz for
1 min
Contact gap H: 600 VAC, 50/60 Hz for
1 min
Contact gap E: 1,500 VAC, 50/60 Hz for
1 min
Between current-carrying metal parts and
ground, and between each terminal and
non-current-carrying metal parts
2,000 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 min
Between contacts of same polarity
Contact gap G: 1,000 VAC, 50/
60 Hz for 1 min
Contact gap H: 600 VAC, 50/ 60 Hz
for 1 min
Between current-carrying metal
parts and ground, and between each
terminal and non-current-carrying
metal parts
2,000 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 min
Between contacts of same polarity
Contact gap F: 1,500 VAC, 50/
60 Hz for 1 min
Between current-carrying metal
parts and ground, and between each
terminal and non-current-carrying
metal parts
2,000 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 min
Vibration resistance
Malfunction: 10 to 55 Hz, 1.5-mm double Malfunction: 10 to 20 Hz, 1.5-mm
amplitude (see note 5)
double amplitude (see note 5)
Malfunction: 10 to 55 Hz, 1.5-mm
double amplitude (see note 5)
Shock resistance
Destruction: 1,000 m/s2
{approx. 100G} max.
Malfunction: 300 m/s2
{approx. 30G} max.
(see note 2, 5)
Destruction: 1,000 m/s2 {approx.
100G} max.
Malfunction: 300 m/s2.
{approx. 30G} max.
(see note 3, 5)
Durability
Mechanical: 1,000,000 operations
Mechanical:
min.
Contact gap G, H: 20,000,000 operations
100,000 operations
min. (see note 4)
Electrical:
min.
Contact gap E:
300,000 operations
Electrical:
Contact gap G, H: 500,000 operations
min.
Contact gap E:
100,000 operations
min.
Degree of protection
General-purpose: IP00
Drip-proof:
IP62
Degree of protection
against electric shock
Class I
Proof tracking index
(PTI)
175
Switch category
D (IEC335-1)
Ambient temperature
Operating:
General-purpose: −25°C to 80°C (with no icing)
Drip-proof:
−15°C to 80°C (with no icing)
Ambient humidity
Operating:
General-purpose: 35% to 85%
Drip-proof:
35% to 95%
Weight
Approx. 22 to 58 g
50 mΩ max. (initial
value)
Destruction: 1,000 m/s2 {approx.
100G} max.
Malfunction: 50 m/s2
{approx. 5G} max.
(see note 5)
Approx. 42 to 48 g
Mechanical: 500,000 operations
min. (see note 1)
100,000 operations
Electrical:
min.
Approx. 34 to 61 g
Note: 1. The values are for the plunger models. (For the lever models, the values are at the plunger section.) (Contract your OMRON representative for other models.)
2. The values are for the Z-15G pin plunger.
3. The values are for the Z-10FY-B.
4. The values are for the pin plunger. The durability for models other than the pin plunger is 10,000,000 min.
5. Malfunction: 1 ms max.
General-purpose Basic Switch
Z
F-165
Limit
Switches
Item
■ Contacts Specification
Item
Contacts
Inrush current
Z-15
Shape
Rivet
Material
NC
NO
Z-01H
Z-10F
Single crossbar
Rivet
Silver alloy
Gold alloy
Silver alloy
30 A max.
0.1 A max.
40 A max.
15 A max.
0.1 A max.
20 A max.
■ Contact Form
Basic Models
Split-contact Models
General-purpose
Contact Form (Split-contact)
Contact Form (SPDT)
COM
NO
NC
NO
COM
NO
NC
Note: The Z-15GM is a reversible model and the NO and
NC positions are reversed.
NC
Connection Example
Series Connection
Parallel Connection
L
L
L
Maintained-contact Models
Contact Form (Maintained-contact)
COM
NO
NC
Pushbutton for resetting
F-166
General-purpose Basic Switch Z
L
L
L
Engineering Data
■ Mechanical Durability
Z-15G
Ambient temperature: 20±2°C
Ambient humidity: 65±5%
Without load
Operating frequency: 240 operations/min
100
70
50
30
20
10
7
5
3
Ambient temperature: 20±2°C
Ambient humidity: 65±5%
Operating frequency: 20 operations/min.
Durability (x106 operations)
Z-15G
Durability (x106 operations)
■ Electrical Durability
125 VAC cosφ = 1
125 VAC cosφ = 0.4
10
250 VAC cosφ = 1
250 VAC
cosφ = 0.4
5
1
0.5
2
1
500 VAC cosφ = 1
500 VAC cosφ = 0.4
0.1
0
0.1 0.2
0.3 0.4
0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8
0
Overtravel (mm)
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
Switching Current (A)
Limit
Switches
Nomenclature
■ Drip-proof Construction
Without Terminal Protective Cover
Rubber boot
Fixed contact (b) Glued surface (adhesive is
filled between case and cover)
Movable spring
Movable contact
Spring pivot
Fixed contact (a)
With Terminal Protective Cover
Rubber boot (weather-resistive
chloroprene is used)
Stainless-steel stopper
(improves sealing)
Rubber packing (improves
sealing between switch
housing and terminal cover)
Terminal protective covers are sold separately
for maintenance purposes, which can be, however, used with the [email protected] models only.
General-purpose Basic Switch
Z
F-167
Dimensions
Note: 1. Unless otherwise indicated, all units are in millimeters.
2. Unless otherwise specified, a tolerance of ±0.4 mm applies to all dimensions.
■ Dimensions and Operating Characteristics
Basic Models (General-purpose) & Split-contact Models
The models, illustrations, and graphics are for screw-terminal models (-B). The “-A” at the end of the model number for solder terminal models has
been omitted. For details of the terminals, refer to Terminals above.
Pin Plunger
23.3±0.25 4.2+0.075
−0.025 dia. hole
PT
Z-15G-B, Z-15E-B
Z-15H-B, Z-01H-B
Z-10FY-B
2.3 dia.
2.3SR (see note)
OP
24.2
9.2
4.2+0.075
−0.025
+0.1
4.36−0.05
dia.
17.45±0.2
25.4±0.1
49.2
Z-15G-B
OF
RF min.
PT max.
OT min.
MD max.
2.45 to 3.43 N
{250 to 350 gf}
1.12 N {114 gf}
0.4 mm
0.13 mm
0.05 mm
OP
15.9±0.4 mm
11.9
Note: Stainless-steel plunger
Z-15H-B
Z-15E-B
Z-01H-B
2.45 N {250 gf} max.
6.12 to 7.85 N
{625 to 800 gf}
1.12 N {114 gf}
0.8 mm
0.13 mm
0.13 mm
1.96 to 2.75 N
{200 to 280 gf}
1.12 N {114 gf}
0.3 mm
0.13 mm
0.025 mm
0.78 N {80 gf}
0.5 mm
0.13 mm
0.04 mm
Z-10FY-B
4.46 to 7.26 N
{455 to 740 gf}
1.12 N {114 gf}
0.8 mm
0.13 mm
0.1 mm
Slim Spring Plunger
Z-15GS-B, Z-15HS-B,
Z-01HS-B, Z-10FSY-B
5.2 dia.
23.3±0.25
PT
(see
note)
4 dia.
4.2+0.075
−0.025 dia.
hole
OP
9 dia.
24.2
9.2
4.2+0.075
−0.025
+0.1
4.36−0.05
Note: Stainless-steel plunger
(flat, 1R chamfered)
dia.
17.45±0.2
25.4±0.1
49.2
11.9
Z-15GS-B
OF
F-168
RF min.
PT max.
OT min.
MD max.
2.45 to 3.43 N
{250 to 350 gf}
1.12 N {114 gf}
0.4 mm
1.6 mm
0.05 mm
OP
28.2±0.5 mm
General-purpose Basic Switch Z
Z-15HS-B
1.96 to 2.79 N
{200 to 285 gf}
1.12 N {114 gf}
0.3 mm
1.6 mm
0.025 mm
Z-01HS
2.45 N {250 gf} max.
0.78 N {80 gf}
0.5 mm
1.6 mm
0.05 mm
Z-10FSY-B
4.46 to 7.26 N
{455 to 740 gf}
1.12 N {114 gf}
0.8 mm
1.6 mm
0.1 mm
Short Spring Plunger
Z-15GD-B, Z-01HD-B
Z-15HD-B, Z-10FDY-B
Z-15ED-B
12.3 dia.
10 dia.
23.3±0.25
12SR
(see
note)
PT
4.2+0.075
−0.025 dia.
hole
7.15 dia.
OP
24.2
4.2+0.075
−0.025
Note: Plated iron plunger
9.2
+0.1
dia.
4.36−0.05
17.45±0.2
25.4±0.1 11.9
49.2
RF min.
PT max.
OT min.
MD max.
2.45 to 3.43 N
{250 to 350 gf}
1.12 N {114 gf}
0.4 mm
1.6 mm
0.05 mm
OP
21.5±0.5 mm
Z-15HD-B
Z-15ED-B
Panel Mount Plunger
23.3±0.25
Z-15GQ-B, Z-01HQ-B
Z-15HQ-B, Z-10FQY-B
Z-15EQ-B
0.78 N {80 gf}
0.5 mm
1.6 mm
0.05 mm
M12 × 1 mounting screw
Two hexagonal nuts (2 t × 14
width across flats)
4.2+0.075
−0.025 dia. hole
OP
13.1
Two lock nuts (2 t × 15.6 width across flats)
(See
16.3 note 2)
16 dia.
4.2+0.075
−0.025
+0.1
4.36−0.05
Z-10FDY-B
4.46 to 7.26 N
{455 to 740 gf}
1.12 N {114 gf}
0.8 mm
1.6 mm
0.1 mm
8.35 dia.
11.9SR
(see
note 1)
PT
Z-01HD-B
2.45 N {250 gf} max.
6.13 to 7.85 N
{625 to 800 gf}
1.12 N {114 gf}
0.8 mm
1.6 mm
0.13 mm
1.96 to 2.79 N
{200 to 285 gf}
1.12 N {114 gf}
0.3 mm
1.6 mm
0.025 mm
Limit
Switches
Z-15GD-B
OF
9.2
dia.
Note: 1. Stainless-steel plunger
2. Imperfect screw part with a maximum length of 1.5 mm.
17.45±0.2
25.4±0.1
11.9
49.2
Z-15GQ3-B
23.3±0.25
8.35 dia.
11.9SR
(see
note 1)
PT
Two hexagonal nuts (2 t × 14
width across flats)
4.2+0.075
−0.025 dia. hole
OP
13.1
(See
16.3 note 2)
Two lock nuts (2 t × 15.6 width across flats)
16 dia.
4.2+0.075
−0.025
+0.1
4.36−0.05
M12 × 1
mounting screw
9.2
Note: 1. Stainless-steel plunger
2. Imperfect screw part with a maximum length of 1.5 mm.
dia.
25.4±0.1
11.9
17.45±0.2
49.2
Z-15GQ8-B
23.3±0.25
8SR
(see
note
1)
PT
OP
(See
note 2)
Two hexagonal nuts (2 t × 14
width across flats)
Two lock nuts (2 t × 15.6 width across flats)
16 dia.
4.2+0.075
−0.025
+0.1
4.36−0.05
M3 × 10 (depth)
M12 × 1
mounting screw
4.2+0.075
−0.025 dia. hole
13.1
16.3
8.35 dia.
9.2
dia.
17.45±0.2
25.4±0.1 11.9
49.2
Note: 1. Plated brass plunger
2. Imperfect screw part with a maximum length of 1.5 mm.
General-purpose Basic Switch
Z
F-169
Z-15GQ-B
OF
RF min.
PT max.
OT min.
MD max.
2.45 to 3.43 N
{250 to 350 gf}
1.12 N {114 gf}
0.4 mm
5.5 mm
0.05 mm
OP
21.8±0.8 mm
Z-15HQ-B
1.96 to 2.79 N
{200 to 285 gf}
1.12 N {114 gf}
0.3 mm
5.5 mm
0.025 mm
Z-15EQ-B
6.13 to 7.85 N
{625 to 800 gf}
1.12 N {114 gf}
0.8 mm
5.5 mm
0.13 mm
Z-01HQ-B
2.45 N {250 gf}
max.
0.78 N {80 gf}
0.5 mm
5.5 mm
0.05 mm
Z-10FQY-B
Z-15GQ3-B
Z-15GQ8-B
4.46 to 7.26 N
{455 to 740 gf}
1.12 N {114 gf}
0.8 mm
5.5 mm
0.1 mm
2.45 to 3.43 N
{250 to 350 gf}
1.12 N {114 gf}
4.2 mm
2.5 mm
2.2 mm
2.45 to 3.43 N
{250 to 350 gf}
1.12 N {114 gf}
0.5 mm
5.5 mm
0.05 mm
18.8±0.8 mm
32.5±1 mm
Note: 1. Do not use the M12 mounting screw and the case mounting hole at the same time, or excessive pulling force will be imposed on the
Switch and the case and cover may be damaged.
2. On the model Z-15GQ3-B, PT can be set to a value larger than that for the Z-15GQ.
3. On the model Z-15GQ8-B, operating position can be adjusted by providing a screw in the plunger section.
The M3 hole with a depth of 10 mm is a through hole. Take precautions so that no water or screw lock agent penetrates into the hole.
Panel Mount Roller Plunger
Z-15GQ22-B, Z-15EQ22-B
Z-15HQ22-B, Z-10FQ22Y-B
23.3±0.25
PT
OP
12.7 dia. × 4.8 (stainless-steel roller)
Two hexagonal nuts (3 t × 17
width across flats)
4.2+0.075
−0.025 dia. hole
M12 × 1 mounting screw
15.5
(See
16.3 note)
16 dia.
9.2
4.2+0.075
−0.025
+0.1
4.36−0.05
dia.
Note: Imperfect screw part with a
maximum length of 1.5 mm.
17.45±0.2
25.4±0.1 11.9
49.2
Z-15GQ22-B
OF
RF min.
PT max.
OT min.
MD max.
2.45 to 3.43 N
{250 to 350 gf}
1.12 N {114 gf}
0.4 mm
3.58 mm
0.05 mm
OP
33.4±1.2 mm
Z-15HQ22-B
Z-15EQ22-B
1.96 to 2.79 N
{200 to 285 gf}
1.12 N {114 gf}
0.3 mm
3.58 mm
0.025 mm
6.13 to 7.85 N
{625 to 800 gf}
1.12 N {114 gf}
0.8 mm
3.58 mm
0.13 mm
Z-10FQ22Y-B
4.46 to 7.26 N
{455 to 740 gf}
1.12 N {114 gf}
1 mm
3.55 mm
0.1 mm
Note: Do not use the M12 mounting screw and the case mounting hole at the same time, or the case may be damaged.
Panel Mount Cross Roller Plunger
Z-15GQ21-B, Z-15HQ21-B,
Z-15EQ21-B
12.7 dia. × 4.8 (stainless-steel roller)
23.3±0.25
PT
Two hexagonal nuts (3 t × 17
width across flats)
4.2+0.075
−0.025 dia. hole
OP
M12 × 1 mounting screw
15.5
(See
16.3 note)
16 dia.
9.2
4.2+0.075
−0.025
+0.1
4.36−0.05
dia.
25.4±0.1
49.2
F-170
General-purpose Basic Switch Z
11.9
17.45±0.2
Note: Imperfect screw part with a
maximum length of 1.5 mm.
Z-15GQ21-B
OF
RF min.
PT max.
OT min.
MD max.
2.45 to 3.43 N
{250 to 350 gf}
1.12 N {114 gf}
0.4 mm
3.58 mm
0.05 mm
OP
33.4±1.2 mm
Z-15HQ21-B
1.96 to 2.79 N
{200 to 285 gf}
1.12 N {114 gf}
0.3 mm
3.58 mm
0.025 mm
Z-15EQ21-B
6.13 to 7.85 N
{625 to 800 gf}
1.12 N {114 gf}
0.8 mm
3.58 mm
0.13 mm
Note: Do not use the M12 mounting screw and the case mounting hole at the same time, or the case may be damaged.
t = 0.3 (stainless-steel spring lever)
Z-15GL-B
4.8
49.6±0.8
FP
OP
23.9
+0.1
4.36−0.05
4.2+0.075
−0.025
dia. hole
dia.
46±0.8
t = 0.3
(see note)
Z-15GL2-B
FP
FP max.
OP
20.6 mm
17.4±0.8 mm
17.45±0.2
25.4±0.1 11.9
49.2
Roller Leaf Spring
1.38 N {141 gf}
0.14 N {14 gf}
1.6 mm (see note)
1.3 mm
Note: When operating, be sure not to exceed 1.6 mm.
9.2
4.2+0.075
−0.025
OF max.
RF min.
OT min.
MD max.
9.5 dia. × 4 (plastic toller)
4.2+0.075
−0.025 dia. hole
OP
23.9
1.38 N {141 gf}
0.14 M {14 gf}
1.6 mm (see note)
1.3 mm
FP max.
OP
31.8 mm
28.6±0.8 mm
Note: When operating, be sure not to exceed 1.6 mm.
9.2
4.2+0.075
−0.025
OF max.
RF min.
OT min.
MD max.
+0.1
4.36−0.05
dia.
17.45±0.2
25.4±0.1
11.9
Note: Stainless-steel spring lever
49.2
Short Hinge Lever
26.2
Z-15GW21-B
t = 1 (stainless-steel lever)
4.9
28.2R
OP
13.9
20.2 16.9
FP
9.2
4.2+0.075
−0.025 dia. hole
4.2+0.075
−0.025
OF max.
RF min.
OT min.
MD max.
1.57 N {160 gf}
0.27 N {28 gf}
2 mm
1 mm
FP max.
OP
24.8 mm
19±0.8 mm
+0.1
4.36−0.05
dia.
17.45±0.2
25.4±0.1 11.9
49.2
Hinge Lever
Z-15GW-B, Z-15GW32-B
Z-15HW-B, Z-10FWY-B
Z-15GW3-B (Lever Length: 56R)
(see note)
t = 1 (stainless-steel lever)
26.2
20.2
4.9
63.5R
16.9
13.9
OP
FP
4.2+0.075
−0.025 dia. hole
4.2+0.075
−0.025
+0.1
4.36−0.05
dia.
9.2
17.45±0.2
25.4±0.1
11.9
49.2
Note: The external dimensions of the actuator vary.
General-purpose Basic Switch
Z
F-171
Limit
Switches
Leaf Spring
Z-15GW-B
Z-15HW-B
Z-15GW32-B
Z-10FWY-B
0.88 N {90 gf}
0.78 N {80 gf}
0.14 N {14 gf}
5.6 mm
0.63 mm
0.14 N {14 gf}
5.6 mm
2.4 mm
0.15 N {15.5 gf}
4.8 mm
1.12 mm
27.4 mm
28.2 mm
29.8 mm
27.2 mm
0.69 N {70 gf}
0.66 N {67 gf}
RF min.
OT min.
MD max.
0.14 N {14 gf}
5.6 mm
1.27 mm
FP max.
28.2 mm
OP
19±0.8 mm
Low-force Hinge Lever
t = 1 (stainless-steel lever)
Z-15GW4-B
4.9
63.5R
26.2
PT
20.2
Z-15GW3-B
1.47 to 1.96 N
{150 to 200 gf}
0.92 N {94 gf}
5.6 mm
1.27 mm
OF max.
16.9
OP
13.9
4.2+0.075
−0.025 dia. hole
4.2+0.075
−0.025
9.2
OF max.
RF min.
PT max.
OT min.
MD max.
274 mN {28 gf}
34.3 mN {3.5 gf}
10 mm
5.6 mm
1.27 mm
OP
19±0.8 mm
OF max.
RF min.
PT max.
OT min.
MD max.
58.8 mN {6 gf}
4.90 mN {0.5 gf}
19.8 mm
10 mm
2 mm
OP
19.8±1.6 mm
OF max.
RF min.
PT max.
OT min.
MD max.
58.8 mN {6 gf}
4.90 mN {0.5 gf}
8.3 mm
5.6 mm
0.65 mm
OP
19±1 mm
OF max.
RF min.
PT max.
OT min.
MD max.
39.2 mN {4 gf}
2.94 mN {0.3 gf}
10 mm
6 mm
3 mm
OP
20±1 mm
+0.1
4.36−0.05
dia.
17.45±0.2
25.4±0.1
49.2
11.9
Z-15HW24-B
t = 0.8 (stainless-steel lever)
5
120R
26.2
2
PT
20.2
16.9
4.2+0.075
−0.025
+0.1
4.36−0.05
OP
13.9
9.2
4.2+0.075
−0.025 dia. hole
dia.
25.4±0.1
49.2
17.45±0.2
11.9
Low-force Wire Hinge Lever
1 dia. (stainless-steel wire lever)
Z-15HW52-B
3 max.
63.5R
26.2
PT
20.2
16.9
OP
13.9
4.2+0.075
−0.025
4.2+0.075
−0.025 dia.
9.2
hole
+0.1
4.36−0.05
dia.
17.45±0.2
25.4±0.1
49.2
11.9
Z-15HW78-B
1 dia. (stainless-steel wire lever)
3 max.
26.2
110R
PT
20.2 16.9
13.9 V.
Note: The AC rating is 10 A at 125 or 250
4.2+0.075
−0.025
OP
9.2
4.2+0.075
−0.025 dia. hole
+0.1
4.36−0.05
dia.
25.4±0.1 11.9
49.2
F-172
General-purpose Basic Switch Z
17.45±0.2
Short Hinge Roller Lever
Z-15GW22-B, Z-01HW22-B
t=1 (stainless-steel lever)
Z-15HW22-B, Z-10FW22Y-B (see note)
Z-15EW22-B, Z-15GW2-B
Z-15HW2-B (see note), Z-10FW2Y-B (see note)
(Lever Length: 48.5R) (see note)
9.5 dia. × 4
(plastic roller)
26.6R
4.2+0.075
−0.025 dia. hole
+0.1
4.36−0.05
dia.
Note: The external dimensions of the actuator vary.
OT min.
MD max.
FP max.
OP
32.5 mm
30.2±0.4 mm
RF min.
Z-15HW22-B
1.47 N
{150 gf}
0.41 N
{42 gf}
2.4 mm
0.45 mm
Z-15EW22-B
Z-01HW22-B
Z-10FW22Y-B
Z-15GW2-B
1.57 N
{160 gf}
0.27 N
{28 gf}
2.4 mm
0.5 mm
2.45 N
{250 gf}
0.34 N
{35 gf}
2.4 mm
1 mm
0.98 N
{100 gf}
0.22 N
{22 gf}
4 mm
1.02 mm
35.1 mm
30.2±0.4 mm
32.5 mm
30.2±0.4 mm
34.8 mm
30.2±0.4 mm
36.5 mm
30.2±0.8 mm
Short Hinge Cross Roller Lever
Z-15GW49-B
T=1 (stainless-steel lever)
Z-15GW54-B (Lever Length: 48.7R)
(see note)
9.5 dia. × 4
(plastic roller)
27.1R
Model
37.4 mm
30.2±0.8 mm
Z-15GW49-B
Z-15GW54-B
OT min.
MD max.
0.98 N
{100 gf}
0.22 N
{22 gf}
4 mm
1 mm
FP max.
OP
33.3 mm
31±0.4 mm
37.3 mm
31±0.8 mm
RF min.
4.2+0.075
−0.025 dia. hole
Z-10FW2Y-B
1.27 N
{130 gf}
0.22 N
{22 gf}
4 mm
2 mm
1.67 N
{170 gf}
0.41 N
{42 gf}
2.4 mm
0.51 mm
OF max.
+0.1
4.36−0.05
dia.
Z-15HW2-B
0.84 N
{86 gf}
0.22 N
{22 gf}
4 mm
0.6 mm
1.94 N
{198 gf}
0.41 N
{42 gf}
2.4 mm
1.3 mm
Note: The external dimensions of the actuator vary.
Z-15GW25-B
2R
26.2
t=1
(stainlesssteel lever)
20 dia. × 4
(plastic roller)
50R
FP
OP
20.2
16.9
OF max.
RF min.
OT min.
MD max.
0.98 N {100 gf}
0.21 N {21 gf}
4 mm
1.6 mm
FP max.
OP
47.5 mm
41.2±0.8 mm
13.9
9.2
4.2+0.075
−0.025
4.2+0.075
−0.025
+0.1
4.36−0.05
dia.
dia. hole
17.45±0.2
25.4±0.1 11.9
49.2
General-purpose Basic Switch
Z
F-173
Limit
Switches
Z-15GW22-B
1.57 N
{160 gf}
0.41 N
{42 gf}
2.4 mm
0.5 mm
OF max.
Unidirectional Short Hinge Roller Lever
Z-15GW2277-B
9.5 dia. × 4
(plastic roller)
Operating direction
t=1
(stainlesssteel lever)
26.2
31.9R
34.1 max.
11.1R
OF max.
RF min.
OT min.
MD max.
1.67 N {170 gf}
0.41 N {42 gf}
2.4 mm
0.51 mm
FP max.
OP
43.6 mm
41.3±0.8 mm
FP
OP
20.2
16.9
13.9
9.2
4.2+0.075
−0.025 dia. hole
4.2+0.075
−0.025
+0.1
4.36−0.05
dia.
17.45±0.2
25.4±0.1 11.9
49.2
Reverse Hinge Lever
Note: The pin plungers of reverse-type models are continuously pressed by the actuator levers with compression coil springs and the pin plungers
are freed by operating the levers. Reverse-type models are highly vibration- and shock-resistive because the pin plungers are normally
pressed.
Z-15GM-B
t = 1 (stainless-steel lever)
18.65
20.2
4.9
56R
FP
17.4
13.9
OP
OF max.
RF min.
OT min.
MD max.
1.67 N {170 gf}
0.27 N {28 gf}
5.6 mm
0.89 mm
FP max.
OP
23.8 mm
19±0.8 mm
9.2
4.2+0.075
−0.025 dia. hole
4.2+0.075
−0.025
+0.1
4.36−0.05
dia.
17.45±0.2
25.4±0.1 11.9
49.2
Reverse Short Hinge Roller Lever
Note: The pin plungers of reverse-type models are continuously pressed by the actuator levers with compression coil springs and the pin plungers
are freed by operating the levers. Reverse-type models are highly vibration- and shock-resistive because the pin plungers are normally
pressed.
Z-15GM22-B,
Z-10FM22Y-B
Model
18.65
t = 1 (stainless-steel lever)
18.5R
9.5 dia. × 4
(plastic roller)
OF max.
OP
17.4
FP
13.9
9.2
4.2+0.075
−0.025 dia. hole
4.2+0.075
−0.025
+0.1
4.36−0.05
dia.
17.45±0.2
25.4±0.1 11.9
49.2
F-174
General-purpose Basic Switch Z
Z-10FM22Y-B
OT min.
MD max.
6.37 N
{650 gf}
1.67 N
{170 gf}
2 mm
0.56 mm
FP max.
OP
31.8 mm
29.4±0.4 mm
33 mm
29.4±0.4 mm
RF min.
20.2
Z-15GM22-B
5.28 N
{538 gf}
1.67 N
{170 gf}
2 mm
0.28 mm
Reverse Hinge Roller Lever
Note: The pin plungers of reverse-type models are continuously pressed by the actuator levers with compression coil springs and the pin plungers
are freed by operating the levers. Reverse-type models are highly vibration- and shock-resistive because the pin plungers are normally
pressed.
Z-15GM2-B
t = 1 (stainless-steel lever)
18.65
9.5 dia. × 4
(plastic roller)
40.6R
FP
OP
20.2 17.4
13.9
OF max.
RF min.
OT min.
MD max.
2.35 N {240 gf}
0.55 N {56 gf}
4 mm
0.64 mm
FP max.
OP
35 mm
30.2±0.8 mm
9.2
4.2+0.075
−0.025 dia. hole
4.2+0.075
−0.025
+0.1
4.36−0.05
dia.
17.45±0.2
Limit
Switches
25.4±0.1 11.9
49.2
General-purpose Basic Switch
Z
F-175
Basic Models (Drip-proof) without Terminal Protective Cover
Model
Pin Plunger
6SR
(see note)
Z-15G55-B
Z-01H55-B
4.2+0.075
−0.025
dia. hole
3.9 dia.
Z-15G55-B
Z-01H55-B
3.43 N
{350 gf} max.
PT max.
OT min.
MD max.
2.45 to 4.22 N
{250 to
431 gf}
1.12 N
{114 gf}
2.2 mm
0.13 mm
0.06 mm
OP
15.9±0.4 mm
OF
RF min.
+0.1
4.36 −0.05 dia.
Note: Stainless-steel plunger
Short Spring Plunger
15 dia.
Z-15GD55-B
Z-01HD55-B
11.9SR
(see note)
4.2+0.075
−0.025
7.15 dia.
Model
Z-15GD55-B
Z-01HD55-B
PT max.
OT min.
MD max.
5.30 N
{541 gf}
1.12 N
{114 gf}
1.8 mm
1.6 mm
0.06 mm
3.63 N
{370 gf}
0.78 N
{80 gf}
1.9 mm
1.6 mm
0.06 mm
OP
21.5±0.5 mm
OF max.
dia. hole
RF min.
+0.1
4.36 −0.05 dia.
Note: Stainless-steel plunger
Spring Plunger
17 dia.
7.15 dia.
Z-15GK55-B
11.9SR
(see note)
4.2+0.075
−0.025 dia. hole
0.78 N
{80 gf}
2.2 mm
0.13 mm
0.06 mm
OF max.
RF min.
PT max.
OT min.
MD max.
5.30 N {541 gf}
1.12 N {114 gf}
2.3 mm
1.6 mm
0.06 mm
OP
28.2±0.5 mm
OF max.
RF min.
PT max.
OT min.
MD max.
5.30 N {541 gf}
1.12 N {114 gf}
2.4 mm
3.5 mm
0.06 mm
OP
37.8±1.2 mm
+0.1
4.36 −0.05 dia.
Note: Stainless-steel plunger
Z-15GK355-B
17 dia.
8.35 dia.
11.9SR
(see note)
4.2+0.075
−0.025 dia. hole
+0.1
4.36 −0.05 dia.
Note: Stainless-steel plunger
F-176
General-purpose Basic Switch Z
Panel Mount Plunger
8.35 dia.
Z-15GQ55-B
11.9SR
(see note 1)
4.2+0.075
−0.025 dia. hole
(see
note 2)
16 dia.
M12 × 1
Mounting screw
Two hexagonal nuts
(2 t × 14 width across flats)
Two lock nuts
(2 t × 15.6 width
across flats)
OF max.
RF min.
PT max.
OT min.
MD max.
5.30 N {541 gf}
1.12 N {114 gf}
1.8 mm
5.5 mm
0.06 mm
OP
21.8±0.8 mm
+0.1
4.36 −0.05 dia.
Note: 1. Stainless-steel plunger
2. Imperfect screw part with a maximum
length of 1.5 mm.
Note: Do not use the M12 mounting screw and the case mounting hole at the same time, or the case may be damaged.
Panel Mount Roller Plunger
12.7 dia. × 4.8
(stainless-steel roller)
Z-15GQ2255-B
Two hexagonal nuts
(3 t × 17 width
across flats)
4.2+0.075
−0.025 dia. hole
5.30 N {541 gf}
1.12 N {114 gf}
1.8 mm
3.58 mm
0.06 mm
OP
33.4±1.2 mm
16 dia.
Limit
Switches
(see note)
M12 × 1
mounting screw
OF max.
RF min.
PT max.
OT min.
MD max.
+0.1
4.36 −0.05 dia.
Note: Imperfect screw part with a
maximum length of 1.5 mm.
Note: Do not use the M12 mounting screw and the case mounting hole at the same time, or the case may be damaged.
Panel Mount Cross Roller Plunger
12.7 dia. × 4.8 (stainless-steel roller)
Z-15GQ2155-B
Two hexagonal nuts
(3 t × 17 width across flats)
4.2+0.075
−0.025 dia. hole
(see note)
M12 × 1
mounting screw
OF max.
RF min.
PT max.
OT min.
MD max.
5.30 N {541 gf}
1.12 N {114 gf}
1.8 mm
3.58 mm
0.06 mm
OP
33.4±1.2 mm
16 dia.
+0.1
4.36 −0.05 dia.
Note: Imperfect screw part with a
maximum length of 1.5 mm.
Note: Do not use the M12 mounting screw and the case mounting hole at the same time, or the case may be damaged.
General-purpose Basic Switch
Z
F-177
Leaf Spring
t = 0.3 (stainless-steel spring lever)
Z-15GL55-B
4.2+0.075
−0.025 dia. hole
OF max.
RF min.
OT min.
MD max.
1.96 N {200 gf}
0.14 N {14 gf}
1.6 mm
1.3 mm
FP max.
OP
20.6 mm
17.5±0.8 mm
Note: When operating, be sure not to exceed 1.6 mm.
+0.1
4.36 −0.05 dia.
Roller Leaf Spring
t = 0.3
(stainless-steel lever)
Z-15GL255-B
9.5 dia. × 4 (plastic roller)
4.2+0.075
−0.025 dia. hole
OF max.
RF min.
OT min.
MD max.
1.96 N {200 gf}
0.14 N {14 gf}
1.6 mm
1.3 mm
FP max.
OP
31.8 mm
28.6±0.8 mm
Note: When operating, be sure not to exceed 1.6 mm.
+0.1
4.36 −0.05 dia.
Short Hinge Lever
Z-15GW2155-B
t = 1 (stainless-steel lever)
28.2R
OF max.
RF min.
OT min.
MD max.
1.86 N {190 gf}
0.27 N {28 gf}
2 mm
1 mm
FP max.
OP
25 mm
19±0.8 mm
4.2+0.075
−0.025 dia. hole
+0.1
4.36 −0.05 dia.
OF max.
Long Hinge Lever
OT min.
MD max.
0.88 N
{90 gf}
0.14 N
{14 gf}
5.6 mm
3.5 mm
FP max.
OP
33 mm
19±1.2 mm
t = 1 (stainless-steel lever)
Z-15GW4455-B
RF min.
100R
4.2+0.075
−0.025 dia. hole
+0.1
4.36 −0.05 dia.
Hinge Lever
Z-15GW55-B
t = 1 (stainless-steel lever)
63.5R
4.2+0.075
−0.025 dia. hole
+0.1
4.36 −0.05 dia.
F-178
General-purpose Basic Switch Z
OF max.
RF min.
OT min.
MD max.
0.98 N {100 gf}
0.14 N {14 gf}
5.6 mm
2 mm
FP max.
OP
28.2 mm
19±0.8 mm
Model
Short Hinge Roller Lever
OF max.
Z-15GW2255-B
Z-01HW2255-B
FP max.
OP
32.9 mm
30.2±0.4 mm
RF min.
26.6R
4.2+0.075
−0.025 dia. hole
1.96 N
{200 gf}
0.27 N
{28 gf}
2.4 mm
0.8 mm
OT min.
MD max.
t = 1 (stainless-steel lever)
9.5 dia. × 4 (plastic roller)
Z-15GW2255-B Z-01HW2255-B
1.96 N
{200 gf}
0.41 N
{42 gf}
2.4 mm
0.8 mm
+0.1
4.36 −0.05 dia.
Hinge Roller Lever
9.5 dia. × 4 (plastic roller)
48.5R
Z-15GW255-B
t = 1 (see note)
OF max.
RF min.
OT min.
MD max.
1.27 N {130 gf}
0.21 N {21 gf}
4 mm
1.6 mm
FP max.
OP
36.5 mm
30.2±0.8 mm
OF max.
RF min.
OT min.
MD max.
1.77 N {181 gf}
0.49 N {50 gf}
2.4 mm
0.8 mm
FP max.
OP
43.6 mm
41.3±0.8 mm
4.2+0.075
−0.025 dia. hole
+0.1
4.36 −0.05 dia.
Unidirectional Short Hinge Roller Lever
Z-15GW227755-B
Operating direction
t=1
(stainlesssteel lever)
9.5 dia. × 4 (plastic roller)
31.9R
Limit
Switches
Note: Stainless-steel lever
11.1R
34.1 max.
4.2+0.075
−0.025 dia. hole
+0.1
4.36 −0.05 dia.
Reverse Hinge Lever
Note: The pin plungers of reverse-type models are continuously pressed by the actuator levers with compression coil springs and the pin plungers
are freed by operating the levers. Reverse-type models are highly vibration- and shock-resistive because the pin plungers are normally
pressed.
Z-15GM55-B
t = 1 (stainless-steel lever)
56R
OF max.
RF min.
OT min.
MD max.
1.96 N {200 gf}
0.27 N {28 gf}
5.6 mm
0.89 mm
FP max.
OP
23.8 mm
19±0.8 mm
4.2+0.075
−0.025 dia. hole
+0.1
4.36 −0.05 dia.
General-purpose Basic Switch
Z
F-179
Reverse Short Hinge Roller Lever
Note: The pin plungers of reverse-type models are continuously pressed by the actuator levers with compression coil springs and the pin plungers
are freed by operating the levers. Reverse-type models are highly vibration- and shock-resistive because the pin plungers are normally
pressed.
Z-15GM2255-B
t = 1 (stainless-steel lever)
9.5 dia. × 4 (plastic roller)
18.5R
OF max.
RF min.
OT min.
MD max.
5.69 N {581 gf}
1.67 N {170 gf}
2 mm
0.28 mm
FP max.
OP
31.8 mm
29.4±0.4 mm
4.2+0.075
−0.025 dia. hole
+0.1
4.36 −0.05 dia.
Reverse Hinge Roller Lever
Note: The pin plungers of reverse-type models are continuously pressed by the actuator levers with compression coil springs and the pin plungers
are freed by operating the levers. Reverse-type models are highly vibration- and shock-resistive because the pin plungers are normally
pressed.
Z-15GM255-B
9.5 dia. × 4 (plastic roller)
40.6R
t=1
(see note)
4.2+0.075
−0.025 dia. hole
4.36+0.1
−0.05 dia.
Note: Stainless-steel lever
F-180
General-purpose Basic Switch Z
OF max.
RF min.
OT min.
MD max.
2.65 N {270 gf}
0.55 N {56 gf}
4 mm
0.64 mm
FP max.
OP
35 mm
30.2±0.8 mm
Flexible Rod (Coil Spring)
Z-15GNJ55-B
(see note 1)
6.1 dia.
3.2 dia.
OF max.
PT max.
0.49 N {50 gf}
(20 mm)
OT
42 to 60 mm
Nylon rod
30 Operating range (see note 2)
12 dia.
Rubber cap
4.2+0.075
−0.025 dia. hole
Note: 1. Operation is possible in any direction other than the axial direction (indicated by the arrow ↓).
2. Use only the area within the top 30 mm of the rod as the operating part. (Do not use the area that falls within 80 mm from the mounting
hole as the operating part. Using this area may cause damage to the nylon rod.)
OF max.
PT max.
Flexible Rod (Steel Wire)
Z-15HNJS55-B
0.15 N {15 gf}
(25 mm)
(see note 1)
1-dia. stainless steel
wire (see note 3)
Operating range
(see note 2)
Four, M3 set screws
with hexagonal
holes
12 dia.
Rubber cap
4.2+0.075
−0.025 dia. hole
+0.1
4.36 -0.05 dia.
Note: 1. Operation is possible in any direction other than the axial direction (indicated by the arrow ↓).
2. Use only the area within the top 30 mm of the rod as the operating part. (Do not use the area that falls within 100 mm from the mounting
hole as the operating part. Using this area may cause damage to the steel wire.)
3. The steel wire can be replaced if damaged. (Model: Lever for HNJS55)
General-purpose Basic Switch
Z
F-181
Limit
Switches
4.36+0.1
−0.05 dia.
Basic Models (Drip-proof) with Terminal Protective Cover
Pin Plunger
OF max.
6SR (stainless-steel plunger)
Z-15GA55-B5V
4.36+0.1
−0.05 dia.
RF min.
PT max.
OT min.
MD max.
2.45 to 4.22 N
{250 to 431 gf}
1.12 N {114 gf}
2.2 mm
0.13 mm
0.06 mm
OP
15.9±0.4 mm
OF max.
RF min.
PT max.
OT min.
MD max.
5.30 N {541 gf}
1.12 N {114 gf}
2.4 mm
3.5 mm
0.06 mm
OP
37.8±1.2 mm
OF max.
RF min.
PT max.
OT min.
MD max.
5.30 N {541 gf}
1.12 N {114 gf}
1.8 mm
5.5 mm
0.06 mm
OP
21.8±0.8 mm
3.9 dia.
4.2+0.075
−0.025 dia. hole
Z-15GK3A55-B5V
17 dia.
8.35 dia.
11.9SR (stainless-steel plunger)
4.2+0.075
−0.025 dia. hole
4.36
+0.1
−0.05
dia.
Panel Mount Plunger
8.35 dia.
Z-15GQA55-B5V
11.9SR (stainless-steel plunger)
Two hexagonal
nuts (2 t × 14
width across flat
Two lock nuts
(2 t × 15.6
width across
flats)
16 dia.
4.36+0.1
−0.05 dia.
4.2+0.075
−0.025 dia. hole
Note: Do not use the M12 mounting screw and the case mounting hole at the same time, or the case may be damaged.
Panel Mount Roller Plunger
12.7 dia. × 4.8
(stainless-steel roller)
Z-15GQ22A55-B5V
Two hexagonal nuts
(3 t × 17 width
across flats)
OF max.
RF min.
PT max.
OT min.
MD max.
5.30 N {541 gf}
1.12 N {114 gf}
1.8 mm
3.58 mm
0.06 mm
OP
33.4±1.2 mm
16 dia.
4.36+0.1
−0.05 dia.
4.2+0.075
−0.025 dia. hole
Note: Do not use the M12 mounting screw and the case mounting hole at the same time, or the case may be damaged.
F-182
General-purpose Basic Switch Z
Panel Mount Cross-roller Plunger
Z-15GQ21A55-B5V
12.7 dia. × 4.8 (stainless-steel roller)
Two hexagonal
nuts (3 t × 17
width across flats)
OF max.
RF min.
PT max.
OT min.
MD max.
5.30 N {541 gf}
1.12 N {114 gf}
1.8 mm
3.58 mm
0.06 mm
OP
33.4±1.2 mm
16 dia.
4.2+0.075
−0.025 dia. hole
4.36+0.1
−0.05 dia.
Long Hinge Lever
Z-15GW44A55-B5V
100R
4.36+0.1
−0.05 dia.
Hinge Lever
Short Hinge Roller Lever
9.5 dia. × 4 (plastic roller)
26.6R
4.36+0.1
−0.05 dia.
OF max.
RF min.
OT min.
MD max.
0.98 N {100 gf}
0.14 N {14 gf}
5.6 mm
2 mm
FP max.
OP
28.2 mm
19±0.8 mm
OF max.
RF min.
OT min.
MD max.
1.96 N {200 gf}
0.41 N {42 gf}
2.4 mm
0.8 mm
FP max.
OP
32.9 mm
30.2±0.4 mm
OF max.
RF min.
OT min.
MD max.
1.27 N {130 gf}
0.21 N {21 gf}
4 mm
1.6 mm
FP max.
OP
36.5 mm
30.2±0.8 mm
4.2+0.075
−0.025 dia. hole
Hinge Roller Lever
9.5 dia. × 4 (plastic roller)
48.5R
(see note)
4.36+0.1
−0.05 dia.
33 mm
19±1.2 mm
4.2+0.075
−0.025 dia. hole
t = 1 (stainless-steel lever)
Z-15GW22A55-B5V
FP max.
OP
4.2+0.075
−0.025 dia. hole
63.5R
4.36+0.1
−0.05 dia.
OT min.
MD max.
0.88 N
{90 gf}
1.14 N
{116 gf}
5.6 mm
3.5 mm
RF min.
t = 1 (stainless-steel lever)
Z-15GWA55-B5V
Z-15GW2A55-B5V
OF max.
t = 1 (stainless-steel lever)
4.2+0.075
−0.025 dia. hole
Note: t = 1 (stainless-steel lever)
General-purpose Basic Switch
Z
F-183
Limit
Switches
Note: Do not use the M12 mounting screw and the case mounting hole at the same time, or the case may be damaged.
Unidirectional Short Hinge Roller Lever
Z-15GW2277A55-B5V
9.5 dia. × 4 (plastic roller)
t = 1 (stainless-steel lever)
31.9R
11.1R
OF max.
RF min.
OT min.
MD max.
1.77 N {181 gf}
0.49 N {50 gf}
2.4 mm
0.8 mm
FP max.
OP
43.6 mm
41.3±0.8 mm
34.1 max.
4.2+0.075
−0.025 dia. hole
4.36+0.1
−0.05 dia.
Maintained-contact Models
Pin Plunger
Plunger
Z-15ER
4.2+0.075
−0.025 dia. hole
2.3 dia.
2.3SR (stainless steel plunger)
Reset position
7.1 min.
4.36+0.1
−0.05 dia.
Reset button
(plastic plunger)
6.4 dia. Reset free position
9.5 max.
OF max.
PT max.
OT min.
1.96 to 2.50 N
{200 to 255 gf}
0.4 mm
0.13 mm
OP
15.9±0.4 mm
Reset Button
OF max.
OT min.
Slim Spring Plunger
Z-15ESR
(See note.)
5.2 dia.
4 dia.
4.2+0.075
−0.025
dia. hole
Reset position
7.1 min.
9 dia.
Reset button
(plastic plunger)
4.36+0.1
−0.05 dia.
6.4 dia. Reset free
position
9.5 max.
0.55 to 2.79 N
{56 to 285 gf}
0.4 mm
Plunger
OF max.
PT max.
OT min.
2.65 N {270 gf}
0.4 mm
1.6 mm
OP
28.2±0.5 mm
Reset Button
OF max.
OT min.
2.79 N {285 gf}
0.4 mm
Note: Stainless steel plunger (tip only, flat, R1 bevel).
Hinge Lever
t=1 (stainless steel lever)
Z-15EWR
Lever Tip
63.5R
Reset position
7.1 min.
4.36+0.1
−0.05 dia.
4.2+0.075
−0.025 dia. hole
Reset button
(plastic button)
F-184
General-purpose Basic Switch Z
OF max.
OT min.
0.54 N {55 gf}
5.6 mm
FP max.
OP
28.2 mm
19±0.8 mm
Reset Button
6.4 dia. Reset free position
9.5 max.
OF max.
OT min.
2.94 N {0.3 gf}
0.4 mm
■ Terminals
Basic Models (General-purpose) & Split-contact Models
Basic (General-purpose) Models
Split-contact Models
Solder Terminal
Screw Terminals (-B)
Screw Terminals (Y-B)
5.6
6.4
9.2
11.9
20
20
25.4±0.1 11.9
17.45±0.2
23
17.45±0.2
Three, M4 × 5.5
Terminal screws
(with toothed
washer)
49.2
Appropriate terminal screw tightening
torque:
0.78 to 1.18 N⋅m {8 to 12 kgf⋅cm}.
17.1
17.45±0.2
Five, M3.5 × 5.5
terminal screws
(with toothed
washer)
49.2
Appropriate terminal screw tightening torque:
0.49 to 0.78 N⋅m {5 to 8 kgf⋅cm}.
Note: With reverse action models (Z-15GM), the positions of NO and NC terminals are re- Note: With reverse action models (Z-10FM), the poversed.
sitions of NO and NC terminals are reversed.
Limit
Switches
Basic Models (Drip-proof) without Terminal Protective Cover
Without Terminal Protective Cover
9.2
20
20
17.45±0.2
49.2
Three, M4 × 5.5
Terminal screws
(with toothed
washer)
Note: With reverse action models (Z-15GM), the positions of NO and NC terminals are reversed.
General-purpose Basic Switch
Z
F-185
Molded Terminals (Drip-proof Type/Molded Terminal)
■ Model Number Legend
■ Dimensions
[email protected]@@ @M
L/R Type
1
2 3 4
1. Drip-proof Type
2. Lead Outlets
None: VSF
19: VCT
3. Directions of Lead Outlets
Refer to the following diagrams.
4. Length of Lead Outlets
0.5: 0.5 m
1:
1m
2:
2m
3:
3m
(The following illustration is the R type.)
VSF
12
4
13
■ Contact Form
VCT
19
11
20
Lead wire
a
b
d
D Type
COM NO
NC
(Black) (White) (Red)
Note: With the reverse action
model (Z-15GM), the positions of NO and NC terminals are reversed.
Lead wire
a
b
d
VSF
12
4
12
VCT
19
11
16
Lead Wire Specifications
Lead wire
VSF (single-core, vinyl cord)
Nominal crosssectional area (mm2)
1.25
VCT (vinyl-insulated cable)
Finished outer diameter (mm) Connection to terminal
Approx. 3.1 dia.
Three-core: approx. 10.5 dia.
Note: No models with molded terminals are approved by UL, CSA, or TÜV.
F-186
General-purpose Basic Switch Z
Black: COM
White: NO
Red: NC
Length (m)
0.5, 1, 2, 3
Precautions
Refer to the Technical Information for Basic Switches (Cat. No. C122) for common precautions.
■ Correct Use
Mounting
Use M4 screws with plane washers and spring washers to mount the
Switch. Tighten each mounting screw securely to a torque of 1.18 to
1.47 N·m {12 to 15 kgf·cm}.
Basic Models (General-purpose) & Split-contact Models
Two, 4.2 dia. mounting holes or M4
Panel Mount Plunger
Panel Mount Roller Plunger
12.5+0.2
0 dia.
12.5+0.2
0 dia.
25.4±0.1
Basic Models (Drip-proof) without Terminal Protective Cover
Panel Mount Plunger
12.5+0.2
0 dia.
Panel Mount Roller Plunger
Limit
Switches
Two, 4.2 dia. mounting holes or M4
12.5+0.2
0 dia.
25.4±0.1
Panel Mount Switch ([email protected]@, [email protected]@)
When mounting the panel mount plunger model with screws on a
side surface, be careful of the dog angle and operation speed.
Excessive dog angle or operation speed may damage the Switch.
The Switch can be panel mounted, provided that the hexagonal nut
of the actuator is tightened to a torque of 2.94 to 4.9 N·m {30 to
50 kgf·cm}.
When using the panel mount plunger model mounted with screws on
a side surface, be careful not to apply a large shock. Applying a
shock exceeding 100G may damage the Switch.
When using the panel mount plunger model mounted with screws on
a side surface, remove the hexagonal nuts from the actuator.
Models with Drip-proof Terminal Cover
([email protected])
Wiring
To attach the Protective Cover to the case, hold the cover in almost
parallel to the case and then push it to the case. If the cover is
pushed diagonally, the rubber packing may slip off, degrading the
sealability of the Switch.
Incorrect
Terminal with
toothed washer
High-sensitivity Switch (Z-15H)
When using the Switch in a DC circuit, be sure to provide an arc suppressor as well because the small contact gap of the Switch may
result in contact troubles.
In an application where a high repeat accuracy is required, limit the
current that flows through the Switch to within 0.1 A. Also, use a relay
to control a high-capacity load if the Switch is connected to such a
load. (In this case, the exciting current of the relay coil is the load of
the Switch.)
Rubber packing
Correct
Do not apply a force of 19.6 N {2 kgf} or higher to the pin plunger.
Exercise care that the environment conditions such as temperature
and humidity do not change abruptly.
Use round solderless terminals having the following dimensions to
connect leads to the terminals. Tighten the screws of terminals to a
torque of 0.78 to 1.18 N·m {8 to 12 kgf·cm}.
Use the terminal shown below.
4.3 dia.
8
20 max.
General-purpose Basic Switch
Z
F-187
Use M4 small screws with spring toothed washer are used as the terminal screws.
Drip-proof Switch ([email protected])
The Switch is not perfectly oil-tight; so do not dip it in oil or water.
The rubber boots are made from weather-resistive chloroprene rubber.
Do not use Basic Switches in places with radical changes in temperature.
Split-contact Switch ([email protected])
The applicable current varies depending on how the contacts are
used. If the Switch is connected in series, the Switch can endure a
current 1.5 to 2 times higher than the current that can be applied in
parallel connection.
Micro Load Applicable Range
Using a model for ordinary loads to open or close the contact of a
micro load circuit may result in faulty contact. Use models that operate in the following range. However, even when using micro load
models within the operating range shown here, if inrush current
occurs when the contact is opened or closed, it may increase contact
wear and so decrease life expectancy. Therefore, insert a contact
protection circuit where necessary.
The minimum applicable load is the N-level reference value. This
value indicates the malfunction reference level for the reliability level
of 60% (λ 60). The equation, λ 60 = 0.5×10−6/operations indicates
that the estimated malfunction rate is less than 1/2,000,000 operations with a reliability level of 60%.
DC voltage (V)
A cable 8.5 to 10.5 mm in diameter can be applicable to the sealing
rubber of the lead outlet of the Switch. A two-core or three-core VCT
cable having a cross-sectional area of 1.25 mm2 is especially suitable for this.
0.8 mW
26 mA 100 mA
Flexible Rod Switch ([email protected]@55, Dripproof)
Operating
range for
generalload models
Z-15H
Z-15G
Z-15E
Z-10FY
Z-15ER
Operating range
for micro load
models Z-01H
When the rod is fully swung, the Switch may operate when the lever
returns, causing chattering. Use a circuit that compensates for chattering wherever possible.
Do not switch the rod to the fullest extent when the Switch is to break
a power circuit because such a practice may cause metal deposition
to occur between the mating contacts of the Switch.
1 mA
100 mA 160 mA
Current (mA)
Item
Minimum applicable
load
Z-01H
1 mA at 5 VDC
[email protected], Z-10FY
160 mA at 5 VDC
Others
Do not apply an excessive force to the mounting bracket with a
screwdriver or a similar object when attaching or detaching the protective cover; otherwise, the cover will be deformed.
Screwdriver
This terminal protective cover cannot be used with models whose
model number does not have the prefix “-B5V.”
Terminal protective covers can be ordered separately for maintenance use.
■ Accessories (Order Separately)
Refer to Z/A/X/DZ Common Accessories for details about Terminal
Covers, Separators, and Actuators.
ALL DIMENSIONS SHOWN ARE IN MILLIMETERS.
To convert millimeters into inches, multiply by 0.03937. To convert grams into ounces, multiply by 0.03527.
Cat. No. B001-E1-12
F-188
In the interest of product improvement, specifications are subject to change without notice.
General-purpose Basic Switch Z
Z/A/X/DZ Common Accessories
Z/A/X/DZ
Ordering Information
■ List of Models
Terminal Covers (Sold Separately)
Common to Z, A, X, and DZ Models
The Terminal Cover is secured with mounting screws and protects the casing and terminal wires from dust, vibration, or fingers, thus preventing
terminal short-circuiting, ground faults, wire disconnection or improper connection, and electric shock accidents.
Terminal Covers made of phenol resin have five or six thin wall sections. These sections can be torn open for providing holes for lead cables at
desired points.
Soldering terminal use
Mounting direction
Screw terminal use
Remarks
Model
Phenol resin
Side mounting
AP-A
AP-B
---
Metal press mold
Side mounting
AP1-A
AP1-B
Used for AP-A and AP-B
Vinyl chloride
Side mounting
AP-Z
---
Note: Use the screw-terminal use Terminal Cover for DZ-series soldering-terminal models.
Separator (Sold Separately)
Common to Z, A, X, and DZ Models
Model: Separator for Z
Actuators (Sold Separately)
Common to Z and X Models
A Switch can be actuated by a cam or an appropriate object, in which case, use one of the following Actuators according to the application.
Actuator
Common to Z and X models
Hinge lever
XAA-1
Hinge roller lever
ZAA-2
Panel mount plunger
Short
ZAQ-3
Medium
ZAQ-2
Long
ZAQ-1
Panel mount roller plunger
ZAQ-22
Z/A/X/DZ Common Accessories
Z/A/X/DZ
F-189
Limit
Switches
Application
Material
Dimensions
■ Dimensions and Operating Characteristics
Terminal Covers
AP-A
AP-B
Soldering Terminal Use
(Phenol Resin)
Screw Terminal Use
(Phenol Resin)
2.15R
2.15R
Note: The Cover has five thin, easy-to-separate portions for easy lead wire connections.
Note: The Cover has six thin, easy-to-separate portions for easy lead wire connections.
AP1-A
AP1-B
Soldering Terminal Use
(Metal Press Mold)
Screw Terminal Use
(Metal Press Mold)
2.15R
2.15R
Note: 1. The Cover has five holes for easy
lead wire connections.
2. AP1-A should be used with AP-A.
Note: 1. The Cover has six holes for easy
lead wire connections.
2. AP1-B should be used with AP-B.
AP-Z
Soldering or Screw Terminal Use
(Vinyl Chloride)
Pressure plate
(t1 steel)
Two, 4.2 dia.
Cable Pull-out Dimension
A-A' cross-section
8 dia.
Nut
M3 × 20 Phillips screw
(with plane washer and
nut)
Z/A/X/DZ Common Accessories Z/A/X/DZ
6 dia.
Note: A 6-dia. or 8-dia. cable can be used by
cutting the cable pull-out hole to the size
of the cable to be used.
Note: Each dimension has a tolerance of ±0.4 mm unless otherwise specified. (±0.8 mm for the AP-Z)
F-190
B-B' cross-section
Separator
Two, 4.5 dia.
Note: 1. Each dimension has a tolerance of +0.4 mm unless
otherwise specified.
2. The material is EAVTC (Epoxide Alkyd Varnished
Tetron Cloth) and its heat-resisting temperature is
130°C.
t = 0.34
Actuators
Note: These Actuators are not provided with Switches.
Hinge Lever
XAA-1
Model
Two, M4 30
Two, M4
Stainless steel
4.90 n {500 gf}
1.67 N {170 gf}
6 mm
12.7 mm
2.2 mm
FP max.
32.9±1.6 mm
X-10G-B
4.90 n {500 gf}
1.67 N {170 gf}
6 mm
12.7 mm
3.3 mm
Limit
Switches
60R
Z-15G-B
OF max.
RF min.
PT max.
OT min.
MD max.
Hinge Roller Lever
Model
Two, M4 30
Two, M4
ZAA-2
9.5 dia. × 4.8 (stainlesssteel roller)
Stainless steel
Z-15G-B
OF max.
RF min.
PT max.
OT min.
MD max.
4.90 n {500 gf}
1.67 N {170 gf}
6 mm
12.7 mm
2.2 mm
FP max.
44.5±1.6 mm
X-10G-B
4.90 n {500 gf}
1.67 N {170 gf}
6 mm
12.7 mm
3.3 mm
58.5R
Note: Each dimension has a tolerance of ±0.4 mm unless otherwise specified.
Z/A/X/DZ Common Accessories
Z/A/X/DZ
F-191
Short Panel Mount Plunger
ZAQ-3
Model
23.3
12SR
M12 × 1 mounting
screw
(Note 1)
2 t × 14 width across
flats
(Note 3)
14.5
dia.
2 t × 15.6 width
across flats
Two M4 nuts
Two M4 × 25 ± round
head screw
(Note 2)
ZAQ-3
Z-15E-B
7.9 dia.
OF max.
X-10G-B
5.39 N
{550 gf}
1.12 N
{114 gf}
1 mm
4.5 mm
0.2 mm
PT max.
OT min.
MD max.
8.34 N
{850 gf}
1.12 N
{114 gf}
0.8 mm
4.8 mm
0.15 mm
OP
27.8±1.5 mm
RF min.
Note: 1. Stainless-steel pin plunger
2. Bronze frame
3. Incomplete screw section part
with a maximum of 1.5 mm
Note: This Actuator (pin plunger) can be used with Standard Pin Plungers (Z-15G(-B), Z-15E(-B), X-10G(-B), DZ-10G-1A(-1B)) for the Z, X, and
DZ models.
Medium Panel Mount Plunger
Model
23.3
12SR
M12 × 1 mounting
screw
2 t × 14 width across
flats
(Note 1)
2 t × 15.6 width
across flats
(Note 3)
ZAQ-2
Z-15E-B
7.9 dia.
ZAQ-2
14.5
dia.
Two M4 × 25
screw
OF max.
X-10G-B
PT max.
OT min.
MD max.
8.34 N
{850 gf}
1.12 N
{114 gf}
0.8 mm
4.8 mm
0.15 mm
OP
53.2±1.5 mm
RF min.
5.39 N
{550 gf}
1.12 N
{114 gf}
1 mm
4.5 mm
0.2 mm
Note: 1. Stainless-steel pin plunger
2. Bronze frame
3. Incomplete screw section part
with a maximum of 1.5 mm
Two M4 nuts
(Note 2)
Note: This Actuator (pin plunger) can be used with Standard Pin Plungers (Z-15G(-B), Z-15E(-B), X-10G(-B), DZ-10G-1A(-1B)) for the Z, X, and
DZ models.
Model
Long Panel Mount Plunger
7.9 dia.
ZAQ-1
OF max.
23.3
12SR
M12 × 1 mounting
screw
2 t × 14 width across
flats
2 t × 15.6 width
across flats
14.5
dia.
Two, M4 × 25 screws
(Note 2)
X-10G-B
PT max.
OT min.
MD max.
8.34 N
{850 gf}
1.12 N
{114 gf}
0.8 mm
20.6 mm
0.15 mm
OP
69.1±1.5 mm
(Note 1)
(Note 3)
ZAQ-1
Z-15E-B
RF min.
5.39 N
{550 gf}
1.12 N
{114 gf}
1 mm
20.4 mm
0.2 mm
Note: 1. Stainless-steel pin plunger
2. Bronze frame
3. Incomplete screw section part
with a maximum of 1.5 mm
Two, M4 nuts
Note: This Actuator (pin plunger) can be used with Standard Pin Plungers (Z-15G(-B), Z-15E(-B), X-10G(-B), DZ-10G-1A(-1B)) for the Z, X, and
DZ models.
F-192
Z/A/X/DZ Common Accessories Z/A/X/DZ
Panel Mount Roller Plunger
Model
ZAQ-22
48
PT
12.7 dia. (Note 1)
4.8
23.3±0.25
OP
1.6
20.7
(Note 3)
14.5
dia.
18.9
ZAQ-22
Z-15E-B
Two hex nuts
5-mm thickness, 19 mm
between opposing edges
With groove for roller
penetration
M12 × 1 mounting
screw
23.9
OF max.
PT max.
OT min.
MD max.
8.34 N
{850 gf}
1.12 N
{114 gf}
0.8 mm
20.6 mm
0.15 mm
OP
37±0.8 mm
RF min.
X-10G-B
5.39 N
{550 gf}
1.12 N
{114 gf}
1 mm
20.4 mm
0.2 mm
Note: This actuator (roller plunger) can be
used
pin plungers
(Z-× 25
Spring washer
(Note
2) with standard
Two, M4
25.4±0.2
20.7
11.9 Z-15E(-B), and DZ-10Gscrews
15G(-B),
49.2
1A(-1B)).
It cannot be used with X models.
Note: 1. Stainless-steel pin plunger
Limit
Switches
2. Bronze frame
3. Incomplete screw section part
with a maximum of 1.5 mm.
Z/A/X/DZ Common Accessories
Z/A/X/DZ
F-193
ALL DIMENSIONS SHOWN ARE IN MILLIMETERS.
To convert millimeters into inches, multiply by 0.03937. To convert grams into ounces, multiply by 0.03527.
Cat. No. B106-E1-01
F-194
In the interest of product improvement, specifications are subject to change without notice.
Z/A/X/DZ Common Accessories Z/A/X/DZ
Limit Switches
Technical Information
■ Safety Precautions
For the individual precautions for each Switch, refer to the Precautions section of each Switch.
!WARNING
i (Inrush current)
Do not touch the charged switch terminals while the Limit Switch
has carry current. Doing so may result in electric shock.
!WARNING
Do not assemble the Limit Switch or touch the interior of the Limit
Switch while power is being supplied to the Limit Switch. Doing so
may result in electric shock.
Be sure to connect a fuse with a breaking current 1.5 to 2 times the
rated current to the Limit Switch in parallel in order to protect the
Limit Switch from damage due to short-circuiting.
Maintain an appropriate insulation distance between wires connected to the Limit Switch.
io (Constant
current)
Wiring
If the wiring method is incorrect, the wires may get caught by some
object or the lead wires may be pulled excessively. Make sure that
the lead wires are connected without extraordinary force and that the
wires are supported securely.
If the Limit Switch has no ground terminal, ground the mounting
panel to which the Limit Switch is mounted unless the Limit Switch is
of double insulation construction falling under class II. Such models
(e.g., the D4D-N, D4D-R, D4DS, SHL, D4E-N, ZC, or D4MC) ensure
good insulation characteristics. Therefore, no ground terminals are
incorporated.
Do not use the Limit Switch in places with flammable or explosive
gas without taking any countermeasures against explosion or fires.
Otherwise switching arcs or heat radiation may cause a fire or explosion.
Be sure to protect the Limit Switch with appropriate explosion-proof
barriers or use a Limit Switch of explosion-proof construction. The
Explosion-proof Limit Switch is not available for use in all types of
gas or locations. Refer to the Explosion-proof Device General Catalog for details.
The life of the Limit Switch greatly varies with switching conditions.
Before using the Limit Switch, be sure to test the Limit Switch under
actual conditions. Make sure that the number of switching operations
is within the permissible range.
If a deteriorated Switch is used continuously, insulation failures, contact weld, contact failures, switch damage, or switch burnout may
result.
Some types of load have a great difference between normal current
and inrush current. Make sure that the inrush current is within the
permissible value. The greater the inrush current in the closed circuit
is, the greater the contact abrasion or shift will be. Consequently,
contact weld, contact separation failures, or insulation failures may
result. Furthermore, the Limit Switch may become broken or damaged.
Incorrect
Terminal box
Correct
Terminal box
Pay the utmost attention so that each terminal is wired correctly. If
the terminal is wired incorrectly, the Limit Switch will not function.
Furthermore, not only will the Limit Switch have a bad influence on
the external circuit, the Limit Switch itself may become damaged or
burnt.
Mounting
Do not modify the actuator, otherwise the operating characteristics
and performance of the actuator will change.
Do not enlarge the mounting holes of the Limit Switch or modify the
Limit Switch, otherwise insulation failures or housing damage may
result. If the Limit Switch has a force separation mechanism, a modification of the Limit Switch may cause injury.
Do not apply oil, grease, or other lubricants to the moving parts of the
actuator, otherwise the actuator may not operate correctly. Furthermore, intrusion of oil, grease, or other lubricants inside the Limit
Switch may cause failures in the Limit Switch.
When mounting the Limit Switch to the mounting panel, maintain a
minimum insulation distance of 1 mm between the mounting panel
and the Limit Switch. If the insulation distance is insufficient, add an
appropriate insulation guard or separator, otherwise a fire or current
leakage may occur or an electric shock may be received.
Mount the Limit Switch and secure it with the specified screws tightened to the specified torque along with flat washers and springs. The
actuator of the Limit Switch mounted to a panel with excessive tightening torque may not operate correctly if the Limit Switch is a pushbutton model.
Be sure to wire the Limit Switch so that the conduit opening is free of
metal powder or any other impurities.
Limit Switches
Technical Information
F-195
Limit
Switches
If the Limit Switch incorporates a ground terminal, be sure to ground
it through an appropriate wire, otherwise an electric shock may be
received.
If glue or bonding agent is applied, make sure that it does not adhere
to the movable parts or intrude inside the Limit Switch, otherwise the
Limit Switch may not work correctly or cause contact failure. Some
types of glue or bonding agent may generate a gas that may have a
bad influence on the Limit Switch. Pay the utmost attention when
selecting the glue or locking agent.
Do not drop or disassemble the Limit Switch, otherwise the Limit
Switch will not be capable of full performance. Furthermore, the Limit
Switch may become broken or burnt.
If the contacts are not turned ON or OFF over a long time, the contacts may become oxidized. Consequently, the reliability of the contacts may decrease, which may result in accidents.
Actuation of the Limit Switch over a long time may deteriorate parts
of the Limit Switch and a releasing failure may result. Be sure to
check the condition of the Limit Switch regularly.
Some models allow changes in head directions. When changing the
head of such a model, make sure that the head is free of any foreign
substance. Tighten each screw of the head to the rated torque.
Be sure to take measures so that no foreign material, oil, or water will
penetrate into the Limit Switch through the conduit opening. Be sure
to attach a connector suited to the cable thickness and tighten the
connector securely to the rated torque.
Apply Limit Switch models incorporating a force-separation function,
such as the D4BS or D4BL, for safety doors or emergency stop circuits.
Do not impose shock or vibration on the actuator while it is fully
pressed. Otherwise, the actuator will partially abrade and an actuation failure may result.
Mechanical Characteristics
Operating Force, Stroke, and Contact Characteristics
The following graph indicates the relationship between operating
force and stroke or stroke and contact force. In order to operate the
Limit Switch with high reliability, it is necessary to use the Limit
Switch within an appropriate contact force range. If the Limit Switch
is used in the normally closed condition, the dog must be installed so
that the actuator will return to the FP when the actuator is actuated
by the object. If the Limit Switch is used in the normally open condition, the actuator must be pressed to 70% to 100% of the OT (i.e.,
60% to 80% of the TT) and any slight fluctuation must be absorbed
by the actuator.
If the full stroke is set close to the OP or RP, contact instability may
result. If the full stroke is set to the TTP, the actuator or switch may
become damaged due to the inertia of the dog. In that case, adjust
the stroke with the mounting panel or the dog. Refer to page 200,
Dog Design, page 201, Stroke Settings vs. Dog Movement Distance,
and page 202, Dog Surface for details.
The following graph shows an example of changes in contact force
according to the stroke. The contact force near the OP or RP is
unstable, and the Limit Switch cannot maintain high reliability. Furthermore, the Limit Switch cannot withstand strong vibration or
shock.
OF
■ Correct Use
Stroke
Limit Switch Operation
Contact force
The Limit Switch in actual operation may cause accidents that cannot
be foreseen from the design stage. Therefore, the Limit Switch must
be practically tested before actual use.
FP
Changes to opposite side
When testing the Limit Switch, be sure to apply the actual load condition together with the actual operating environment.
Changes to opposite side
OTP
Stroke
All the performance ratings in this catalog are provided under the following conditions unless otherwise specified.
Inductive load:
A minimum power factor of 0.4 (AC) or a maximum time constant of 7 ms (DC)
Lamp load:
An inrush current 10 times higher than the normal
current
Mechanical Conditions
Motor load:
An inrush current 8 times higher than the normal
current
The actuator must be selected according to the operating method.
The rated values are obtained from tests conducted in accordance
with JIS C4508.
1. Ambient temperature: +5°C to 35°C
2. Ambient humidity: 40% to 70%.
Note: An inductive load causes a problem especially in DC circuitry.
Therefore, it is essential to know the time constants (L/R) of the
load.
Solenoid
(Approximately 10 to 20 times higher)
Incandescent
lamp (Approximately 10 to 15 times
higher) Motor
(Approximately
5 to 10 times
higher)
Relay
(Approximately 4 to 5
times higher)
F-196
Limit Switches Technical
Check the operating speed and switching frequency.
1. If the operating speed is extremely low, the switching of the movable contact will become unstable, thus resulting in incorrect contact or contact weld.
If the operating speed is extremely low or the pushbutton needs to
be set between the FP and OP, consult your OMRON representative in advance.
2. If the operating speed is extremely high, the Limit Switch may
break due to shock. If the switching frequency is high, the switching of the contacts cannot catch up with the switching frequency.
Make sure that the switching frequency is within the rated switching frequency. If a higher switching frequency is required, use of a
proximity sensor is recommended.
Do not impose excessive force on the actuator, otherwise the actuator may become damaged or not operate correctly.
Make sure that the stroke is set within the suitable range specified for
the model, or otherwise the Limit Switch may break.
Make sure that the operating direction of the actuator is parallel to
the axis of the actuator if the actuator is a pushbutton type. If they are
not in parallel, partial abrasion may result and the actuator may soon
become damaged. Refer to page 199, Operation for details.
Information
Electrical Characteristics
If the load is inductive, counter-electromotive voltage will be generated. The higher the voltage is, the higher the generated energy will
be, which will increase the abrasion of the contacts and contact relocation phenomena. Be sure to use the Limit Switch within the rated
conditions.
Electrical Conditions
The switching load capacity of the Limit Switch greatly varies
between AC and DC. Always be sure to apply the rated load. The
control capacity will drastically drop if it is a DC load. This is because
a DC load has no current zero-cross point, unlike an AC load. Therefore, if an arc is generated, it may continue comparatively for a long
time. Furthermore, the current direction is always the same, which
results in a contact relocation phenomena whereby the contacts easily stick to each other and do not separate when the surfaces of the
contacts are uneven.
If the load is a minute voltage or current load, use a dedicated Limit
Switch for minute loads. The reliability of silver-plated contacts,
which are used by standard Limit Switches, will be insufficient if the
load is a minute voltage or current load.
Contact Protective Circuit
Apply a contact protective circuit to extend the contact life, prevent noise, and suppress the generation of carbide or nitric acid. Be sure to apply
the contact protective circuit correctly, otherwise an adverse effect may occur.
The following provides typical examples of contact protective circuits. If the Limit Switch is used in an excessively humid location for switching a
load that easily generates arcs, such as an inductive load, the arcs may generate NOx, which will change into HNO3 if it reacts with moisture. Consequently, the internal metal parts may corrode and the Limit Switch may fail. Be sure to select the ideal contact preventive circuit from the following.
Typical Examples of Contact Protective Circuits
Applicable
current
AC
CR circuit
DC
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Energy stored in the coil is changed into
current by the diode connected in parallel
to the load. Then the current flowing to
the coil is consumed and Joule heat is
generated by the resistance of the inductive load. The reset time delay with this
method is longer than that in the CR
method.
No
Yes
This method will be effective if the reset Use a Zener diode at a low Zener voltage.
time delay caused by the diode method is
too long.
Yes
Yes
This method makes use of constant-volt- --age characteristic of the varistor so that
no high-voltage is imposed on the contacts. This method causes a reset time
delay.
Connecting a varistor in parallel to the
load is effective when the supply voltage
is 24 to 48 V and in parallel to the contacts when the supply voltage is 100 to
200 V.
Inductive
load
Power
supply
Diode and Zener diode
method
Power
supply
Inductive
load
Inductive
load
Varistor method
Inductive
load
Power
supply
C: 1 to 0.5 µF x switching current (A)
R: 0.5 to 1 Ω x switching voltage (V)
The values may change according to the
characteristics of the load.
The capacitor suppresses the spark discharge of current when the contacts are
The operating time will be greater if the open. The resistor limits the inrush curload is a relay or solenoid.
rent when the contacts are closed again.
Connecting the CR circuit in parallel to
Consider the roles of the capacitor and
the load is effective when the power sup- resistor and determine ideal capacitance
ply voltage is 24 or 48 V and in parallel to and resistance values through testing.
the contacts when the power supply volt- Use a capacitor that has a low dielectric
age is 100 to 200 V.
strength. When AC is switched, make
sure that the capacitor has no polarity.
Yes
Inductive
load
Power
supply
Element selection
*
Power
supply
Diode method
Feature
*When AC is switched, the load impedance must be lower than the CR impedance.
Limit Switches
The diode must withstand a peak inverse
voltage 10 times higher than the circuit
voltage and a forward current as high or
higher than the load current.
Technical Information
F-197
Limit
Switches
Circuit example
Do not apply contact protective circuits as shown below.
Power
supply
Power
supply
Load
Load
This circuit effectively suppresses arcs
when the contacts are OFF. The capacitor
will be charged, however, when the
contacts are OFF. Consequently, when the
contacts are ON again, short-circuited
current from the capacitance may cause
contact weld.
This circuit effectively suppresses arcs
when the contacts are OFF. When the
contacts are ON again, however, charge
current will flow to the capacitor, which may
result in contact weld.
Switching a DC inductive load is usually more difficult than switching
a resistive load. By using an appropriate contact protective circuit,
however, switching a DC inductive load will be as easy as switching a
resistive load.
Do not contact a single Limit Switch to two power supplies that are
different in polarity or type.
Power Connection Examples
(Connection of Different Polarities)
Application of Limit Switch to a Low-voltage, Low-current
Electronic Circuit
1. If bouncing or chattering of the contacts results and causes problems, take the following countermeasures.
(a) Insert an integral circuit.
(b) Suppress the generation of pulse from the contact bouncing
or chattering of the contacts so that it is less than the noise
margin of the load.
2. Conventional silver-plated contacts are not suited to this application. Use gold-plated contacts, which are ideal for handling minute
voltage or current loads.
3. The contacts of the Limit Switch used for an emergency stop must
be normally open.
In order to protect the Limit Switch from damage due to circuit shortcircuiting, be sure to connect a quick-response fuse with a breaking
current 1.5 to 2 times larger than the rated current to the Limit Switch
in parallel. Some models (e.g., the D4B-N and D4BS) specify the
types of fuses. In that case, be sure to use the specified fuses.
Operating Environment
If the Limit Switch used in locations with oil or water spray or excessive dust is not a water-resistive model or of sealed construction, be
sure to protect the Limit Switch with a protective cover so that the
Limit Switch will not be directly exposed to them.
Incorrect
Incorrect
Correct
Correct
Terminal
box
Connect the load to the same polarities.
Incorrect Power Connection Example
Terminal
box
The materials of Limit Switch may change in quality or deteriorate, if
the Limit Switch is used outdoors or any other location where the
Limit Switch is exposed to special machining oil. Consult your
OMRON representative before selecting the model.
(Connection of Different Power Supplies)
There is a risk of AC and DC mixing.
Incorrect
Be sure to install the Limit Switch so that the Limit Switch is free from
dust or metal powder. The actuator and the switch casing must be
protected from the accumulation of dust or metal powder.
Incorrect
Do not design a circuit where voltage is imposed between contacts,
otherwise contact weld may result.
Incorrect
200 V
100 V
Do not use a circuit that will short-circuit if an error occurs, otherwise
the charged part may melt and break off.
Correct
Do not use the Limit Switch in locations where the Limit Switch is
exposed to hot water at a temperature greater than 60°C or steam.
Do not use the Limit Switch under temperatures or other environmental conditions not within the specified ranges. The rated permissible ambient temperature range varies with the model. Refer to the
specifications in this catalog.
If the Limit Switch is exposed to radical temperature changes, the
thermal shock may deform the Limit Switch and the Limit Switch may
malfunction.
Incorrect
Correct
Separate the
Limit Switch
from hot water.
F-198
Limit Switches Technical
Information
Incorrect
Correct
Prevention of
malfunctioning
Make sure to install the Limit Switch in locations free of vibration,
shock, or resonance. If vibration or shock is continuously imposed on
the Limit Switch, contact failure, malfunction, or decrease in service
life may be caused by abrasive powder generated from the internal
parts. If excessive vibration or shock is imposed on the Limit Switch,
the contacts may malfunction or become damaged.
Do not use the Limit Switch with silver-plated contacts for long periods if the switching frequency of the Limit Switch is comparatively
low or the load is minute. Otherwise, sulfuric film will be generated on
the contacts and contact failures may result. Use the Limit Switch
with gold-plated contacts or use a dedicated Limit Switch for minute
loads instead.
Do not use the Limit Switch in locations with corrosive gas, such as
sulfuric gas (H2S or SO2), ammonium gas (NH3), nitric gas (HNO3),
or chlorine gas (Cl2), or high temperature and humidity. Otherwise,
contact failure or corrosion damage may result.
If the Limit Switch is used in locations with silicone gas, arc energy
may create silicon dioxide (SiO2) on the contacts and a contact failure may result. If there is silicone oil, silicone sealant, or wire covered
with silicone close to the Limit Switch, attach a contact protective circuit to suppress the arcing of the Limit Switch or eliminate the source
of silicone gas generation.
Regular Inspection and Replacement
If the Limit Switch is normally closed with low switching frequency
(e.g., once or less than once a day), a reset failure may result due to
the deterioration of the parts of the Limit Switch. Regularly inspect
the Limit Switch and make sure that the Limit Switch is in good working order.
Outdoor Use
When using the Limit Switch outdoors, make sure that the Limit
Switch is a sealed model. The Limit Switch with IP67 sealing construction does not necessarily mean that the mechanical parts are
also of IP67 construction.
The rubber material exposed to ozone may deteriorate.
Check that the rubber parts are environment-resistive, such as chloroprene, silicone, or fluorine rubber. The following models are recommended.
[email protected] or [email protected]
If the Limit Switch is used in places with sludge or dust powder
sprays, make sure that the mechanical parts are sealed with a rubber
cap.
Due to capillary attraction, rainwater may enter the Limit Switch
through the lead wires or sheath. Be sure to cover the wire connections in a terminal box so that they are not directly exposed to rainwater.
If the Limit Switch is used outdoors, the steel parts of the Limit
Switch (such as the screws and plunger parts) may corrode. Consider the use of outdoor models, such as [email protected] or [email protected], or
proximity sensors in such cases.
The expression “Limit Switch is used outdoors” refers to an environment where the Limit Switch is exposed directly to rainwater or sunlight (e.g., multi-story parking lots) excluding locations with corrosive
gas or salty breezes.
The Limit Switch used outdoors may not release due to icing and
may not satisfy standards for indoor use.
Operation
Carefully determine the position and shape of the cam so that the
actuator will not abruptly snap back, thus causing shock. In order to
operate the Limit Switch at a comparatively high speed, use an
object or cam that keeps the Limit Switch turned ON for a sufficient
time so that the relay or valve will be sufficiently energized.
The shape of the object or cam has a large influence on the life and
operating accuracy of the Limit Switch. The cam must be smooth in
shape.
Incorrect
In addition to the mechanical life or electrical life of the Limit Switch
described previously, the life of the Limit Switch may decrease due to
the deterioration of each part, especially rubber, resin, and metal.
Regularly inspect the Limit Switch and replace any part that has
deteriorated in order to prevent accidents from occurring.
Correct
Snapped
back
Abruptly
actuated
Be sure to mount the Limit Switch securely in a clean location to
ensure ease of inspection and replacement. The Limit Switch with
operation indicator is available, which is ideal if the location is dark or
does not allow easy inspection or replacement.
Incorrect
Difficult to inspect or install
Correct
Snapped
back
Abruptly
actuated
Easy to inspect
The cover must be located
in the direction ensuring
ease of maintenance or inspection
Appropriate force must be imposed on the actuator by the cam or
another object in both rotary operation and linear operation. If the
object touches the lever as shown below, the operating position will
not be stable.
Storage of Limit Switch
Incorrect
Correct
Dog
Dog
When storing the Limit Switch, make sure that the location is free of
corrosive gas, such as H2S, SO2, NH3, HNO3, or Cl2, or dust and
does not have a high temperature or humidity.
Be sure to inspect the Limit Switch before use if it has been stored for
three months or more.
Limit Switches
Technical Information
F-199
Limit
Switches
Be sure to protect the Limit Switch with a cover if the Limit Switch is
in a location where the Limit Switch may be actuated by mistake or
where the Limit Switch is likely to cause an accident.
Unbalanced force must not be imposed on the actuator. Otherwise,
wear and tear on the actuator may result.
Incorrect
Be sure to use the Limit Switch according to the characteristics of the
actuator. If a roller arm lever actuator is used, do not attempt to actuate the Limit Switch in the direction shown below.
Correct
Dog
Dog
Roller
Do not modify the actuator to change the OP.
In the case of a long actuator of an adjustable roller lever type, the
following countermeasures against lever shaking are recommended.
Roller
In the case of a roller-type actuator, the object must touch the actuator at a right angle. Otherwise, the actuator or shaft may deform or
break.
Incorrect
1. Make the rear edge of the object smooth with an angle of 15° to
30° or make it in the shape of a quadratic curve.
2. Design the circuit so that no error signal will be generated.
3. Use or set a switch that is actuated in one direction only.
In the case of a bevel plunger-type actuator, make sure that the width
of the object is wider than that of the plunger.
Correct
Incorrect
Dog
Correct
Dog
Make sure that the actuator does not exceed the OT (overtravel)
range, otherwise the Limit Switch may malfunction. When mounting
the Limit Switch, be sure to adjust the Limit Switch carefully while
considering the whole movement of the actuator.
Operating Speed, Dog Angle, and
Relationship with Actuator
Dog
PT (Pretravel)
Install a stopper.
70% of 100% of
rated OT rated OT
FP (Free position)
OP (Operating position)
OT (Overtravel)
TTP (Total travel position)
Optimum setting
range
Dog Design
Before designing a dog, carefully consider the operating speed and
angle of the dog and their relationship with the shape of the actuator.
The optimum operating speed of a standard dog at an angle of 30° to
45° is 0.5 m/s maximum.
Roller Lever Models
1. Non-overtravel Dog
Distance to the optimum
setting range.
Dog speed: 0.5 m/s max. (standard speed)
Reference line
The Limit Switch may soon malfunction if the OT is excessive. Therefore, adjustments and careful consideration of the position of the
Limit Switch and the expected OT of the actuator are necessary
when mounting the Limit Switch.
Lever set vertically
ϕ
Correct
30°
45°
60°
60° to 90°
Stopper
V max. (m/s)
y
0.4
0.25
0.1
0.05 (low speed)
0.8 (TT)
80% of total travel
Dog speed: 0.5 m/s ≤ V ≤ 2 m/s
When using a pin-plunger-type actuator, make sure that the stroke of
the actuator and the movement of the object are located along a single straight line.
Incorrect
Correct
Dog
Dog
Change lever set angle (θ) according
to dog angle (φ)
θ
F-200
Limit Switches Technical
Information
ϕ
V max. (m/s)
y
45°
45°
0.5
0.5 to 0.8 (TT)
50°
40°
0.6
0.5 to 0.8 (TT)
60° to 55°
30° to 35°
1.3
0.5 to 0.7 (TT)
75° to 65°
15° to 25°
2
0.5 to 0.7 (TT)
Note: The above y values indicate the ratio ranges based on TT (total
travel). Therefore, the optimum pressing distance of the dog is
between 50% and 80% (or 50% and 70%).
2. Overtravel Dog
Bevel Plunger
Dog speed: 0.5 m/s max.
ϕ
30°
20°
ϕ
V max. (m/s)
0.4
0.25
0.1
0.05 (low speed)
y
0.6 to 0.8 (TT)
0.5 to 0.7 (TT)
Note: The above y values indicate the ratio ranges based on TT (total
travel). Therefore, the optimum pressing distance of the dog is
between 60% and 80% (or 50% and 70%).
Lever set vertically
30°
45°
60°
60° to 90°
V max. (m/s)
0.25
0.5
y
0.8 (TT)
80% of total travel
Fork Lever Lock Models
Dog
Dog speed: 0.5 m/s min.
If the speed of the overtravel dog is comparatively high, make the
rear edge of the object smooth at an angle of 15° to 30° or make it in
the shape of a quadratic curve. Then lever shaking will be reduced.
Note: Design the shape of the dog so that it does not come in contact
with the other roller lever when the actuator is inverted.
θ
ϕ
V max. (m/s)
y
45°
45°
0.5
0.5 to 0.8 (TT)
50°
40°
0.6
0.5 to 0.8 (TT)
60° to 55°
30° to 35°
1.3
0.5 to 0.7 (TT)
75° to 65°
15° to 25°
2
0.5 to 0.7 (TT)
Note: The above y values indicate the ratio ranges based on TT (total
travel). Therefore, the optimum pressing distance of the dog is
between 50% and 80% (or 50% and 70%).
Stroke Settings vs. Dog Movement
Distance
The following provides information on stroke settings based on the
movement distance of the dog instead of the actuator angle.
The following is the optimum stroke of the Limit Switch
Optimum stroke: PT + (Rated OT x 0.7 to 1.0)
The angle converted from the above: θ1 + θ2
Plunger Models
70% to 100% of rated OT
If the dog overrides the actuator, the front and rear of the dog may be
the same in shape, provided that the dog is not designed to be separated from the actuator abruptly.
Roller Plunger
PT: Pretravel
OT: Overtravel
ϕ
30°
20°
V max. (m/s)
0.25
0.5
y
0.6 to 0.8 (TT)
0.5 to 0.7 (TT)
Ball Plunger
ϕ
30°
20°
V max. (m/s)
0.25
0.5
y
0.6 to 0.8 (TT)
0.5 to 0.7 (TT)
Limit Switches
Technical Information
F-201
Limit
Switches
60° max.
The movement distance of the dog based on the optimum stroke is
expressed by the following formula.
OMRON shall not guarantee the performance and characteristics of
any actuator, plunger, or lever modified by the user.
Movement distance of dog
When using the Limit Switch with a long lever or long rod lever, make
sure that the lever is in the downward direction.
In order to ensure high contact reliability, the correct Limit Switch
must be selected according to the load. For details, refer to the precautions for minute load models in this catalog.
The leads must be wired as shown below.
Correct Method
Locked, indented part
must face up.
Lead wire
Crimp terminal with insulation cover
Terminal screw
Terminal screw
Dog
Terminal
ϕ: Dog angle
θ: Optimum stroke angle
R: Actuator length
X: Dog movement distance
Wrong Method
The distance between the reference line and the bottom of the dog
based on the optimum stroke is expressed by the following formula.
Locked, indented part
must face down.
Lead wire
Crimp terminal with insulation cover
Terminal screw
Terminal screw
Terminal
Terminal
Distance is too short and proper dielectric
strength cannot be maintained.
Dog
Y
Reference line
Mounting hole
a: Distance between reference line and actuator fulcrum
b: R cosθ
r: Roller radius
Y: Distance between reference line and bottom of dog
Dog Surface
The surface of dog touching the actuator should be 6.3 S in quality
and hardened at approximately H450V.
For smooth operation of the actuator, apply molybdenum disulfide
grease to the actuator and the dog touching the actuator. This is
ideal for Limit Switches of drip-proof construction and Multiple Limit
Switch models.
Maintenance and Repairs
The user must not maintain or repair the system. Consult the manufacturer of the system for maintenance or repairs.
Others
The Limit Switch has contacts that must be free of silicone gas, otherwise a contact failure may result. Therefore, do not apply cable
covered with silicone, silicone sealant, or silicone grease to the Limit
Switch.
The sealing of the standard Limit Switch uses nitrile butadien rubber
(NBR), which is highly oil resistive. The NBR exposed to different
types of oil or chemical may, however, deteriorate, swell, or shrink.
Contact your OMRON representative for details.
The WLNJ, [email protected]@32, and [email protected] incorporate exposed seal caps,
which may be deteriorated by ozone. Consult your OMRON representatives before using the above models outdoors, near large bodies of water, or in locations where ozone is generated.
F-202
Terminal
Limit Switches Technical
Information
■ Switch Trouble and Remedial Action
Problem
Mechanical
failure
1. The actuator does not operate.
2. The actuator does not return to
the free position (FP).
3. The
actuator
has
been
deformed.
4. The actuator is worn.
5. The actuator has been damaged.
Probable cause
Remedy
The shape of the cam is incorrect.
The contacting surface of the dog is rough.
The actuator in use is not suitable.
The operating direction of the actuator is not
correct.
Change the design of the cam and smooth the
contacting surface of the cam.
Scrutinize the suitability of the actuator.
Make sure that the actuator does not bounce.
The operation speed is excessively high.
Attach a decelerating device or change the
mounting position of the Limit Switch.
Excessive stroke.
Change the stroke.
The rubber or grease hardened due to low tem- Use a cold-resistive switch.
perature.
The accumulation of sludge, dust, or cuttings. Use a drip-proof model or one with high degree
Dissolution, expansion, or swelling damage to of protection.
Use a protection cover and change the solvent
the rubber parts of the driving mechanism.
and materials.
There is a large deviation in oper- Damage to and wear and tear of the internal
ating position (with malfunctioning movable spring.
involved).
Wear and tear of the internal mechanism.
The loosening of the mounting screws.
Overheating due to a long soldering time.
Solder the Limit Switch quickly.
The Limit Switch has been connected to and Change the lead wire according to the carry
pulled by thick lead wires with excessive force. current and ratings.
High temperature or thermal shock resulted.
Failures related to
chemical or
physical
characteristics
Use a temperature-resistive switch or change
mounting positions.
Contact chattering
Vibration or shock is beyond the rated value. Attach an anti-vibration mechanism.
Shock has been generated from a device other Attach a rubber circuit to the solenoid.
than the Limit Switch.
Increase the operating speed (with an accelerating mechanism).
Too-slow operating speed.
Oil or water penetration
The sealing part has not been tightened suffi- Use a drip-proof or waterproof switch.
ciently.
Use the correct connector and cable. (Use a
The wrong connector has been selected and sealed connector for sealed switches.)
does not conform to the cable.
Use a switch with terminals sealed with resin.
The wrong switch has been selected.
The terminal part is not molded.
The Limit Switch has been burnt or carbonated
due to the penetration of dust or oil.
Deterioration of the rubber part
The expansion and dissolution of the rubber
caused by solvent or lubricating oil.
Use an oil-resistant rubber or Teflon bellows.
Use a weather-resistant rubber or protective
cover.
Cracks due to direct sunlight or ozone.
Damage to the rubber caused by scattered or Use a switch with a protective cover or a metal
bellows.
heated cuttings.
Corrosion (cracks)
The oxidation of metal parts resulted due to
corrosive solvent or lubricating oil.
Use an anti-corrosive switch.
Change the lubricating oil.
The Limit Switch has been operated in a corro- Change mounting positions.
sive environment, near the sea, or on board a Use a crack-resistant material.
ship.
The electrical deterioration of metal parts of
the Limit Switch resulted due to the ionization
of cooling water or lubricating oil.
The cracking of alloyed copper due to rapid
changes in temperature.
Failures re- No actuation or no current breaklated to elec- age caused by contact weld.
tric
characteristics
Inductive interference in the DC circuit.
Add an erasing circuit.
Carbon generated on the surface of the contacts due to switching operations.
Use a switch with a special alloy contact or use
a sealed switch.
A short-circuit or contact weld due to the defor- Reduce the switching frequency or use a
mation and relocation of the contacts.
switch with a large switching capacity.
Contact weld due to an incorrectly connected
power source.
Change the circuit design.
Foreign materials or oil penetrated into the
contact area.
Use a protective box.
Limit Switches
Technical Information
F-203
Limit
Switches
The terminal part wobbles. (The
mold part has been deformed.)
Regularly inspect the Limit Switch.
Use a better quality switch.
Tighten the mounting screws securely. Use a
mounting board.
ALL DIMENSIONS SHOWN ARE IN MILLIMETERS.
To convert millimeters into inches, multiply by 0.03937. To convert grams into ounces, multiply by 0.03527.
Cat. No. C121-E1-01
F-204
In the interest of product improvement, specifications are subject to change without notice.
Limit Switches Technical
Information
Basic Switches
Technical Information
■ Safety Precautions
Types of Load vs. Inrush Current
For the individual precautions for each Switch, refer to the Precautions section of each Switch.
I
(A)
Solenoid
(× 10 to 20)
Incandescent lamp
(× 10 to 15)
!WARNING
Do not wire the Switch or touch any terminal of the Switch while
power is being supplied to the Switch. Doing so may result in electric shock.
Motor
(× 5 to 10)
Relay
(× 4 to 5)
Electrical Conditions
Load
Some types of load have a large difference between usual current
and inrush current. Make sure that the inrush current is within the
permissible value. The higher the inrush current in the closed circuit
is, the more the contact abrasion or shift will be. Consequently, contact weld, contact separation failures, or insulation failures may
result. Furthermore, the Switch may break or become damaged.
t
The rated loads of the Switch are as follows:
Inductive Load:
A load having a minimum power factor of 0.4 (AC)
or a maximum time constant of 7 ms (DC).
Lamp Load:
A load having an inrush current ten times the
steady-state current.
Motor Load:
A load having an inrush current six times the
steady-state current.
Note: It is important to know the time constant (L/R) of an inductive
load in a DC circuit.
If the load is inductive, counter-electromotive voltage will be generated. The higher the voltage is, the higher the generated energy is,
which will increase the abrasion of the contacts and contact relocation phenomena. Make sure to use the Switch within the rated conditions.
Inrush Current
I
(A)
i (Inrush current)
io (Steadystate current)
t
The switching capacity of each Switch appearing on a datasheet is
the rated capacity. When applying the Switch to a circuit with a special load with unusual inrush and switching current and voltage waveforms, be sure to test the Switch under the actual conditions before
use.
If the load is a micro voltage or current load, use a dedicated Switch
for micro loads. The reliability of silver-plated contacts, which are
used by standard Switch models, is insufficient in such a case.
If the Switch is used for switching both micro and high-capacity
loads, be sure to connect relays suitable to the loads.
Basic Switches
Technical Information
F-205
Limit
Switches
The switching capacity of the Switch significantly differs depending
on whether the Switch is used to break an alternating current or a
direct current. Be sure to check both the AC and DC ratings of the
Switch by referring to its datasheet. The control capacity will drop
drastically if it is a DC load. This is because a DC load, unlike an AC
load, has no current zero cross point. Therefore, if an arc is generated, it may continue for a comparatively long time. Furthermore, the
current direction is always the same, which results in contact relocation phenomena, and the contacts hold each other with ease and will
not separate if the surfaces of the contacts are uneven.
Load Connections
Contact Protective Circuit
Example of Power Source Connection (Different Polarity)
Apply a contact protective circuit to extend contact life, prevent noise,
and suppress the generation of carbide or nitric acid. Be sure to
apply the contact protective circuit properly, otherwise an adverse
effect may result. The use of the contact protective circuit may delay
the response time of the load.
The power source may short-circuit in failure mode if the loads are
connected in the same way as the “incorrect” circuit below.
Incorrect
Life Expectancy
Load
The life of the Switch greatly varies with switching conditions. Before
using the Switch, be sure to test the Switch under actual conditions.
Make sure that the number of switching operations is within the permissible range. If a deteriorated Switch is used continuously, insulation failures, contact weld, contact failures, Switch damage, or Switch
burnout may result.
Load
Correct
Load
Mounting
Before mounting, dismounting, wiring, or inspecting the Switch, be
sure to turn OFF the power supply to the Switch, otherwise an electric shock may be received or the Switch may burn.
Load
Connect the same polarities to the load.
Even in a “correct” circuit, note that the insulation performance of the
switch may deteriorate and the switch life may be shortened because
one load is connected to one contact.
Example of Incorrect Connection of Power Source
(Different Current Type)
The DC and AC power may be mixed.
Incorrect
Load
Load
Do not configure a circuit that may place a voltage between the contacts of the Switch; otherwise metal deposition will occur between
the contacts.
Incorrect
200 V
Load
100 V
F-206
Basic Switches Technical
Information
Wiring
The following provides typical examples of contact protective circuits.
If the Switch is used in an excessively humid place for switching a
load that generates arcs with ease, such as an inductive load, the
arcs may generate NOx, which will change into HNO3 (nitric acid) if it
reacts with moisture. Consequently, the internal metal part may be
corroded and result in an operating failure of the Switch. Be sure to
select the best contact preventive circuit from the following in order to
prevent this.
When mounting the Switch to the mounting panel, keep a sufficient
insulation distance between the mounting panel and the Switch. If
the insulation distance is insufficient, add an appropriate insulation
guard or separator. This is especially important if the Switch is
mounted to a metal object.
The Basic Switch does not incorporate a ground terminal. Do not
mount the Basic Switch while power is being supplied.
Typical Examples of Contact Protective Circuit
Applicable
current
AC
CR circuit
Power supply
Power
supply
DC
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Energy stored in the coil is changed
into current by the diode connected
in parallel to the load. Then the current flowing to the coil is consumed
and Joule heat is generated by the
resistance of the inductive load.
The reset time delay in this method
is longer than that of the CR method.
The diode must withstand a peak inverse voltage 10 times higher than the circuit voltage and
a forward current as high as or higher than the
load current.
No
Yes
This method will be effective if the
reset time delay caused by the diode method is too long.
Zener voltage for a Zener diode must be about
1.2 times higher than the power source since
the load may not work under some circumstances.
Yes
Yes
--This method makes use of constant-voltage characteristic of the
varistor so that no high-voltage is
imposed on the contacts. This
method causes a reset time delay
more or less.
It is effective to connect varistor in
parallel to the load when the supply
voltage is 24 to 48 V and in parallel
to the contacts when the supply
voltage is 100 to 200 V.
Power supply
Inductive
load
Inductive
load
Power supply
Varistor
method
Note: When AC is switched, the C: 0.5 to 1 µF per switching current (1 A)
load impedance must be low- R: 0.5 to 1 Ω per switching voltage (1 V)
er than the CR impedance. The values may change according to the characteristics of the load.
The capacitor suppresses the spark discharge
of current when the contacts are open. The reThe operating time will increase if
sistor limits the inrush current when the conthe load is a relay or solenoid.
tacts are closed again. Consider these roles of
It is effective to connect the CR cirthe capacitor and resistor and determine the
cuit in parallel to the load when the
ideal capacitance and resistance values from
power supply voltage is 24 or 48 V
experimentation.
and in parallel to the contacts when
Use a capacitor with a dielectric strength bethe power supply voltage is 100 to
tween 200 and 300 V. When AC is switched,
200 V.
make sure that the capacitor has no polarity.
Yes
Inductive
load
Power supply
Diode and
Zener diode method
Element selection
See
note.
Inductive
load
Diode
method
Feature
Inductive
load
Do not apply contact protective circuits as shown below.
Incorrect
Incorrect
Power
supply
Load
This circuit effectively suppresses arcs when the
contacts are OFF. The capacitance will be
charged, however, when the contacts are OFF.
Consequently, when the contacts are ON again,
short-circuited current from the capacitance may
cause contact weld.
Load
Power
supply
Basic Switches
This circuit effectively suppresses
arcs when the contacts are OFF.
When the contacts are ON again,
however, charge current flows to
the capacitor, which may result in
contact weld.
Technical Information
F-207
Limit
Switches
Circuit example
Terminal Connections
Be sure to connect appropriate wires to the Switch by considering
the voltage and current applied to the Switch.
Solder Terminals
When soldering lead wires to the Switch, make sure that the capacity
of the soldering iron is 60 W maximum and that the temperature of
the iron tip is 300°C maximum unless otherwise specified in the
datasheet of the Switch. Improper soldering may cause abnormal
heat radiation from the Switch and the Switch may burn.
The characteristics of the Switch will deteriorate if a soldering iron
with a capacity of more than 60 W is applied to any part of the Switch
for 6 s or more. For Switches with special soldering specifications,
however (provided in Terminal Connections under Cautions where
appropriate), be sure to perform soldering according to the specifications.
Be sure to apply only the minimum required amount of flux. The
Switch may have contact failures if flux intrudes into the interior of the
Switch.
Quick-connect Terminals
Wire the quick-connect terminals with the specified receptacles and
insert the terminals straight into the receptacles. Do not impose
excessive external force on the terminals in the horizontal or vertical
directions, otherwise the terminals may deform or the housing may
become damaged.
Mechanical Conditions
Operating Stroke Setting
If the stroke is at the total travel position (TTP), the momentary inertia of the operating body may damage the actuator or the Switch
itself. Furthermore, the life of the Switch may be shortened.
Incorrect
Correct
Contact force
Operating force
The setting of the stroke is very important for the Switch to operate
with high reliability.
The chart below shows the relationship among operating force,
stroke, and contact reliability. To obtain high reliability from the
Switch, the Switch actuator must be manipulated within an appropriate range of operating force.
Be sure to pay the utmost attention when mounting the Switch.
If the stroke is set in the vicinity of the operating position (OP) or at
the releasing position (RP), switching operation may become unstable. As a result, the Switch cannot ensure high reliability. Furthermore, the Switch may malfunction due to vibration or shock.
Stroke
Switching Speed and Frequency
The switching frequency and speed of a Switch have a great influence on the performance of the Switch. Pay attention to the following.
FP
Release
Stroke
Release
TTP
Make sure that the operating body returns the actuator to the free
position when the operating body has moved if the Switch is used to
form a normally closed (NC) circuit. If the Switch is used to form a
normally open (NO) circuit, the operating body must move the Switch
actuator to a distance of 70% to 100% of the rated overtravel (OT) of
the Switch, ensuring that the operating body pushes the actuator a
sufficient distance without touching the Switch itself. For details, refer
to Precautions for the relevant product.
Operating body
PT (Pretravel)
Install a stopper
70% of OT
100%
of OT
FP (Free position)
OP (Operating position)
OT (Overtravel)
F-208
Distance to the optimum
setting range
Basic Switches Technical
The permissible switching speed and switching frequency of a
Switch indicates the operational reliability of the Switch. The life
expectancy of the Switch is based on operation under specific conditions regarding the switching speed and switching frequency. The life
of the Switch, however, may vary even if the Switch is operated within
the permissible switching speed and frequency ranges. Test a Switch
sample under the actual conditions to ascertain its life expectancy.
Operating Condition
TTP (Total travel position)
Setting Zone
• If the actuator is operated too slowly, the switching operation may
become unstable, causing faulty contact or contact weld.
• If the actuator is operated too quickly, the Switch may be damaged
by shock.
• If the switching frequency is too high, the switching of the contacts
cannot catch up with the operating speed of the actuator.
• If the operating frequency is extremely low (i.e., once a month or
less frequent), a film may be generated on the surface of the contacts, which may cause contact failures.
Information
Do not leave the Switch actuated for a long time, otherwise the parts
of the Switch may soon deteriorate and changes in its characteristic
performance may result.
■ Correct Use
Electrical Conditions
Incorrect
Snap-back
Impact point
Application of Switch to Electronic Circuits
The Basic Switch in switching operation may cause contact bouncing
or chattering, thus generating noise or pulse signals that may interfere the operation of electronic circuits or audio equipment. To prevent this, take the following countermeasures.
• Design the circuits so that they include appropriate CR circuits to
absorb noise or pulse signals.
• Use Switches incorporating gold-plated contacts for micro loads,
which are more resistive to environmental conditions than standard
Switches. (Ensure, however, that the load capacity is sufficient.)
Correct
Switches for Micro Loads
Use a dedicated Switch for micro loads, otherwise contact failures
may result. Be sure to connect the Switch to a load within the permissible range. Even if the load is within the permissible range, the
inrush current of the load may deteriorate the contacts, thus shortening the life of the Switch. Therefore, if necessary, insert the proper
contact protective circuit.
• Make sure that no improper load is imposed on the actuator, otherwise the actuator may incur local abrasion. As a result, the actuator
may become damaged or its life expectancy shortened.
Incorrect
Roller
Correct
Switching Method
Limit
Switches
Mechanical Conditions
Dog
The switching method has a great influence on the performance of
the Switch. Consider the following before operating the Switch.
• Design the operating body (i.e., the cam or dog) so that it will operate the actuator smoothly. If the actuator snaps backwards quickly
or receives damage due to the shape of the operating body, its life
expectancy may be shortened.
Operating
body
Operating
body
Incorrect
: Correct
: Incorrect
Snap-back
Impact point
• Make sure that the operating body moves in a direction where the
actuator moves. If the actuator is a pin plunger type, make sure that
the operating body presses the pin plunger vertically.
Operating body
Operating body
Correct
: Correct
: Incorrect
Operate the actuator of a hinge roller lever or simulated hinge lever
type in the direction shown below. Operating the actuator in the
opposite direction may result in deformation of the lever.
Incorrect
Correct
• Do not modify the actuator to change the operating position (OP).
• If an external actuator is used as an operating object, check the
material and thickness of the lever and make sure that the force
imposed on the lever is within the permissible range.
Basic Switches
Technical Information
F-209
Mounting
Mounting Location
When mounting the Switch, pay attention to the following.
Be sure not to mount the Switch in locations where the Switch may
be actuated by mistake.
Securing
When securing the Switch, be sure to use the specified mounting
screws and tighten the screws with flat washers or spring washers
securely.
Incorrect
If the Switch housing is made of thermoplastic, the Switch housing
may incur crack damage if it comes into contact with the spring
washers directly. In that case make sure that the flat washers come
into contact with the Switch housing as shown below.
Incorrect
Correct
Correct
Crew
Flat washer
Spring washer
Resin
Malfunction
prevention
• Do not modify the Switch in any way, for example, by widening the
mounting holes.
• Do not subject the Switch to excessive shock or high-frequency
vibrations when mounting as this may have an adverse effect on
Switch performance.
Locking Agent
Maintenance and Inspection
Make sure that the Switch is mounted in locations that allow easy
inspection or replacement of the Switch.
Difficult to inspect
If glue or locking agent is applied, make sure that it does not stick to
the movable parts or intrude into the interior of the Switch, otherwise
the Switch may work improperly or cause contact failure. Some types
of glue or locking agent may generate gas that has a bad influence
on the Switch. Pay the utmost attention when selecting the glue or
locking agent. Particular care is required with unsealed Switches.
Glue or locking agent may intrude into the interior of the switch via
the pushbutton or the terminals and cause faulty operation. Select
the glue or locking agent carefully and be sure to apply it in appropriate places.
Wiring
Make sure that the lead wires are connected with no inappropriate
pulling force and that the wires are supported securely.
Incorrect
Correct
Easy to inspect
The cover must be located in a direction that
ensures easy inspection or maintenance.
Mounting Direction
When using a Switch of low operating force attached with a long
lever, make sure that the lever is in the downward direction as shown
below, otherwise the Switch may not reset properly.
Incorrect
Terminal box
F-210
Correct
Terminal box
Basic Switches Technical
Information
Operation and Storage Environment
Oil and Water Resistance
The standard Switch is not water-resistant. Protect the Switch with
appropriately when using the Switch in places with water or oil spray.
If the Switch is exposed to water drops, use a sealed Switch.
Incorrect
Correct
Terminal box
Terminal box
Incorrect
Correct
Operating Environment
Do not install the Switch in any location or direction where the Switch
resonates or continuous vibration or shock is imposed on the Switch.
If continuous vibration or shock is imposed on the Switch, a contact
failure, malfunction, or a decrease in life expectancy may be caused
by abrasive powder generated from the internal parts. If excessive
vibration or shock is imposed on the Switch, the contacts may malfunction or become damaged.
Do not use the Switch in locations with corrosive gas, such as sulfuric gas (H2S or SO2), ammonium gas (NH3), nitric gas (HNO3), or
chlorine gas (Cl2), or in locations with high temperature and humidity.
Otherwise, contact failure or corrosion damage may result.
If the Switch is used in places with silicone gas, arc energy may
attract silicon dioxide (SiO2) to the contacts and a contact failure may
result. If there is silicone oil, silicone sealant, a wire covered with silicone, or any other silicone-based product near the Switch, attach a
contact protective circuit to suppress the arcing of the Switch or eliminate the source of silicone gas generation.
Be sure to use the Switch at temperature within the specified range.
If the Switch is exposed to radical temperature changes or intense
heat, the performance characteristics of the Switch may change.
Limit
Switches
Incorrect
Handling
Do not drop the Switch, otherwise the Switch may break or deform.
Do not apply oil, grease, or other lubricants to the sliding parts of the
Switch, otherwise the actuator may not operate smoothly. The intrusion of oil, grease, or other lubricants into the internal part may
cause faulty operation or contact failure.
Correct
Maintain a distance
from heat-radiating
sources.
Storage Environment
When storing the Switch, consider countermeasures (e.g., storing in
a plastic bag) to prevent discoloration resulting from sulfidization of
the terminals (silver-plated). Make sure that the location is free of
corrosive gas or dust with no high temperature or humidity. It is recommended that the Switch be inspected before use if it is stored for
three months or more.
Basic Switches
Technical Information
F-211
■ Switch Trouble and Remedial Action
Type
Location of
failure
Failures related to
electrical characteristics
Contacts
Failure
Faulty contact
Possible cause
Dust and dirt collect on the contacts.
Oil or water has penetrated into the Switch.
Remedy
Clean the environment, place the Switch in a
box, or use a sealed Switch.
Chemical substances have been generated Use a Switch having contacts with high envion the contact surfaces because the atmo- ronmental resistivity (such as gold or alloy
sphere contains chemical gas.
contacts).
Chemical substances have been generated
on the contact surface when the Switch
breaks a very low load.
Solder flux has penetrated into the Switch.
Review the soldering method or use a fluxtight Switch.
Malfunction
The contacts are separated from each other Use a Switch having a high contact force
by vibration or shock.
(generally a heavy OF).
Contact weld
The load connected to the Switch is too high. Use a Switch having higher switching capacity or insert a relay to switch high-capacity
loads.
Insulation deg- Contacts have been melted and scattered by Insert a contact protection circuit.
radation (burn- arc.
ing)
Water has penetrated into the Switch beRemove the cause of the failure or use a
cause the Switch is placed in extremely hu- sealed Switch.
mid environment.
Liquid has penetrated into the Switch and
been carbonized by arc heat.
Failures related to
mechanical characteristics
Actuator
Misoperation
The sliding part of the actuator has been
damaged because an excessive force was
applied on the actuator.
Make sure that no excessive force is applied
to the actuator, or use an auxiliary actuator
mechanically strong.
Dust and dirt or oil have penetrated into the Remove the cause of the failure or use a
actuator.
sealed Switch.
The actuator does not release because the
operating body is too heavy.
Use a Switch having a heavier OF.
The Switch is loosely installed and thus does Secure the Switch.
not operate even when the actuator is at the
rated OP.
Mounting
section
Service life is
too short
The shape of the dog or cam is improper.
The operating method is improper.
Review the OT and operating speed.
Damage
A shock has been applied to the actuator.
Change the environment or use a Switch mechanically strong.
The clamping part has not been tightened
enough or the Switch has been loosely
mounted.
Replace the Switch with a new one.
Deformation or drop-out
Relocate the Switch so that improper force
will not be imposed on the actuator or in the
wrong direction. Review the operating method.
Screws have not been inserted straight.
Check and correct screw insertion methods.
Damage
Change the design of the dog or cam.
The mounting screws were tightened with too Tighten the screws to an appropriate torque.
much torque.
The mounting pitch is wrong.
Correct the pitch.
The Switch is not installed on a flat surface. Install the Switch on a flat surface.
Terminal
Damage
An excessive force was applied to the termi- Do not apply an excessive force.
nal while being wired.
The plastic part has been deformed by solder Use a soldering iron rated with a proper wattheat.
age or solder for a proper time. (Refer to the
information given under Precautions for that
model.)
ALL DIMENSIONS SHOWN ARE IN MILLIMETERS.
To convert millimeters into inches, multiply by 0.03937. To convert grams into ounces, multiply by 0.03527.
Cat. No. C122-E1-01
F-212
In the interest of product improvement, specifications are subject to change without notice.
Basic Switches Technical
Information
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement